Home

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

1. ccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 Se Oy scrani aE 12 Logging Out of the Sample Site cccccccssseseeeeeesseeeeenneeeenens 13 The Workarea and Smart Desktop 15 Accessing the Workarea cccsesecsessceeseeesseeeseeeeneeeeaeeenaneenenes 15 Installing the Document Management Functionality 16 Understanding the Smart DeSKtop ccccsesseeseeseeeeeseeeenees 20 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop cssssseesseeseeseeees 23 Sending Instant Email secascincaciscantecenspcceapcdineeseneicesntheretivenentiene 28 Working with Folders and Content 31 Viewing a Folder sssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 33 Viewing Contessina aa anaana a 38 Expanding the Content Area ccccsssseesssesseeseesseeeseenneeseoees Aa PIN C onleN i sisaan 45 Editing Content pee nent te tnt te nner ret eat ne tae eee ere errr 49 Deleting COMEM ssicsigissnisasa 53 Adding SubfolderS sssssansnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 55 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 i Deleting FolderS ssnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 55 Workarea Toolbar Buttons cccssseccesseeceseeeceeseeseesseseeseesenes 56 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 0000 60 Setting a Start Date een ee ee ene OnE me oe emer seem eer 61 Setting an E
2. Web Alerts Add edit Web Alerts View Difference Compares current and earlier Comparing Versions of versions of content Content on page 92 Delete content Deleting Content on page 53 Check for Identify all content with Checking for Broken content linked to Quicklinks to this content Quicklinks on page 55 io Cd this content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 41 Button or Description For more information see Tab val Add Task Attach a task to content Task Module Toolbar on page 342 Properties View and modify Content Check this box if the content Searchable setting should be found when someone searches your Web site e r View View If you can view content in more language than one language select a language from the drop down list Add Add Lets you copy current content Translating Content to Another select select into a new item and translate it Language on page 51 language language to selected language a It Properties The content properties screen contains information about the content Content Title The title assigned to the content Content ID The ID number assigned to the content The ID number is used to retrieve content from a database Content language The content s language Status The current status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 Last User
3. M Use Default Color Layout f Not Specified Border Color C Percent i Word Wrap C Pizel Accessibility Horizontal Slignmert Abbreviation Vertical Alignment Categories Custom Background Background Color Background Image From File The following explains how to respond to these fields Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog a e Abbreviation Sets or retrieves abbreviated text for the content in the tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see http msdn microsoft com library default asp url workshop author dhtml reference properties abbr asp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 621 Section 508 Compliance SS Categories Sets or retrieves a comma delimited list of conceptual categories associated with that tag Can be used to render non visual media such as speech or Braille For more information see hittp msdn microsoft com workshop author dhtml reference properties axis asp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 622 Inserting Comments within Content While editing Ektron CMS400 NET content you can insert comments to the content Comments might be an author s note to himself or other authors about the content For example you could insert a comment explaining why you are using a certain style class Comments are only visible during editing t
4. amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 List Custom You create your own set of choices Use the Item and Item List fields to do this See Also Customizing a Standard List on page 178 Languages list of languages supported by Windows Countries list of all countries in the world U S States and Territories list of all states and territories that make up the U S Canadian Provinces list of all Canadian provinces Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Years list of calendar years ranging from 2004 to 2014 Item Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item Value For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 177 Working with HTML Forms SS ltem Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Text After you insert this field onto the screen you can use e
5. amp Apply Style Normal 20 pt A ds e FUA 42 BBBR MA sya 2e0 a7 E A 2 nbsp TM Ten E la s i iE E Ektron Announces Winner of All Stars Customer Competition Ji tare earnmertitian eantitias Fhe anc E Anan D Sa sano attests Aniara a Enn e ae AEC il L 9 Create the content NOTE Refer to Adding Content on page 45 for additional information about creating new content 10 Click a workflow option in the Add Content screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 413 Working with Collections 11 The Add Content screen closes and the new content link appears in the list of links available to the collection 12 Check off the content you created and other content Login Information 2 in New Content Block 1 13 Click the Add button FP to add the content to the collection Editing Content in a Collection After a collection is created you can add or remove links to and from it Adding Content to the Collection For information about adding content links to a collection see Assigning Content to the Collection on page 410 Removing Content from the Collection To remove a content link from a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 403 2
6. 45 4PM v seas ee os Cancel 7 Click the Done button 8 The date and time appear in the Start Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not go live at the intended time What Happens After Set a Start Date After you save the content it appears on the Content Pending Start Date report which helps you keep track of content with a future start date See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Content Pending Start Date Report After you set a go live date and the content completes the approval chain two scenarios may occur e The content is new Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 62 Scheduling Content to Begin and End The content already exists Each scenario is now explained Setting the Go Live Date on New Content When you set a go live date on new content it becomes viewable on the specified date and time as long as it completes the approval chain If a user accesses the page that contains the content before then he sees only the template This occurs within Ektron CMS400 NET and when the content is viewed on the Web site Setting the Go Live Date on Existing Content When you set a go live date for changes made to existing content and it completes the approval chain the content has a grey border within Ek
7. Confusion over function application and multiplication sin x gin y function sinx multiplication sin x p Confusion over the symbol qg d a f cbc dx differential function just multiplication d dx f Inherently ambiguous notations 1 2 1 2 x open interval or vector closed interval or list mean or moment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 636 Working with the Math Expression Editor To assist in diagnosing these problems you can check your equation by clicking the check mark button on the far right of the standard toolbar This action highlights parts of your equation based on the role Math Expression editor thinks they play in your equation as well as revealing invisible times operators and expression grouping You can toggle back and forth between syntax highlighting and regular display by clicking the check mark button again Also starting to edit switches the equation to normal mode lf there are obvious problems with your equation Math Expression editor displays an error message in the editor status line and highlight the template where the error was detected in blinking red As long as you don t see any errors Math Expression editor is generating some content markup encoding of your equation However you should always look carefully to be sure that there aren t any subtle errors in the translation such as extra invisible multiplications The co
8. English fU 5 4 Advance Settings 5 At minimum a menu requires a title If you want to add more information click Advance Settings When you do the lower section of the screen appears as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 424 Working with Menus Title English U 5 Advance Settings These fields are not required Image Link fCMS400Example ti CS OW FG l Use image instead of a title URL Link CMS400Example E Hyperlink this menu item to this link Template Link ICMS400Example ti CS CO Override tems with quicklinks at this menu level with this template Description 6 Using the following table complete the fields on the Add Menu screen Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen OO e The name given to the menu by the creator It appears on the Web page to indicate the kind of information on the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 425 Working with Menus eS Image Link You can have an image appear next to or instead of the menu title For example Document Management Solution Web Authoring Tools Web Image Editor Store 4 Download Center To do this follow these steps Note Before beginning these steps the image must reside in the library if it does not add it before proceeding For more information see Copying Files to the Library on page 125 2 3
9. NOTE You can also access favorite folders and content from the original location A favorite is not a copy of the original item it s merely a shortcut to it Displaying the Favorites Folder To display the My Favorites folder follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the left frame 2 Right click the mouse 3 Amenu appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 273 Using Ektron Explorer Manage Configurations Use Configuration P Refresh B ptio Hz Froperties 4 Click Options 5 The Options dialog appears Ektron Explorer Options Web Page x Ektron Explorer Options Folder Options Display Favorites Folder Display Recently Viewed Folder Size of Recently Wiewed Folder per LMS 6 Check Display Favorites Folder 7 Click Apply then OK 8 Right click the mouse and click Refresh Suppressing the Display of the Favorites Folder To remove the Favorites menu from the left frame follow the procedure in Displaying the Favorites Folder on page 273 but uncheck the Display Favorites Folder checkbox if you turn the Favorites display off then later turn it back on designated favorites folders and content are remembered and will reappear Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 274 Using Ektron Explorer Marking Content Favorite You can add any content item to the Favorites folder To do so follow t
10. S Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 259 Using Ektron Explorer Menu Description For More Information Option see New gt Form Create a new form within the selected folder Working with HTML Forms on page 141 Note After creating new form move the cursor to the left frame click its folder and click Refresh to see the form View Change the size of the selected or all thumbnails Changing the Thumbnail Size Small on page 254 Medium Large All Small All Medium All Large View Properties View information about selected content Viewing Information about a Content Item on page 260 Viewing Information about a Content Item To learn about any content item follow these steps Browse to or use the search to locate the content 2 Move the cursor next to the content title so that it turns into a hand 3 Right click the mouse Select Properties 5 A screen appears listing information about the content See illustration below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 260 Using Ektron Explorer content Microsoft Internet Ex General Sele A Ea 4 Froperties E Name About Us Path SCMS400D ero IL 35 Language 1033 Type Content Last Editor Application Administrator z Last Modified 3 10 2006 11 42 50 AM Status Approved and Published ls Searchable es Go Live Date End Date Smart Forms Search
11. Title ID Date Modified Filename ATM 624 4 14 2005 10 15 18 AM CMS400ExampleuploadediImages aim 2i gi VAN ON DEMAND PIE cm ip ace me EE JEEE CMS400 Logo 14 1 3 2005 3 58 19 PM CMsS400 net CMS400Example uploadedimages cms400 5 4 The sub folders appear in the left frame Files in the root folder library appear in the right frame You can use the dropdown list circled above to change the type of library files that appear To work with any library file click it When you do the View Library screen appears providing additional information about the item From here you can Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 119 Library Folder e edit its title file name or description e overwrite it e find content linked to it e delete it For more information see Viewing Files on page 127 The following table explains the toolbar buttons on the library screen NOTE Your system administrator determines which library folders you can access and which functions you can perform on library items within the folders Search library Searching the Library on page 121 View the library s properties Library Folder Properties on page 120 screen Add an image file quicklink or Copying Files to the Library on hyperlink to the library page 125 Select the type of Library file to work with Library Folder Properties To view the library folder s properties fol
12. ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Image Editor Insert Custom Tag WeblmageFX looks similar to eWebEditPro XML but has different menu and toolbar buttons File Edt View Image Annotations jde aelmex olo QaQgaQl ia _ Pae e e omT lf the Image Edit button A appears on your toolbar you can click it to open WebImageF x If no image is selected when you press the button or click the menu command a blank editor appears and you can use the File gt Open command to choose an image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 523 Editing Images Once the image is in WeblmageFX you can use the buttons and menu options to edit it The rest of this chapter describes those buttons and menu options Saving the Image When you finish editing the image you can insert it into the content by pressing the Exit button Als Alternatively you can save the image to a local or network folder using the Save button eel When you insert the image into the content WeblmageFX checks the file extension If the image is a gif file it is saved as a png file in your temporary directory For example test gif is saved as C Documents and Settings your user name Local Settings Temp test png Any other file type is saved in your temporary directory without changing the file extension unless you use the Save As option For example you save test jpg as test png Assigning a Name to a
13. Adding Subfolders on page 55 Adding Subfolders on page 55 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 32 e Deleting Folders on page 55 Viewing a Folder To view any folder under the content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea as described in Site Preview on page 12 2 Click Content from the left lower side of the Workarea EEE Ee eee ee EE Eee 3 All content in the content folder and the selected language appear on the right side of the screen Subfolders appear in the upper left frame NOTE The View Menu lets you filter content by type For example you can set it to view only HTML content Therefore you may only see content of a selected type in the folder See Also View Menu on page 36 4 To work with any folder or its content click the folder When you do its content appears in the right frame NOTE You can only view folders for which your system administrator has granted permission 5 If your system supports more than one language you can select content for a particular language or all languages using the View gt Language menu option illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 33 iew Contents of Folder Content 2 4 tion 8 tus Date Modifier 3 14 2006 9 3 27 2006 9 il All Types ZH HTML Content testcon 1 HTML FormSurvey Office Documents Manag
14. Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 8 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 9 Update the fields by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 10 Click the Save button 8 Editing a Menu Item This section explains how to edit the following types of menu items e content on your Web site e library asset e link to an external Web site e submenu You can edit a menu item via e its content folder e menus module Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 440 Working with Menus e navigation link on a Web page See Also Working with Menus on page 420 Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder To edit a menu item from its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu Click View gt Menus Click the menu you want to edit 4 The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all menu items View Menu select About Us L Why Choose Ektron D Business Practices Company Profile k Mews L Staff List G Careers L Ektron Medical Blog L Forum L site Search E Using the Ektron Explorer English U 5 O Add 5 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit 6 Cli
15. Delete selected content 7 Delete Il Underline Ctrl U Make the text underlined 2 Remove alignment Remove alignment settings applied to selected content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 478 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only PMB Bookmark Create a bookmark Using Bookmarks on page 599 Insert a horizontal line Ctrl P Print the editor content Print El Ctrl A Select all content Select All Fy Deselect all selected content Select None Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 479 Customizing Your Toolbar The eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more menus Each menu has one or more buttons You can recognize the beginning of a menu by the double vertical bars circled in the illustration BERAR g ooye AAA aal mip als IE Apply Style gt Normal gt Times New Roman 3 12 pt A aa BR i This sample toolbar has four menus Your Webmaster determines e which menus are available to you e which buttons appear on each menu and the sequence in which they appear initially e whether or not you are authorized to customize your toolbar If you are not authorized your edits are not saved when you leave the eWebEditPro XML screen If you are authorized to customize your toolbar there are several ways to do so e Removing Or Adding Menus on page 481 e
16. Details the amount of words used in the editor Launches a dialog box that allows you to Find Find Next or Replace an occurrence of the string entered into Find field Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Copy selected text and graphics into temporary memory Leave selected data where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste text in a different format For example you can copy text from a browser and paste it as Rich Text instead of Hypertext Similar to the Document Navigator this function lets you highlight a section of text a table or section of a table The menu is dynamic and the selections can change depending on the location of the cursor For example if the cursor is in a table the menu has the following entries html body table tr td and content 658 Select All Button None Selects everything in the editor Menu Edit gt Select All Keystroke Control A Undo Reverse the most recent action as if it Button never occurred You can undo up to 50 Menu Edit gt Undo actions E Keystroke Control Z Redo Reverse the undo action You can redo Button 7 as many actions as you hav
17. Display the page content as HTML Insert a blank space character Although you can add spaces in the editor using the lt space gt bar on the keyboard those spaces are ignored when the content is displayed by a browser Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Editing in Microsoft Word on page 503 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Using the Data Designer Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Using the Data Designer Viewing and Editing HTML on page 609 472 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only i Insert special characters such as and a NN from a drop down list Special Characters To view the list click the black down Remove all style information applied to selected text You apply styles using the Style dropdown list For example Before Fi Remove Style lt P class note gt This is initial content lt P gt lt P gt This is initial content lt P gt Style Display a list of styles Users can select f4poly Style from the list to apply a style to selected Note that the list can change depending on the formatting of the selected line Your Webmaster determines which styles are available Change the heading size Your Webmaster determines which heading sizes are available Heading Siz
18. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus For more information see Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 565 Specifying Table Width on page 567 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 591 Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 5 4 Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 5 6 Assigning Border Color on page 577 Assigning Border Size on page 579 Assigning Cell Padding on page 597 Assigning Cell Spacing on page 598 561 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Cell Properties Dialog Box The Cell Properties dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a cell s appearance Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Cancel Borders M Use Default Color f Mot Specified Border Color C Percent ford wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Custom Background Background Color Background Image From File The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 562 Field s Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Word Wrap Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Background Color Background Image Use Default Color Border Color Lets you specify
19. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 94 Comparing Versions of Content ee tome e a Setup Opens setup dialog box to configure the settings Typically only an administrator would use this For more information see Setup on page 95 a Displays additional information about the compare feature Closes the window Setup Click the Setup button ap to open the setup dialog box Typically a system administrator would edit these settings w Ektron eWebDiff f Compare visual aspect C Compare source code Whitespace Other C lgnore All f Smart Detect f Detect All Ignore Case lgnore format Ei attributes You can change the setup options to better suit your needs The following table explains each option i Kamia Compare Options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 95 Comparing Versions of Content ee Compare visual Compares content as it would appear ona aspect Web page Compare source Displays compared content as source HTML code Whitespace Options Ignore All Blank whitespace characters are ignored Smart Detect One or more consecutive whitespace characters are treated as a single separation sequence That is multiple whitespace characters are ignored Detect All Blank whitespace characters are treated as any other character Other Options Ignore Case Determines whether comparison is case sensitive For e
20. Hem p Manage Configurations Use Configuration P Refresh Subtree Properties Language The menu options may change depending on your permissions and the state of the folder The following table explains the options Menu Option Description For more information see Collapse Closes the selected folder The next time you open it subfolders below it that were previously open will be open Note This option only appears if the selected item is an open folder A minus sign indicates an open folder see illustration below Books 9 Calendar 9 CentuyMedicalS ervices 9 Calendar a p Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 264 Using Ektron Explorer Menu Option Description For more information see Collapse All Closes the selected folder and any open subfolders below it The next time you open it no subfolders below it will be open Note This option only appears if the selected item is an open folder A minus sign indicates an open folder Expand Opens the selected folder Note This option only appears if the selected folder is closed A plus sign indicates a closed folder see illustration below 3 Books O Calendar fem CenturMedicalServices _ Contacts Expand All Open the selected folder and all subfolders under it Note This option only appears if the selected folder is closed A plus sign indicates a closed folder Open Display c
21. New Collection German Standard French standard 6 Click the Add button Ea 7 The Add Items to Collection screen appears displaying e all subfolders within the selected folder Subfolders are available if the Include subfolders checkbox was checked for the collection e content in the selected folder that is not part of the collection Note that the file tyoes selection remembers your most recent choice and can filter which files appear You can change the selection if desired Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 411 Working with Collections Add items to Collection New Collection fall Types vigole lt e All Types TML Content Office Documents Managed Files io Books 5 Calendar B CenturyMedicalServices 5 Contacts io Dynamic Content In Content D fao io Form Example i IntranetBasic D Press Releases co Purchase Orders B AddoOnRegistrationProcess doc 381 1033 8 Check boxes next to content to add to the collection You can only add content from the selected folder or its subfolders Subfolders are only available if the Include subfolders checkbox is checked for the collection Click a subfolder to view its content To return to the parent folder click the folder with the up arrow 1 NOTE If you select content from a subfolder click the Add button to add selected content to the collection Navigating between subfolders deselec
22. View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag 3 Press the down arrow key to select Menus Menus becomes highlighted Menus Cut Cnr 4 Press lt Enter gt A new menu lists all toolbar menus available to yOu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 614 Section 508 Compliance lf your Webmaster has given you access to all standard toolbar menus the menu looks like this Edit VIEW As Faragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Test Direction Customize 5 Press the down arrow key to select the toolbar menu that has a button that you want to use 6 A new menu appears listing all options on the selected menu The following menu displays what might appear if you select the Edit Menu Your Webmaster determines which menu options are available Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 615 Section 508 Compliance Cut Copy Faste Paste Text Replace Find Nest Print Undo Redo Check Spelling Check Spelling 4s fou Type Bookmark Hyperlink Remove Link HRA Picture Table Edit in Word 7 Press the down arrow key until the desired option is highlighted Then click the option to perform the action Section 508 Tables You can apply the following information to any table to make it 508 compliant Heading Rows Accessibility dialog Accessibili
23. on page 133 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file The image is placed into the picture properties dialog box where you can change it before inserting it For information about the picture properties dialog box see Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 508 Quicklinks and Forms For a definition of the terms quicklinks and forms see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 117 Adding a Quicklink or Form to Content After new content is created if the Add to Quicklinks table checkbox was checked for it users can insert a quicklink to it into any other content To do so follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 133 The only difference is that you add a quicklink or form instead of a file Be sure to place the cursor where you want the quicklink or form to appear before inserting it When the quicklink or form is inserted the title of the jumped to content appears in the content To test the quicklink or form select the newly inserted title and double Click it When the page is published a reader can click the link to jump to the quicklink or form page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 138 Library Folder Viewing Quicklinks or Forms To view a quicklink or form follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 127 The only difference is that you view a quicklink or form instead of a f
24. 1 Form the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 451 Working with Menus 2 From the language drop down list select the new menu s language am Aa wt ae blli ID Description 3 Create the menu See Adding a Menu via the Menus Module on page 429 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 452 Updating Your User Profile Ektron CMS400 NET System Management Updating Your User Profile When a new user is added to an Ektron CMS400 NET Web site the administrator sets up a personal profile for him It contains information such as password and email address You can update some personal profile information when needed This section explains how to modify your personal profile Viewing Your Profile Before changing your personal profile you must view it To do so follow these steps 1 Access your Workarea 2 From the lower left frame click Settings gt User Profile 3 Your user profile appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 453 Updating Your User Profile View User Information jedit Username jedit First Name John Last Name Edit User Language Anp Default E Mail Address jedit test com System Notifications Receiving of E Mail Disabled Work Page Size Width 790p Height s80p Display button text in the title bar Landing Page after login
25. 2 Click the Recurring tab to assign the event for more than one day Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 308 Working with Calendars Location i One Time Recurring Start End Wednesday April 06 2005 E Ee Wednesday April 06 2005 E Ee Event Will Occur Event times Every Day e Every selected weekday start 12 00 AM Every selected date of ever f Manh l l End 12 00 AM Every first selected weekday of every Month Yearly every selected date of 3 Refer to the table below to complete to the Recurring fields SSS Start Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user End Date Click the calendar icon to display a calendar From it select an end date for the series of recurring events Event will occur Select the frequency of the event from among the choices Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 309 Working with Calendars 4 Finish your edits For documentation of See Start Time Click the clock icon to display a clock From it select a start time End Time
26. Assigned To Me Title CID State Prior ity Due Date Assigi e Assigned By Me Prep to Move Downstairs Not Started Low 4 Mar 2005 E je Edit Greeting Content Block 24 Not Started Normal 7 Mar 2005 je Not Started High 11 Mar 2005 a e Not Started Active From this page you can view sort update or add tasks To learn more about the View Tasks screen see Viewing a Task on page 331 To learn about sorting by Task Type see Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 335 Creating a Task via the Task Folder See Also Task Module Toolbar on page 342 To create a task follow these steps 1 Access your Tasks folder as described in Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 318 2 Click the Add button Ee Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 319 Managing Tasks IMPORTANT The Add button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 The Add Task screen appears Enter information for the task using the following table Field Description Task Title Enter a title for the task for example Update Content The title appears in the left column of the View Tasks screen Assigned To Your user name appears e f you do not have Redirect permissions you cannot assign tasks to other users If you have Redire
27. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 29 e Smart Desktop e Tasks e Approvals e Reports e User and user group setup Wherever instant email is available one of the email icons appears Modifying Instant eMail When the email screen appears the following information is copied from Ektron CMS400 NET into the email Source of Default Information Editable User you selected to receive the email If the user does Yes not have valid email address an error message appears If desired you on the screen see below If you then insert a valid can add email address the email is sent recipients by iyping them ae leit eesti esi ies Mewes a into this field 1 Administrater Ektron com If you specify a group to receive the message as long as one group member has a valid email address all group members with valid addresses receive the email Subject If the email message is linked to content its title appears If the email message is linked to content a link to the message content appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 30 Working with Folders and Content Every content item resides in the Content folder or one of its subfolders So to work with existing content or create a new content you must first navigate to its folder A typical content folder screen appears below It consists of three sections e The top left frame shows the
28. NOTE Unlike the Smart Forms you can assign to regular folders you cannot require the user to select a Smart Form when creating a new post It is only an option The Blog Roll The blog roll lets you add a list of Web site links to your blog page Think of this as a roll call of blog pages a list of blogs related to you or that you want visitors of your blog to also visit Below is an example of a blog roll on a Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 358 Blogs PiGe THI Grhieiaer SF dki fare ays a a Ler nothing Adding a Blog Roll Link Follow these steps to add a blog roll link 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To add a blog category from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 359 Blogs 4 On the Blog Roll tab click Add New Roll Link Add a Blog to folder Purchase_Orders Add New Roll Link Remove Last Roll Link 5 The Add Blog Roll Link form appears Add a Blog to folder Purchase_Orders Remove Roll Link short Description y 6 Fill out the form according to the table below Description Describes the link in the blog roll The URL of the blog you are adding to the blog roll It must begin wi
29. R WWD S The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Horizontal Alignment field Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned 1 Columns Spanned Layout width alls Not Specified i Percent R Word Wrap i Pixels 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 592 Working with Table Cells Setting Vertical Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the vertical alignment of a cell You have four choices top middle bottom along the baseline of the first line of text the term baseline is defined in Aligning the Picture on page 516 This example illustrates the choices Top pm Bottom Baseline To set vertical justification for a table cell follow these steps CE eS YS Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Vertical Alignment field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 593 Working with Table Cells Cell Properties Spar Rows Spanned Columns S panned 50 Layout width C Not Specified f Percent I Word Wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignment x Vertical Alignment ki 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Sp
30. Save Check in and Publish on page 219 and Adding Content on page 45 Editing Open Office Files You can edit any Open Office file within Ektron CMS400 NET When you do the associated Open Office application highlighted in the illustration below appears within the CMS editor area Yie Content eres Code in DotNet odt EA NEN Ui ek rag ll i lt view U S Add select language Content Metadata Web Alerts fe Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Window Help B Shale BSR Fa FELRE 3 ult Eai r CAPUT 1 g Magnus es domine et laudabilis valde magna witus tua et sapienti vult homo aligua portio creaturae tuae et homo circumferens mortali peccati sui et testimonium guia superbis resistis et tamen laudare te tuae tu excitas ut laudare te delectet quia fecisti nos ad te et inguiet inte da mihi domine scire et intellegere utrum sit prius invocare te invocare te sed guis te invocat nesciens te alud enim pro alio potes invocars ut sciaris quomodo autem invocabunt in guem non credit i praedicante et laudabunt dominum gui requirunt eur quaerentes ei laudabunt eum quaeramte domine invacanste etinvocemte credi Invocatte domine fides mea guam dedisti mihi guam inspirast miha DJ ministerium praedicatoris tui F i a m PET aS ae ee ee l FF _1 l l m T 1 lt jiii The proce
31. What do you want your website to do Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Ektron Inc 5 Northern Blvd Suite 6 Amherst NH 03031 Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Email sales ektron com http www ektron com Copyright 2006 Ektron Inc All rights reserved EKTRON is a registered trademark of Ektron Inc Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 October 06 2006 For the latest version of this manual go to http www ektron com web content management solutions aspx id 4020 EKTRON INC SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THIS BEFORE LOADING SOFTWARE YOUR RIGHT TO USE THE PRODUCT DELIVERED IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT USING THIS PRODUCT SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT DO NOT DOWNLOAD CUSTOMER should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software program s contained herein the Software Downloading and or using the Software or copying the Software onto CUSTOMER S computer hard drive indicates CUSTOMER S acceptance of these terms and conditions If CUSTOMER does not agree with the terms of this agreement CUSTOMER should not download Ektron Inc Ektron grants and the CUSTOMER accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive License to use the Software on the following terms and conditions 1 Right to use The Software
32. gt Task Categories and Types To add a Task Category and a Task Type follow these steps 1 Goto the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 319 2 Click the Add link next to the Task Type dropdown box Add Task Assigned To f jedit Select User or Group Language English U S Content Select Priority Task Category Task Type State Start Date E Due Date o i Description Not Specmfed Add Edit a l 3 The Add Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 325 Managing Tasks Add Task Type Task Type Onda Task Type to Existing Task catego M W Task Type Description O Add Task Type to New Task Category ea C Not Available From this screen you can perform the following e Add a task type to an existing task category e Create a new task category e Add anew task type e Add a task type description e Define task type availability NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 4 Enter your information 5 Click Save i 6 Your new Task C
33. 12 If desired you can edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 218 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 217 Using the Document Management Functionality 13 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 219 and Adding Content on page 45 Editing a Document s Properties If the host application such as Microsoft Word has a Properties screen you can access it by clicking File gt Properties or the Properties option on the host application s Document Management menu NOTE CMS400 NET installs the Document Management menu on the Office application Document Properties EO axi General Summary Statistics Contents Custom Title Expense Report January 2005 Subject Travel expenses 00 Author Jon Wily Manager Jim Beaner Company Ekron Category Expenses keywords trav comments Does not include trip to corporate headquarters in Cincinnati on 1 15 05 Hyperlink a base Template Mormal dot m Save Preview picture Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 218 Using the Document Management Functionality Save Check in and Publish When you finish editing a document you have four options for what to do next They are explained in the following table You can carry ou
34. 7 amp Ektron Announces Winner of All Stars Customer Competition A p Mi W Tal m uFi UT WW il 2 Place the cursor within the content where you want the library file to appear Click the library button fi The library opens 5 Navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to insert Library Library Folder Content images SiC Books i HS Calendar ai CenturyMedicalServices Shear a a k J wrn e tits The aaa a Te E LL __ __ _ _ _ _ ___ ot eT ee ee ee ETET H k H ee ee eee ed h a ee ee ee Pt b Ti al a if 6 Contacts 44 Dynamic Content In Co Hi FAG a Form Example CMS400 Logo uploadedimages cms400 50 qit 1 44 gt IntranetBasic a z N MS400 net H mytest a Press Releases collection error gif 1 6EDS6 4506 B441 0EECEQ2DAFES4 gif 6 0 Purchase Orders explorerl GIF C B364 498C 9044 CB00B366BF86 GIF 6 6 replication uploadediImages replication gif y E OO mpr virkin 6 From the file types dropdown list select the kind of file you want to insert 7 All library files of that type in the selected folder appear on the screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 134 Library Folder 8 Click the file you want to insert NoTE You can preview the file by clicking the preview button La 9 Click the insert button to insert the file 10 A hyperlink to the file appears in your content y
35. 9 Therapies L AntiBody Therapy E Hemophilia Therapy D Renal Therapies 4 Move the cursor over the submenu and click Add from the popup menu View Menu rapie D antibody Therapy NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 5 The Add New Item screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 436 Working with Menus Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 432 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 434 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 434 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 435 Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page NOTE You can only use this feature after your Web developer has modified a page template to display the menu This procedure is described in the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer Manual section Custom ASP Functions gt Menus To add new content to a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page th
36. A screen appears Copy the ServerIob from the top text field 3 Email to license ektron com the SerwerIiD with your request Tor a server You can use the host application to edit the file then switch to the View Content screen to insert supporting information such as summary and metadata Use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions like view history submit for publishing and delete For more information see Working with Managed Files on page 234 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 213 Using the Document Management Functionality Open Office Files You cannot create an Open Office file within Ektron CMS400 NET You must create it in Open Office then import it into Ektron CMS400 NET Once the file is imported into Ektron CMS400 NET you can edit it from there For more information see Working with Open Office Files on page 231 security For the purposes of security documents are treated like other content Your system administrator applies security to each folder determining which user groups can perform which tasks on the content in a folder For more information see the Setting Permissions chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Software Requirements Your production server must run Windows 2003 server or Windows 2000 Working with Microsoft Office Documents Ektron CMS400 NET provides four ways to work with Microsoft Office documents They are de
37. Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 405 3 Click the Remove button 4 The Delete Items from Collection screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 414 Working with Collections 5 Check boxes next to links that you want to delete Select All Clear All Title ID UR Home Page Content 1 CI L Support Page 8 ct W Plastic Molder 123 13 CI RC Cheetah 5 fa RC Redstar 7 Of M Contact Ektron 15 fcr LC New Content Block 17 CI Click Select All to select all boxes Click Clear All to remove all check marks 6 Click the Delete button Reordering Collections List After a collection is created and more than one content item is assigned to it you can reorder the collections list To do so follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 403 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 405 Click the Reorder button 4 The Reorder Collection screen appears Reorder Collection Support Packages Internal Support Policies RC International Support support Request Form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 415 Working with Collections 5 Click the content whose ord
38. EETA SY S 2 options HTML Li To jsmith yahoo com idl cc Subject HTML For the World Wide Web with SHTML and C55 Pip httow 192 168 0 203cms400 demo collection aspx id j When the recipient gets the email he can click the quicklink to view the content within a browser NOTE The recipient must have access privileges the folder that contains the content 192 168 0 203 cms400demo In the above example Notice that the content title is copied to the email s subject line Performing Actions on Folders Folders appear in Ektron Explorer s left frame You can perform actions on them via two menus that appear when you place the cursor in that frame and right click the mouse For example you can delete a folder create a new folder search a folder etc This section explains these actions One menu appears if you select a folder then right click the mouse See Using the Menu that Appears when a Folder is Selected on page 263 A different menu appears if you right click the mouse without selecting a folder See Using the Menu that Appears when No Folder is Selected on page 267 Using the Menu that Appears when a Folder is Selected To see this menu move the cursor to the left frame select a folder and right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 263 Using Ektron Explorer Collapse Collapse All Upen Search Add to Favorites Rename Delete
39. Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 255 Using Ektron Explorer searching for CMS Content The Explorer s search feature lets you look for CMS content by entering some of the contents title or some of its text Search by any or all of the criteria below All or park of the title po Containing the word or phrase po Look ir Chis400Demao Hore advanced options Selecting a Folder to Search in You can also select a folder in which to begin to search This reduces the search time if you are certain the content is within a folder or its subfolders NOTE The Advanced Search Options let you include or exclude a folder s subfolders from the search See Also Advanced Search Options on page 257 Use the Look In dropdown to select a folder to search illustrated below The drop down box lists all folders that you opened since you signed on Containing the word or phrase TT T ma ma ma ma ma ma ma ma ma ma ma a ma a ma a ma mn ma a a a ma ea a n n n n ma mn mm n n n en n E y Search Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 256 Using Ektron Explorer lf the folder you want is not in the list click Browse and a complete CMS folder display appears Select a folder from that display Advanced Search Options Advanced search options let you e search just the current folder or that folder plus all of its subfolders e include
40. I TAKE A SURVEY How often do you visit the Ektron Medical site Daily Weekly Monthly Semi Annually A Yearly Vote Editing a Poll from the Web Site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 206 Working with HTML Forms To edit an existing poll on a Web site follow these steps WARNING If you are logged into the site and create a new poll from the site by right clicking on the poll selecting New the existing poll is replaced with the new poll 1 Log on to the Web site for CMS400 NET 2 Right click the poll you want to change and click Edit I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical RS Online dial CoWorker SEE O Newsgroup 0 Delete i Add Task Properties Submit Form 3 Make any changes to the Poll using the Forms editor 4 Submit the Poll to the Approval Process Steps to Creating a Survey To create a new survey follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a survey in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 649 NOTE For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 202 For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 144 Choose a content folder 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New gt HTML Form Survey E
41. Page Templates Dynamic Replication Replicate Folder Contents The number of posts visible on the blog page If the number of posts exceeds this number only this many of the most recent posts appear For example if this property is set to 10 and you add 11 posts only the ten most recent posts appear This number can be from 1 to 999 If you leave this field blank all posts made during the current day are visible Choose how to handle comments by checking the appropriate boxes For more information see Controlling Blog Comments on page 377 Enter a service that notifies a blog search site when blog posts are added to your blog site These blog search sites allow Web users to search content contained in blogs around the world To use this feature check the Notify blog search engines of new posts box and enter a path to a search site An example path is http rpc technorati com roc ping If you want to provide a custom style sheet for the blog enter the path to it relative to the site root For example WworkArea csslib my custom blogs css Leave this field blank to inherit the default style sheet blogs css located in Workarea csslib You can customize the default style sheet but your modifications will get overwritten when you upgrade Ektron CMS400 NET Lets you specify one or more templates for content in this folder For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing HTML
42. Removing or Adding Menu Items on page 482 e Restoring Toolbars on page 485 e Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar on page 485 e Creating a New Menu on page 485 e Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar on page 487 e Changing the Menu s Orientation on page 488 Each procedure is explained below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 480 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing Or Adding Menus To remove or add a menu follow these steps Place the cursor on the toolbar Right click the mouse A dropdown list appears It displays all menus available to you and the Customize option iv Edit eS View As ve Paragraph Format o Format ve Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Test Direction Customize NOTE lf Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar Menus that are checked appear on your toolbar In the above example the Special Characters View As Format and Paragraph Format menus appear The Table Position Objects and Text Directions menus which are not checked are available but do not currently appear on the toolbar 4 To adda menu to your toolbar that appears on the list but is not currently checked place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse A check mark appears and the menu appears on the toolbar To remove a menu from your toolbar place the cursor on the menu name and click t
43. The Collections Report screen appears Collections Report Pen ee pe te Title ID Description Path Products 1 Products navigation Products This is an example of using the Main Jobs listing collection object for creating teasers in Human_ Resources a page Support Packages 3 Support 3 The screen has four columns described below Column Title Description Title Title given to collection by user who created or last edited it ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET Developers use this number to reference the collection in ecmCollection custom function Description Description given to collection by user who created or last edited it Path Folder location of the collection You can click any collection to view information about it and perform tasks on it See Viewing a Collection on page 405 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 404 Working with Collections You can also add a new collection See Creating a Collection on page 407 Viewing a Collection To view a collection follow these steps 1 Select a collection using the procedure described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 403 or Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 404 2 The View Collection screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 405 Working with Collections View Collection Pro
44. View gt Document Navigator Keystroke None Document Navigator Show Paragraph Markers Button i Menu View Show gt Paragraph Markers Keystroke None Button td E Menu Format gt Style Keystroke None Font Button None Menu Format gt Font Keystroke None Size Button None Menu Format gt Size Keystroke None Bold Button B Menu Format gt Bold Keystroke Control B Style Dropdown List Similar to Select this function adds a clickable menu bar to the editor when in design mode This lets you to highlight a section of text a table or section of a table The menu is dynamic and the selections can change depending on the location of the cursor For example if the cursor Is in a table the menu has the following entries html body table tr td and content html body p content Shows or hides paragraph markers and other special markings related to formatting such as formatting for bulleted items Choose from a predefined list of styles to apply to your text Choose from a predefined list of fonts Choose from a predefined list of sizes for your font Make the text bold Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 662 Align Left Align Center Align Right Unordered List Ordered List Decrease Indent Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Button i Menu Format gt Italic Keystroke Control
45. When you edit an existing content summary it goes into a checked out state After creating the summary check the content back in From that point you must submit it or publish it NOTE Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 70 Adding or Editing Metadata Adding or Editing Metadata You can add several kinds of metadata to Ektron CMS400 NET content e Metadata that appears on your Web site s search page below the standard search fields illustrated below It helps site visitors find content on your Web site Search Text All the words i Any of the words Exact Phrase Match Partial words City of Origin This kind of metadata also appears on the Search screen within the Workarea For more information see Entering Custom Metadata on page 72 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 71 Adding or Editing Metadata e Metadata that resides in the source code of a Web page Examples include the title and meta tags This data makes it easier for search engines to find your Web page illustrated below _ Format View Help EMETs HTTP EQUIV Content Type CONTENT text html charset 1s0 8859 1L kmeta name robots content index follow kmeta name rewisit after content 15 days gt EMETA JHTTP EQUIV Imagetoolbar CONTENT no gt lt Titlesektron Inc web Content Management and Document Management wi exib
46. creating new content for 412 default template 409 definition 401 deleting 416 editing content blocks 414 finding 402 folder using to find collection 404 information editing 416 multi language 417 removing content 414 reordering content blocks 415 toolbar button 57 toolbar buttons 407 using default template or quicklinks 409 viewing 405 color background cell applying 585 deleting 586 table applying 574 deleting 575 cell border 584 default 563 content block border meaning 648 depth specifying 553 font changing 473 picture border 516 table border 577 default 561 columns table adding 566 deleting 566 spanning 589 specifying 565 comments adding another 625 adding to a task 337 inserting into content 623 updating 625 viewing 625 Compare source code field eWebDiff 96 Compare visual aspect field eWebDiff 96 comparing content 92 content area explained 97 Diff tab 97 how status affects comparison 93 published tab 98 setup window 95 staged tab 98 toolbar 94 view tabs 97 when available 93 window explanation 93 content see also content block active definition 649 adding 45 adding as menu option 432 adding to collection 410 approval process 85 archived toolbar button 56 archiving see archiving area expanding 44 awaiting approval 21 checked in definition 650 checked out definition 651 collaboration 623 comparing see comparing con tent creating 45 currently checked out 22 declining 84 declining
47. edit menu items Managing Menus Ektron CMS400 NET gives you the flexibility to add edit view and delete a menu The following sections explain how to do that Adding a New Menu on page 423 Adding a Menu Item on page 429 Adding New Content to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 437 Editing a Menu on page 438 Editing a Menu Item on page 440 Viewing a Menu on page 443 Reordering Menu Items on page 446 Deleting a Menu on page 447 Deleting a Menu Item on page 448 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 449 Adding a New Menu You can create a menu by navigating to a folder or by choosing Modules gt Menus from the left frame of the Workarea If you choose Modules gt Menus you cannot select the menu s folder it is automatically assigned to the root folder In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder it is assigned to the selected folder Adding a Menu via Content Folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 423 Working with Menus Navigate to a content folder 2 The current language appears as a flag next to the screen title To create the menu in this language proceed to the next step To change the language of the new menu click View gt Language and select the new language 3 Click New gt Menu 4 The Add Menu screen appears Add Menu p 4 NU yas ag ok gins al Title
48. gt Insert Row or Column Keystroke None Button None Menu Table gt Insert Cell Keystroke None Button ar Menu Table gt Delete Row Keystroke None Button F Menu Table gt Delete Column Keystroke None Button None Menu Table gt Delete Cell Keystroke None Button Ti Menu Table gt Split Cell Keystroke None Button AJ Menu Table gt Merge Cell Keystroke None Insert a table When using the Table button a table appears below the button and allows you to choose how many columns and rows you want When using a menu to insert a table the insert table dialog box appears Add a row or column to an existing table Inserts a cell where the cursor is located in a table Cells in that row to the right of the new cell are shifted to the right Deletes the row where the cursor is located Deletes the column where the cursor is located Deletes a cell where the cursor is located in a table and shifts the remaining cells in that row to the left If multiple cells are selected they are deleted and the remaining cells are shifted to the left Launches a dialog box that allows you to split a cell into multiple columns or rows This only adds columns or rows to that cell not the whole table Choose multiple adjoining cells and merge them into one cell 660 Button None Menu Table gt Cell Properties Keystroke None Cell Properties Button None Menu Table g
49. left or right corner return to the month view by clicking on today s date view detail about an event by clicking on it e From the event view illustrated below you can view the event s location and start and end times Click the date to return to the daily view birthday party Friday April 01 2005 Location my house Start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Adding a Calendar Event NOTE You can only add a calendar event if you have add or edit permission for the calendar s folder To add a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the calendar to which you want to add an event as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 300 NOTE You can also add a calendar event after viewing the View Events screen See Also Viewing a Calendar Event on page 311 2 Navigate to the month and day for which you want to add a calendar event Your calendar display is determined by your system administrator June 2004 Tuesday Wednesday i RC International Hosts RC Conference Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 304 Working with Calendars 3 Click the Add Event a button 4 The Add Calendar Event screen appears NOTE Folder information appears at the bottom of the screen only if the folder has subfolders or content under it Add Calendar Event oe p k c 1 an au ohr lf Event Title Event Location One Time Recurring Oe Date Wednesd
50. location You can move the menu anywhere else on the toolbar Note that your Webmaster can define a menu so that it cannot reside on the same row with another menu If you move such a menu it will not remain on a row with another menu Instead it will move down to the next row 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Creating a New Menu 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 485 Customizing Your Toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears oolbar Customization View As Paragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements T able Position Objects C Test Direction 5 Click New Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 486 Customizing Your Toolbar 6 Anew menu appears on the left side of the window above the existing menus The default name of the new menu is Custom 0 Toolbars Comm Toolbars eent git 7 To rename the menu place the cursor in the field that displays the new menu and enter the new name NOTE If you click outside the toolbar name field you cannot later change the menu s name 8 To have the menu appear on your toolbar click in the small box to the left of the menu name 9 Click the Commands tab 10 Add buttons to the menu following the
51. on page 106 e Specifying the Kind of Content to Search on page 107 e Specifying a Search Word or Phrase on page 108 e Specifying Match Criteria on page 109 e Additional Search Criteria on page 111 e Custom Fields on page 112 e Fields that Apply to MS Office Files Only on page 112 e Result Display Options on page 113 e Information on the Search Results Screen on page 115 Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen To access the Search Content Folder screen follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder at which you want to begin the search NOTE To search your entire site start with the top level Root folder If you want to limit the search to a folder and its subfolders select it then choose search criteria 2 Click Action gt Search 3 The Search Content Folder screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 105 Searching the Workarea Search Content Folder Content M Forms Assets Include Archived match Partial Words Date Created between None E and None Date Modified between Mone and None EJ Status Any iv Size of Document between and Number of Slides PowerPoint between and The Search Screen The search screen helps you find Ektron CMS400 NET content by specifying the following criteria e the kind of content you want to search for example HTML content e asearch word or words e how the
52. right click the blog click Properties Click View gt Folder Properties Click the Edit Properties button Click the Blog Roll tab Find the blog roll link to be removed es W N Click Remove Roll Link above the Link Name to be removed Edit Properties for the folder GBNB Ej Properties Metadata Categories web Alerts Remove Roll Link Link Name Scott s Blog URL http www testscottsblog com Short Description Test site for Scott s blog Relationship co worker sibling Remove Roll Link Link Name Toby Tylers Blog URL http www tttestsblog com Short Description Test site for Toby s blog Relationship frend colleague Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 365 Blogs 7 Adialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 Click OK if you want to remove the blog roll link Continue to remove categories by clicking the Remove link 9 Click Save M Permissions and Approvals Permissions for blogs work like folder permissions The same functionality and features are available For more information on working with permissions and approvals see the Administrator Manual sections Setting Permissions and Setting Approval Chains Blog Permission Approval Table Permissions that affect this Permissions that affect this function when performed from function when performed from Web Site Workarea B
53. s From address Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields You can retrieve data from a submitted form directly to the form s Subject and Preamble fields The subject is a standard mail field and the preamble is text that appears at the beginning of the email For example the form may provide a list of your products While the user is completing the form he selects a product that he is interested in The product then becomes the subject line of the email Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 196 Working with HTML Forms NOTE Since a Textarea field can span multiple lines it can only be used with the preamble However a plain text field can be used with both the subject and preamble To retrieve data dynamically from a form field into the email s subject line or preamble follow these steps 1 Adda form field that collects the information you want to insert into the email s subject line or preamble See Also Inserting Form Fields on page 155 2 Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section See Also Editing a Form on page 197 3 Move to the field labeled Subject or Preamble 4 At the dropdown list following OR use text in field select the field you created in Step 1 Editing a Form After you create a form it can easily be edited if information needs to be changed You can update the following information by following the procedure below e
54. see declining content deleting 53 difference view button floating toolbar 5 viewing 92 editing 49 editing toolbar button 57 end date setting 63 folders see folders history accessing from Web page 49 100 accessing via Workarea 50 100 marked for deletion definition 653 metadata see searchable proper ties pending start date 654 previous version viewing 99 properties 42 publish see publish restoring previous version 99 scheduling 60 start date setting 61 statuses 648 approved 648 submitted definition 652 summary see summary translating 51 types 5 viewing 38 Workarea search 105 workflow reports see reports content block see also content add button 56 definition 1 deleting several at once 57 editing overview 8 finding 8 lifecycle 9 contrast WeblmageFX command 533 copy information from other applications 493 toolbar and menu option 470 WebImageFX command 534 copyright character inserting 472 create new WebIlmageFX command 534 creating document document manage ment feature 234 Office document document man agement feature 216 crop WeblmageFX command 534 customizing toolbar 480 cut toolbar and menu option 469 D decline content from publishing 84 one content item 83 several content blocks 85 delete button floating toolbar 5 content toolbar button 57 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 ii folder toolbar button 57 toolbar button 57 WebImage
55. y Bs Geo cs 3012 pt A W BZA Ye Marketing description of Ektron s relationship with its partners 4 Change the title file name and or description of the file 5 Click the Update button i Overwriting Files If a library file becomes out of date or the wrong version was copied you may replace it with a new version Overwriting files lets you minimize disk space and the number of library files Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 129 Library Folder NOTE The ability to overwrite a library file is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Overwrite button a on the View Library Item in Folder screen you do not have permission to overwrite NOTE You can only overwrite images and files The new image or file must have the same file extension as the file being replaced Before You Overwrite an Image When overwriting an image the new image uses the same size dimensions and file extension as the older image Be sure that the two images have the same file extension and size or make the adjustments at each occurrence of the image Before You Overwrite a File Remember all links that point to the overwritten file now point to the new file Overwriting Library Assets To overwrite a library file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View File screen for the file you want to overwrite as described in Viewing Files on page 127 Click the Overwr
56. 0 Revision 3 656 PITH SatarlLlontentul The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below te A ae The menu items and toolbar buttons allow you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables Table of Menu Items Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The following table explains each menu item toolbar button and drop down list Spelling Begin spell checker Button 7 Menu Tools gt Spelling Keystroke F7 Automatic Spell TEF Turn on or off spell check as you type Check Button Ei feature Menu Tools gt Disable Check Spelling As You Type Keystroke None Accessibility Button None Provides an report on how accessible your page is according to Section 508 WCAG Priority 1 and WCAG Priority 2 Report Menu Tools gt Accessibility Report Keystroke F8 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 657 Paste Special Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Button None Menu Tools gt Word Count Keystroke None Button Menu Edit gt Find Keystroke Control F Button Menu Edit gt Cut Keystroke Control X Button Menu Edit gt Copy Keystroke Control C Button Fe Menu Edit gt Paste Keystroke Control V Button None Menu Edit gt Paste Keystroke None Button None Menu Edit gt Select Keystroke None
57. 368 ENG a OG iraa AAAA 368 Searching IOUS wstanavesyeredvoresteies satucinasesssncaneeiacenduaiecasensenisanenss 369 BOUFO E r A E A AAS 369 BIOg COMMENTS cies cess as exncstensianiecucayindomanasaenatinnsseanesstactieinsens 377 Personalizing a Web Page cssscssseseseeenseseeeneneees 387 Layout of a Personalization Page cccsssscseesseeseeneeeenseenes 388 Personalizing a Web Page ccccssssseesseesseeeeenseeseeenneeseenneeeens 389 The Page Catalog ss nnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 399 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 iv Web Site Navigation AIS ccccsseeceeeeeeees 401 Working with Collections cceseeeeseeneseseceeesenees 401 Finding Collections eisescsisceieiaatsventausmsissiveusscanssiersaseueareannniieasieds 402 Viewing a Collection sinssetiwcanceesientansscnntanantacestaensiareanenianemannrens 405 Creating a CollectiOn cccccssssececsesseescenseeeseesseeesenseessenees 407 Editing Content in a Collection csccceesseeseeeeeeeseeeeeenneesens 414 Reordering Collections LiSt cccsssseessssseeesssseeeeseneesees 415 Editing Collection Information csccccssseesssesseeseeeneeeees 416 Deleting a Collection wessicesessasecsosensessnascauscsarnessnanaasanaiemmesetanauicn 416 Working with Collections in a Multi Language System 417 Comparison of Collections Menus
58. 470 replacing text 494 reports content workflow 116 restore toolbar button 58 restoring content 102 right to left editing 476 rotate WeblmageFX command 546 rows table adding 566 deleting 566 spanning 589 specifying 565 S save file to local computer toolbar button 478 to database toolbar button 58 WeblmageFX command 546 save as WeblmageFX command 547 scanning an image 551 scheduling content 60 search 494 considering case of search term 496 content folder 105 content using explorer 256 direction 495 library 121 toolbar button 58 whole word match 497 search screen 106 noise files 108 specifying kind of content to search 107 match criteria 109 word or phrase 108 searchable properties creating 74 editing 74 section 508 compliance 613 tables 616 select all menu option 490 toolbar button 479 select none toolbar button 479 select WeblmageFX command 548 selecting text 467 server moving picture to 520 sharpen WeblmageFX command 548 shortcuts keyboard 468 show calendar toolbar button 58 Smart Desktop definition 20 hiding left panel 26 modifying folder display 24 navigating 23 set as start location for user 457 Smart Detect field eWebDiff 96 smart folders creating 283 smart folders definition 280 smart folders deleting 282 smart folders entering search criteria 281 smart folders retrieving content 282 space character inserting 472 spacing cell 597 spanning table columns 589 table rows 589 s
59. 8 When done return to eWebEditPro XML and press the Word toolbar button again 9 If you change your mind and decide to restore the content to the way it was before you edited it in Word press the undo button 13 lf you want to restore the Word changes after pressing Undo press the redo button Uploading an Image in a Microsoft Word Document If you insert an image into the Word content and then paste that content or save it the following dialog box appears The box lists all images in the content and asks if you want to copy them from your computer to your organization s Web server Files Waiting for Upload Files for Upload Upload Now Papimage 002 ogg piece Laia Cancel Woodgrove Re About Estimated Upload Time 00 00 1 2 If you are ready to publish your Web content and want to display the image click Update Now If you plan to add more content later you can click Upload Later and upload all images at that time Editing XML Documents If your organization has implemented eWebEditPro XML you cannot edit XML documents using Microsoft Word This is because Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 504 Editing in Microsoft Word Word does not support XML editing If a full XML document is loaded the Word button E is disabled lf a Word document includes some custom XML tags the following dialog appears warning you about the problem Edit in ford
60. A new screen appears Create Smart Folder Web Page Dialog Step 2 of 5 Search all subfolders 7 Atthe Folder to Monitor field you must identify a folder whose content will be checked for placement in the Smart Folder If you want to search all of Ektron CMS400 NET select the top level folder and check Search all subfolders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 283 Using Ektron Explorer To identify a folder click the Browse button and navigate through Ektron CMS400 NET s folder structure 8 If you want to also monitor that folder s subfolders click the Search all subfolders checkbox If checked all of the folder s subfolders are monitored no matter how many levels they are below the selected folder 9 Click Next A new screen appears Create Smart Folder Web Page Dialog Step 3 of 5 Match Ce All Words Any Words O Exact Phrase Match Partial Words a Back E ext d Cancel In the Keywords field enter a text string that will be used to search for content within the selected folder s For example you enter Robot 1000 to find all documents related to that product Your Match choices are described below Since Match Partial Words is a checkbox you can include that search criterion along with one of the three Match options A search returns content that has For more information see All Words all words in the Keywords field All Words on page 110 A
61. Button U Menu Format gt Underline Keystroke Control U Button Menu Format gt Align Left Keystroke Control L Button Menu Format gt Align Center Keystroke Control E Button Menu Format gt Align Right Keystroke Control R Button Menu Format gt Unordered List Keystroke None L Button Menu Format gt Ordered List Keystroke None Button Menu Format gt Decrease Indent Keystroke None Make the text italic Make the text underlined Aligns the text to the left of the page For example This text is aligned left Aligns the text to the center of the page For example This text is aligned center Aligns the text to the right of the page or table cell For example This text is aligned right Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Begin the line on which the cursor rests with a number If the line above this line is not numbered assign this line 1 numbered assign a number one more than the line above Decrease the current line s indent distance from the left margin 663 Increase Indent i Increase the current line s indent Button distance from the left margin Menu Format gt Increase Indent Keystroke None List Properties Button None Launches a dialog box that allows you to view and edit the properties of an Menu Format gt List Properties ordered or unordered list Keystroke N
62. C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it value here For example if this field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field See Validation Options on page 165 If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is initially surrounded by red dashes in Data Entry mode If the user s response does not meet the validation criterion the field remains surrounded by red dashes The system administrator determines whether or not the user can save an invalid document Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s Message response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is telephone number the error message could be Please enter 7 or 10 digits It would appear if the user entered for example S061882 By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Ver
63. CMS400 NET system you can create a language specific edition of each collection For example prior to the 4 7 Release the RC International sample site s products page had a collection in the default application language English unless you change it From 4 7 on you can create an edition of a collection in every enabled language When a visitor to your site selects a language then navigates to a page with a collection Ektron CMS400 NET displays the collection in the selected language if available If not Ektron CMS400 NET displays nothing Note the contrast between the collections and content if a collection is not available in the selected language nothing appears But if content is not available in the selected language content in the default language appears When creating a collection for a foreign language decide if you want to create e a foreign edition of an existing collection or e anew collection in a foreign language For example if you want to provide several versions of a single page that change depending on the language selected by the user see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists on page 417 On the other hand if you are creating a collection to appear only on a foreign language page and no other edition of the collection will appear on your site see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist on page 418 You can only add content in the
64. Click the clock icon E to display a clock From it select an ending time for the event Display the times for the event Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end times illustrated below Coa E company meeting Location montreal room Start 1 00 PM jEnd 2 00 PM The time also appears on the event detail if this box is checked T Company meeting Friday April 01 2005 Location Montreal Room Start 1 00 PM End 2 00 PM Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For example www ektron com To link to content on your Web site click the library button i This type of link is known as a Quicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content The last published version of linked content appears If content has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink the title of the selected content replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 310 Working with Calendars Check this box if you want the Web page or Quicklink specified in the Hype
65. Comments on page 379 Deleting a Comment Once a comment is deleted you cannot retrieve it From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to delete 3 Click delete A dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Click OK to delete the comment Approving a Comment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 385 Blogs Comments can require approval if e they are submitted from the Web site and Moderate Comments is checked in the blog s folder properties e auser submits the comment from the Workarea set its state to Pending Only users with permission to edit content posts within the blog folder can approve comments To learn about the approval process for pending comments see Moderate Comments on page 379 To approve a comment follow these steps From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to approve Unapproved comments are indicated by a red flag 3 Click approve 4 The comment s status changes to approved Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 386 Personalizing a Web Page The Personalization feature lets a signed in typically membership user determine a page s layout and content The user can customize the page displaying whatever interests him in an arrangement of his o
66. Content gt Creating Updating Templates Determines whether content in this folder is updated when Dynamic Replication is run See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Site Replication gt Dynamic Replication Metadata There is no difference when working with Metadata for blogs or folders For more information see Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 352 Blogs Blog Categories Categories make it easier for site visitors scanning a blog page find posts that interest them Here s how they work The creator of a blog post assigns one or more categories to it 2 When the post is published a list of categories assigned to all posts appears in the right column 3 A site visitor clicks any category and see all posts relating to it For example a blog s categories are Music Sports and Art A user creates a new blog post about his favorite band Ektronica and assigns the music category to the post When a site visitor views the blog page he looks under Categories and clicks Music A list of music related posts appears including the post about Ektronica And I write it everyday I know it isn t black and white And it s anything but gray I know that no I m not alright But Til be OX cause Anything can everything can happen That s the story of my life Posted by Application Administrato
67. Copyright The Software including any images applets photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the Software as well as any accompanying written materials the Documentation is owned by Ektron or its suppliers is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaties and contains confidential information and trade secrets CUSTOMER agrees to protect the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation CUSTOMER agrees that it will not provide a copy of this Software or Documentation nor divulge any proprietary information of Ektron to any person other than its employees without the prior consent of Ektron CUSTOMER shall use its best efforts to see that any user of the Software licensed hereunder complies with this license 4 Limited Warranty Ektron warrants solely that the medium upon which the Software is delivered will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal proper and intended usage for a period of three 3 months from the date of receipt Ektron does not warrant the use of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free nor that program errors will be corrected This limited warranty shall not apply to any error or failure resulting from i machine error ii Customer s failure to follow operating instructions iii negligence or accident or iv modifications to the Software by any person or entity other than Company In the event of a breach of warranty Cust
68. EN _ Displaying 6 tems Explore Search 3 fi Workspace for CMS400Demo Default CHS Smeg CMS 4000erma 9 _Rotatingl mages 3 About Us O Blog 3 Book Store 4 Conditions 9 Contact Information gt Ektron Medical Center Forum 9 Products 4 Services C Therapies 4 Developer Y Local Machine Desktop A My Documents Using Ektron Explorer About Us As a global leader ektran Medica improve lives in its local and global particularly with regard to increasin high quality healthcare for underse populations Last edited by Application Administ 1042006 11 42 50 AM About Us Index Links to important About Ls ite Last edited by Application Administ 1072006 11 27 57 AM Footer Footer information including pria and contact information Last edited by Application Administ A second tab in the left frame lets you search for content When you do the right frame displays search results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 244 Using Ektron Explorer Explore Search by any or all of the criteria below All or part of the title pO Containing the word or phrase pO Look ir Chis400Demea Mw Hore advanced options For more information see Searching for CMS Content on page 256 The rest of this section explains everything you need to know to work with Ektron Explorer through the following topics Recently Vi
69. ET a S Local Disk C1 o Dynanic_Content_ pelereritel Ektron Now Offers assetcataloc expl iy F o a Multiplatform Support a tib fy Note eal Ektron now has support ee ae repi lt a in CMS400 for ASP ID del M CentumMMedicalS ervices i Pee E Documents E Updo Eien PHF ColdFusion and i mi Miike JSP platforms E E Administ Hopa 8 Release the mouse button A file upload message appears Favorites The My Favorites folder provides quick access to content or folders that you frequently work with NOTE Workspace folders provide functionality similar to Favorites but also let you create a folder structure in which to organize content The Favorites folder on the other hand is only one level See Also Using Workspace Folders on page 278 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 272 Using Ektron Explorer 6 Workspace for bob admin E Default CHS Blogs O Bob Test folder under content 3 Books 9 Calendar O CentuyMedicalS ervices O Contacts Dynamic Content In Content D FAG 9 Form Example IntranetB asic newsubtolder 2 Fress Releases _ Purchase Orders test Local Machine g Local Disk C C Recently Viewed First identify frequently used content or folders as favorites Then when you want to work with them instead of navigating through the folder structure go to the My Favorites folder and select them
70. Editor Determines which editor will be used when this user replies to a Discussion Board See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Discussion Boards gt Using Discussion Boards on your Web Site Disable Email Check this box if you do not want to receive notification Notification email Work Page Size Your system administrator may let you change the work page values If he does the following fields are editable Otherwise you can only view the fields Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 455 Updating Your User Profile a If desired change the width of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The width in pixels must be between 400 and 2400 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 If desired you can change the height of the screen in which Ektron CMS400 NET appears The height in pixels must be between 300 and 1800 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Display button text in Check this box if you want any button s caption text to the title bar appear in the screen title s bar whenever a user moves the mouse over the button Note the word Update describing the button in the illustration below If you do not check this box the screen s title remains in the title bar when the user moves the mous
71. Ektron W Support Page M RC International Announces the RC Ct 5 The content appears You can view the content summary metadata etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 83 Approving Declining Content A toolbar at the top of the screen lists tasks you can perform on the content By Publish Accept changes to the content and publish it to the site Note If there is another approver in the approval chain for the content this is replaced by a SUBMIT button If you click Publish but the content item has an incomplete task assigned to another user the content cannot be published Instead the following error message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer This content has been submitted Buk waiting For completion of associated tasks The publishing process will not proceed until the task has been completed The user to whom the task is assigned must complete it before you can publish the content Decline Reject changes and keep current version of content live on the Web site If you choose this option a window prompts you to enter a reason for not publishing the content The reason is saved as part of the content item s history Check out content and change it if desired View Toggle between the currently published version and submitted version of Published content This can help you compare versions See Also Staged Content Staged on page 654 View differences between the
72. Folder 7 Click Apply then OK 8 Right click the mouse and click Refresh Adjusting the Number of Recently Viewed Content Items By default you see 10 items To change the number follow these steps Place the cursor in the left frame Right click the mouse 3 Amenu appears Manage Configurations Use Configuration P Refresh B ptio nz Froperties 4 Click Options 5 The Options dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 290 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer Options Web Page 7x General Ektron Explorer Options Folder Options Display Favorites Folder Display Recently Viewed Folder Size of Recently Viewed Folder per CMS Content Options Display Thumbnail Previews Display Content in preview when Summary iz unavailable http 192 166 0 20 Internet 6 Edit the number in the Size of Recently Viewed Folder per CMS field 7 Click Apply then OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 291 Working with Calendars Working with Calendars Calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET perform the same function as a paper calendar they keep one or more users informed about upcoming events They can be displayed to all visitors to your Web site and any authorized user can add events to a calendar Typical calendar events could include e company meeting e reserving a conference room for an interview e comp
73. Folders An administrator can control every aspect of the content and the folders that hold them The controls include setting permissions approvals and adding editing publishing and deleting content Below is the content folder how View Contents of Folder Content O Content Human Resources Da Title Language ID Status Dat The following table describes the buttons available on every help screen Daraa e Moves to prior topic in the help This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the help s author Moves to next topic in the help This refers to the topic sequence arranged by the help s author Divides the help into two panels e The left panel displays the table of contents It also provides buttons for accessing the index and full text search The right panel continues to display help topics Highlight the current help topic s location within the table of contents Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 459 Online Help D Prints current topic Accessing Online Manuals To access the help folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea 2 From the lower left frame click Settings 3 From the top left frame click Help B 1 x gt Settings SHE gt User Profile 3 Help 4 The help screen appears in the right frame Ektron CMS400 Help Juick Start Manual Administrator Manual User Manual Setup Manual 5 Click a
74. Forms e Editing a Form on page 197 e Mailto or Database Form on page 198 e Deleting a Form on page 199 e View Form Toolbar on page 199 e Creating Polls and Surveys on page 201 Overview of Form Processing Step For more information see 1 Create a form Creating a New Form on page 144 2 Assign it to a Web page Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 181 3 Site visitor goes to your Web site and completes form Form is mailed to an email address saved toa database or both 4 View submitted form data and Viewing Form Reports on page 184 download it to a spreadsheet The Structure of Form Data Forms reside within the content folder or one of its subfolders A form consists of the following components e Form title ID number whether the form data is sent as email and or saved to a database etc e Content information title start and or end date status postback message etc e Form fields plain text field password field text area hidden text choices checkbox select list calendar submit button etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 143 Working with HTML Forms Creating a New Form The screen you use to create a new form has five simple steps After you complete the steps you have a new form that s ready to collect the information you need To make the task even easier Ektron CMS400 NET provides sample forms that y
75. HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Select All Select all information on your page After you select it you can cut it copy it etc Clean Source Remove unnecessary HTML tags Cleaning Source Code on page 611 Hyperlink Create a link to another Web page or a Using Hyperlinks on spot within the current page page 603 Edit Source Edit your page s HTML source Editing a Section of a Page on page 610 Insert Source Insert HTML source onto the page at the Inserting Source on cursor location page 610 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 490 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Check Spelling Compare words in the editor to Microsoft Checking Spelling on WORD spelling list page 498 View as WYSIWYG HTML View and edit your page s HTML Viewing and Editing HTML on page 609 Picture Insert a picture Inserting Images on page 506 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 491 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features Most of eWebEditPro XML s features are easy to learn For example to make your text bold you select the text and click the bold button B However some of eWebEditPro XML s features are more complex For example when creating a table you must make several dec
76. Image after horizontal flip Image Info Standard Toolbar Button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 538 Editing Images i Description Displays information about an image e image name e height and width in pixels e bit depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 553 e file format Line Standard Toolbar Button Da Description Draw a straight line To change a line s size or color right click it after drawing it To use this command click the line command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 539 Editing Images Open Standard Toolbar Button Description Select an image for editing The image can be on your computer or a local area network Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 540 Editing Images Load Image Look ir E eweblmaget cit History BS Deskto m Le May Documents My Co as Ter l aR Cancel 2 To change the type of file that appears in the window click the down arrow circled above to the right of the Files of type field Your system administrator determines which types of files you can edit Files of type JPEG Files ipg ipeg My Network F E Open
77. NET 2 0 Revision 3 390 Personalizing a Web Page Button Name Description For more information see Minimize In personalization mode only display the Minimizing a Content Item on content title page 397 To a site visitor suppress the content Restore Undo minimize Minimizing a Content Item on page 397 Close Removes content item from its zone and To remove a content item from its places it in the page catalog From the zone click the close button circled page catalog the content item can be below on page 392 moved to any Web Part Zone See Also The Page Catalog on page 399 Delete Remove content item from its Web part Deleting Content on page 397 zone Only appears for content you added Sale Edit replace with other content of the Editing Content on page 393 same type move content item to different Web part zone change its width and height Editing Sequence 1 Access the Web page that lets you personalize Your system administrator tells you how to access this 2 If you have permission to change the page for unauthenticated users the Personalization For box appears Otherwise skip to Step 3 Personalize Personalization For Current User Public Users Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 391 Personalizing a Web Page Use this box to decide if your page customization applies to just yourself Current User or all site visitors who do no
78. Next button 4 The Add New item screen appears listing all content in the folder and its subfolders in which you created the menu 5 By default all content is available To limit your selection to a type of content for example Word documents click the content types dropdown and select a type Add New Item About All Types k T All Types HT fil Content Office Documents Managed Files Multimedia Open Office LILI 6 Content items in the selected folder appear below any subfolders You can click any subfolder to display its content 7 Check all content you want to add from any single screen to the menu WARNING If you check items on a screen then proceed to another screen before clicking the Add button the items on the first screen are not added to the menu 8 Click the Add button Fr 9 The View Menu screen reappears showing the new content 10 To access the Edit Menu Item screen for the new content hover the cursor over the item then click Edit from the popup menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 433 Working with Menus NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 11 The Edit Menu Item screen lets you assign additional information to the menu item such as the target window See Fields on
79. Only content page 103 Actions are explained below Restoring a Previous Version NOTE The ability to restore content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Restore button lp on the View Content History screen you do not have permission to do so Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 102 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content 1 Select an historical version of the content that you want to restore from the left pane Click the Restore button Ep The content history window closes and you return to the View Content page or the Web page with the content in a checked in status 4 lf desired check out the content to make additional changes Select the workflow to perform on the content 6 When the historical version is placed in the approval chain and approved it is published to the Web site Comparing Historical Versions After you select an historical version of content you can view the differences between it and the current version To compare an historical version follow these steps 1 Select an historical version of the content from the left pane 2 Click the View Differences button ER The historical and the current versions are compared To learn more about the comparison see Comparing Versions of Content on page 92 Removing Applied XSLT You can only remove an applied XSLT when viewing historical versions of XML content If y
80. Pie Chart Displays a standard pie chart Poll or Poll My favorite feature survey answers are My favorite feature in Ektron CMS400 NET color coded and the S percentage of p B Approval Process 11 people who chose i Hi Asset Management 11 oo EIBlogging Tools 11 Poll and Survey 56 i Multimedia 0 EiMembership 0 MSearch 0 Security 11 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 151 Working with HTML Forms Combined Combines the Data Table and the Bar Age range 4 responses Chart 18 21 50 B 22 25 25 Ei 26 30 o 31 or over 25 M IMPORTANT You cannot chart data that is entered into a text box For example if one of the choices in a poll is Other and the survey has a text box for site users to enter additional information the text in the box is not charted However the fact that the a user chose Other is charted Creating a Form s Content Here is an example of form content that you can create Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 152 Working with HTML Forms Request for White Paper Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e mail white paperdektron cam required fields First Name Po Website Email Phone Era State Province Country Comments Request White Paper Note that some fields are required and some provide a dropdown
81. Poll Design a new poll Compose Email A NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed See Also Working With Polls on page 202 and Steps to Creating a Survey on page 207 5 Choose the form that you want to begin with You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it Select a sample that most closely matches the form you want to create After you create it you can add fields remove fields modify possible responses etc 6 Click Next 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the form within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the form 8 The next screen lets you assign a task to a user or user group If you do a task will be created every time a site visitor submits this form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 181 9 Anew screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the form The choices are Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 145 Working with HTML Forms e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 146 e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example of a file is a white
82. Rola 6 etna air ie ae EE Pe ee ee ed ae ee ee eA hg Gi Hes ae Ea MATE n EPT ETO ay eee eee ee ed Title Breakroom Survey English U 5 Form Post back message Comment Display a message Redirect to a file or page OBR edirect form data to an action p age Report on the form Same Window File or page l 3 Click the icon next to File or page The Select dialog appears Click the Select button 5 The library appears In the left panel select the folder that contains the hyperlink 6 Inthe right panel select Hyperlinks from the file type dropdown 7 Select the hyperlink whose name was given to you by your system administrator Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 148 Working with HTML Forms lt CMS400 Library For admin Microsoft Internet Explorer provided by Ektron Inc L Library 4 Books Calendar 9 CenturyMedi 6 Contacts G Dynamic Con FAQ a G Form_Examp 9 IntranetBasi G Press_Relea 9 Purchase Or 8 Click the insert button 1 Making Form Results Available to Site Users When you create polls and surveys you can choose to display the results after site users submit data The results can be displayed in the same window or output to a new window In addition you can choose how to chart the data For a description of chart types see Chart Types on page 151 To show site visitors the r
83. See A so Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Content gt Content Rating Content Searchable True appears if the content can be found when someone searches your Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 43 Expanding the Content Area lt is possible to expand the content area of the screen vertically This gives you more space to work on content To expand the content portion of the Workarea click the up arrow si highlighted below AINI i a a pa i med na a TL TLA a AULI EER J LELI i as fu E 5 F ALS ly a i E ve 1 L i mia g a a LENI age a a Pa ay r cot A Pe aes Flee per es CS TREATIES PVD RERPTT TY ye Nea rt ony example home English U 5 4 nt Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates 1A B RRKA BZ Oe Ys MOOHGuO A7S H Lpply Style Nonna ICB oF U A Lo x al 1I Wt gi u l gi Iii ii lil EF 68 j meje a ektron ALNAN Once the content area is expanded the top row of buttons and title are not visible t Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates v ELLEELLE IGEA YYTE e E yply Style Normal B I U A P E E SS yp Ei ES Fa ee Cai Click the down arrow to return the content area to normal size The top row of buttons and title also return to the screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 44
84. Select List field the site visitor only sees the first option in a drop down box Age range iis He must click the down arrow to see the remaining values and select one ge range Select So the Select List field occupies less room on the screen than a choices field Also the site visitor can only choose on item on the Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 175 Working with HTML Forms list In contrast you can allow a visitor to select several choices if you use a choices field To insert a Select List field follow these steps 1 Place a Select List field s onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 154 2 The following dialog appears Select List Field Descriptive Mame Field 1 Field Name Field Tool Tip Test Field 1 List Custom ltem List ltem Value Text Add Check item to be selected by default owt von __ Cancel Fields on the Select List Field Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 176 Working with HTML Forms Field Description Descriptive Name Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 184 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters
85. Table WebWorks Window As an alternative to the toolbar you can use the menu available via the Office Tools gt Document Management option Table WebWorks Window Help Letters and Mailings Options Document Management Save Save as Open History Work Offline Approve Using the Toolbar to Save an Office Document to Ektron CMS400 NET Create the Office document as you normally would When you are ready to save it follow these steps 1 Onthe Document Management toolbar click the Save button highlighted below Elg ca ial 2y LES CMS400Demo 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 223 Using the Document Management Functionality Save Action Do vou want Eo C Save f Save and Check In C Publish 3 You have three choices described below Save Save all changes made since you opened the document or your last save After the document is saved its status remains checked out so you can continue working on it Save and Check in Save all changes and check the document back in to CMS400 NET See Also Checked In Content on page 650 After the document is checked in you can continue working on it Publish Save all changes and submit the document to be published If you are the only approver in the document s approval chain or the document does not have an approval chain the document is published
86. Table of Options Menu Description For More Information Option see Edit Edit selected content Editing Content Using Ektron Explorer on page 261 Add to Favorites Add content to list of favorites Favorites on page 272 Removes content from folder after you move to another folder and Paste it Makes a copy of selected content You then move to another folder and Paste it Copy Pastes content you recently Cut into selected folder Rename Change the title of selected content Delete selected content Its status must be Approving Declining Content Approved on page 81 Deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is removed If you are the last approver in the chain the content is deleted immediately Paste Delete Send to Email Insert a link to the selected content into a new Using the Ektron Explorer to email email Content on page 262 Create a new folder under the selected content s Ektron CMS400 NET folder Administrator Manual section UC Managing Content Folders gt Note After creating a new folder move the cursor Adding Subfolders to the left frame right click the mouse and click Refresh to see the folder New gt Folder Create a new content item within the selected Adding Content on page 45 folder New gt Content Note After creating new content move the cursor to the left frame click its folder and click Refresh to see the content
87. The Lifecycle of Content on page 9 What is a Content Block A Web site consists of several pages Each page is made up of one or more blocks of content For example the home page of the sample Web site installed with Ektron CMS400 NET is below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 1 ABOUT US CONDITIONS PRODUCTS SERVICES a MEDICAL CENTER a Pee en eee RO QUALIFIED MEDIAL SERVICES ay A ii A ae aa at ad a Me oy TEAL ELLI WELCOME TO OUR SITE At ektron Medical we focus on assisting people with some of the most complex f conditions Some examples are hemophilia cancer immune disorders and kidney disease X DEPANA We do this by applying our expertise in medical r SITESEARCH devices pharmaceuticals and biotechnology to make a meaningful difference in patients lives After you sign in notice that as you move the cursor colored borders appears around one or more areas of the page Each surrounded area is content that can be edited independently The border disappears when you move the cursor out of the area Your system administrator controls the design of each page and determines where the content appears NOTE The colored borders appear when you are not in site preview mode See Also Site Preview on page 12 Also your administrator can set up your system so that the borders always appear on a page instead of appearing only when you move the mouse over t
88. The headline of the post Usually what a site visitor scans through to find a post to read Comments Information The comments link shows the number in parentheses of comments for a post When this link is clicked a new page of comments for the post appears Also on the page is a form to add comments about the post The comments only appear if a site visitor has logged in or authentication is not required for blog comments Editor Information The person who created or last edited the blog post Post Time and Date The date and time a blog post was created or last edited Blog Posts in the Workarea Viewing a blog post in the Workarea is similar to viewing content in the Workarea Navigate to the folder that contains the blog Next in the View Posts in Blog screen click the title of the blog post Below is an example of a viewing a blog post in the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 371 Blogs view Posts in Blog Blog 2 ial VelIete lt sAction E gt what is Guillain Barre Syndrome GES Guillain Barre Ghee yan Bah ray Syndrome also called acute Inflammatory demyelinating polyneuropathy and Landrys ascer paralysis 15 an inflammatory disorder of the peripheral nerves those outside the brain and spinal cord Itis characterized by Comments 3 rapid onset of weakness and often paralysis of the legs arms bre
89. URL http localhosticms400demoa z This information is especially useful to a system administrator Editing Content Using Ektron Explorer You can edit content from within Ektron Explorer if you have permission to do so and the content is in one of the following statuses e published e checked in e checked out by you e submitted for your approval To edit content follow these steps 1 Browse to or use the search to locate the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 261 Using Ektron Explorer 2 Move the cursor next to the content title so that it turns into a hand 3 Right click the mouse 4 Select Edit Displaying 2 tems Marketing Printers Marketing Printers Lazi ediz hii eli bie leaker b r Bf oe 200 Add to Favorites Cut Copp Rename web 5 Delete Last edil T 1 4200 Send to Email 5 Edit the content as you would from within Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Editing Content on page 49 Using the Ektron Explorer to email Content The Ektron Explorer lets you send a link to Ektron CMS400 NET content via email You might do this to show the content to someone who does not have access the Ektron CMS400 NET server The email contains a guicklink to the content see example below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 262 Using Ektron Explorer File Edit wiew Insert Format Tools Table WebWorks Window Help 3 ka
90. User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 231 Using the Document Management Functionality 2 The default language appears next to the screen title To create the document under a different language click View gt Language and select the language 3 Click New gt Open Office The following screen appears Edit Content in Folder Root Pe k Z a a ia aaah lh TETTA A tt ep enlist 0 5 9 4dd to Quicklinks table Content Searchable Content Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates Titl select file to be uploaded 5 Click the Browse button and navigate to the Open Office file that you want to import 6 Enter a Title NOTE If you want to retain the original document name insert the full filename into the Title field For example you could enter mydocument oat 7 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if it should be searchable 8 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule comments and Web alert information See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 67 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 eEktron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 232 Using the Document Management Functionality 9 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also
91. WARNING This content contains tags that Microsoft Word may not recognize Microsoft Word may corrupt the content introduce invalid tags or may not display it at all Do you want to continue You can proceed and edit using Word or decide not to edit using Word Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 505 Inserting Images To insert a picture into the editor place the cursor where you want the image to appear and click the Insert Picture button l When you click the button one of the two Picture Properties dialog boxes illustrated below appears depending on how your Webmaster has set up your system The dialog boxes are very similar with the only difference being that the Select Server File button only appears on the second dialog box The Select Server File button appears if your upload mechanism is set to FTP It does not appear if the mechanism is HTTP For more information see the eWebEditPro XML Administrator Manual section Managing Image Selection gt Examples of Implementing Image Selection gt Selecting Files from the Server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 506 Inserting Images Media File Selection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 507 Inserting Images Media File Selection File Selection OK Cancel Select Server File Select Mew File Picture Ud Optio
92. Workarea navigate to the blog folder click View gt Folder Properties then the Edit Properties button L from the Web site log in navigate to the blog right click the mouse and select Properties When you are finished click Save fd Field Desorption Visibility Choose whether the site is a private blog or public Anyone who visits the site is able to view the blog Private A site visitor must log into the site to be able to view the blog This could include membership users CMS400 users or both Blog Name The name of your blog as it appears in the content folder tree Blog Title The title of your blog as it appears on the Web site blog It only appears if the ShowHeader blog server control property is set to true The ID number of the blog This number is assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET and cannot be changed Note ID only appears when viewing the Properties screen It does not appear while editing Tagline A line of additional information that describes the blog It appears below the title if the ShowHeader blog server control property is set to true For example the title of a blog is John s Blog Page The tag line could be A place to learn about John s past present future and his current state of mind Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 351 Blogs Fea poseren Posts Visible Comments Update Service Style sheet filename for this folder
93. Working with Microsoft Office Documents Documents on page 214 Managed Managed file any supported type Working with Managed Files on Files page 234 Multimedia Multimedia file any supported type Managing Multimedia Assets on page 307 Open Office Open Office file any supported type Working with Open Office Files on page 231 Collection Collection Working with Collections on page 401 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 35 Creates the following new item For more information see within selected folder View Menu The View Menu provides the following functions Menu For more information see Option All types Displays all content types of selected language HTML Limits folder display to selected content type For example choose View gt Office Documents and see only Office HTML Documents in the folder other content Form types are suppressed Survey This is especially helpful if the folder has Office a lot of items and you are looking for Docu only one type of content ments Note that the icon for the selected type appears to the left of the View Menu option as illustrated below content Man aged Files Multime dia Open Office Language Limits display within a folder to one language The language setting also determines the language of any new items you create in the folder Lets user view and work with menus Working with Menus on page
94. XML such as Office documents and managed files See Also Using the Document Management Functionality on page 210 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 107 Searching the Workarea Include Archived Content forms and assets that have been archived See Also Setting Archive Options on page 64 IMPORTANT The search only considers content forms and assets whose Content Searchable box is checked The Content Searchable box appears on the item s View Properties screen Specifying a Search Word or Phrase In the Search Text field enter one or more words that you want to find within content forms and assets The search returns content that includes these words Entering one or more words here is optional That is you can use fields on the lower portion of the screen to find content without knowing any words contained in the content For example you can find every piece of HTML content that was modified by a certain user within the last 30 days If you check off HTML and Form content you can enter no search criteria and get a list of all HTML and Form content on your site However if you enter search text the search only finds items that include the search text and satisfy other criteria on the screen See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 The Noise Files lf you are searching for assets Windows has a noise file that screens from the search every single letter of
95. Your Table s Format NOTE To set the width of a table column adjust the width of one of the cells within the column as described in Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 581 Usually this change affects all other cells in the column Specifying Table Width by Percentage Specify table width by percentage if you want the table to be resized as the user resizes the browser NOTE In order for the table to resize with the browser the Word Wrap attribute must be turned on in all of a table s cells For details see Word Wrap on page 596 For example if you specify that a table is 100 wide and your browser displays 14 inches across when it is maximized the table fills the screen except for the browser border Netscape File Edt View Go Communicator Help Back Forward Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security Shop Table Properties If you resize the browser to half the screen the table will be about 7 wide You still see both columns but some of the data is moved down Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 568 Manipulating Your Table s Format Netscape File Edt View Go Communicator Help A a m Back Foran Reload Home Search Netscape gt Setting Table Width by Percentage To specify table width by percentage choose Percent in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the percentage at the Width field Ektr
96. Your Table s Format the Width field Insert T able Size Rows 2 Columns 2 Layout p10 Not Specified C Percent fe Pixels Specifying Horizontal Alignment You can specify your table s horizontal alignment left right or center within the browser Alignment Example E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 572 Manipulating Your Table s Format If you specify right or left justify you can wrap text around the table To do this move the cursor to the right or left of the table and begin typing Table Properties In this example the table is lett justified so this text appears to the right of the table Specify the table alignment at the Horizontal Alignment field on the Layout area of the Insert Table dialog box Layout width i uis C Not Specified f Percent Pixels Horizontal Alignment center Table Backgrounds You can specify a background color or image for your table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 573 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying a Table s Background Color You can assign a background color to a table to make it more pleasing to the eye Here is an example NOTE If you apply a dark background color to a table you may want to apply a light foreground color to the text Use the font color button AX to change the text color To assign a background c
97. a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page 1 Log in Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 431 Working with Menus 2 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 3 Place the cursor on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 4 The menu appears 5 Click Add The Add Menu screen displays a list of items you can add to the menu 7 Use the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 432 Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 434 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 434 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 435 Adding Content as a Menu Item To add content as a menu item follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 432 Working with Menus 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 429 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 430 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 431 NOTE You can only add content that resides in the menu s content folder or its subfolders 2 Click the radio button next to Content Block 3 Click the
98. a Web site e Adding validation criteria to form fields e Automatically assigning tasks for follow up activities to form submissions e Reporting on form information e Exporting results to Microsoft Excel A sample form appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 141 Working with HTML Forms b E mpa Oo OY we a a i Gavel ef k nbsp e m j gi Tl gi il I ih Mormal 2010 pt z A Ja Braale a eE ea EE Te Select Button M f fab pe E lt l Request for White Paper a Please fill out the form below If you have any questions please e maill white paperd required fields IMPORTANT to avoid delays please provide accurate informatio EE Company Personal Website Doo Ere sil This chapter explains how to perform all form actions through the following topics al E ri We A H e Overview of Form Processing on page 143 e The Structure of Form Data on page 143 e Creating a New Form on page 144 e Creating a Form s Content on page 152 e Form Validation on page 158 e Form Fields on page 159 e Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 181 e Assigning a Task to a Form on page 181 e Viewing Form Reports on page 184 e Exporting a Form s Raw Data on page 190 e Viewing Form Information on page 191 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 142 Working with HTML
99. a blog e Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog on page 349 e Blog Folder Properties on page 351 e Metadata on page 352 e Blog Categories on page 353 e Web Alerts on page 357 e The Blog Roll on page 358 e Permissions and Approvals on page 366 e Purge History on page 367 Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog When you edit a blog s properties and settings more properties and settings are available than when you created it This is done to save time when adding multiple blogs to a site The table below shows which properties or settings are available when adding and editing a blog Blog Properties and Settings Availability Property or Setting Available When Available When Adding a Blog Editing a Blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 349 Blogs Property or Setting Available When Available When Adding a Blog Editing a Blog Tagline of Visible Posts Comment Control Update Service Style sheet filename for this folder Template filename for this folder Dynamic Replication Smart Forms Metadata Categories Web Alerts Blog Roll Permissions pt a 7 a lr po l7 lr pt pt Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 350 Blogs Blog Folder Properties The following table shows the fields on the Blog s Properties tab To edit these properties from the
100. a hyperlink the border is the same color as a hyperlink for example blue or purple if visited Aligning the Picture To align a picture use the Alignment field on the Picture Properties dialog box Layout width fi B Height fi b fo Border Thickness Alignment Y Reset When deciding how to align a picture you need to become familiar with these terms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 516 Inserting Images e baseline of text the imaginary line on which the text lies Some letters such as g p and y have descenders segments of letters that extend below the baseline e bottom of text the lowest section of a line to which a descender extends e top of text the highest spot of a line to which any segment of a letter extends e vertical center the midpoint between the top and bottom of the line to p vertical center baseline bottar The following table lists your alignment choices To align Click this in the Alignment field The picture on the left margin allowing Left subsequent text to wrap around it Ni u e The picture on the right margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it The top of the picture with the top of the Text Top Top texttop text The vertical center of the picture with the baseline of the text middle The vertical center of the picture with the AbsMiddle vertical center of the text absmiddle Ektron CMS400 NET User Manua
101. an Op ee all o Oyo G6 o ET lt gt Valay TAlaiib a B yd E C 7 8 L K H v oO T p a U Froperties Ima s Font Size 12 File lava Applet Window Font Color iw Unassigned Description i Unassigned OF The middle section of the toolbar consists of pop up palettes containing symbol characters As with template palettes you insert a symbol by mousing over to highlight and then releasing or clicking the mouse Background Color Equation template and symbol character palettes are broadly organized by theme such as calculus templates or arrow symbols Spend a few minutes exploring the toolbar to familiarize yourself with the available templates and symbols The right side of the toolbar is a toolbox of icons for various editor operations In addition to the standard cut copy paste and undo icons there are buttons for shrinking and magnifying the current equation a check syntax icon and a help icon saving and Editing a Mathematical Expression A mathematical expression is saved as an image When you are ready to save it enter a file name and description in the Image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 629 Working with the Math Expression Editor Properties area lower right corner and press OK The expression then appears within the content Mathematical Expression ee Oe yo OO o o lt 0 sin i hag gt l ax lt gt ec Va a7y TAlati
102. and affordable authoring solutions eTit le gt Emera Fafa keywords content document management web content management Management cms gt Description cantent Ektron s web Content Management and Doc Management software products manage web content and documents with wysIwy XHTML HTML editors offering easy to use browser based web authoring and g solutions for web content management and document management gt On this Web page notice the keywords are included in the meta tag and the title is in HTML tags These appear according to how the administrator sets up the metadata definitions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 80 Approving Declining Content Approving Declining Content Your site administrator establishes an approval chain for each folder or even specific content items The approval chain is a list of people or groups who must approve new or edited content before it is published to the Web site If a user group is part of an approval chain any member of the group can approve the content The administrator also determines the sequence of approvers in the chain When a new or edited content is submitted to the approval chain it is reviewed by users who may e change it e approve or decline it e publish it to the Internet it is published when the last user approves it The chart below illustrates the approval process Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for N
103. and its performance and all claims arising from the relationship between the parties contemplated herein shall be governed by construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New Hampshire without regard to conflict of laws principles thereof The parties agree that any action brought in connection with this Agreement shall be maintained only in a court of competent subject matter jurisdiction located in the State of New Hampshire or in any court to which appeal therefrom may be taken The parties hereby consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts in the State of New Hampshire for all such purposes The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from governing this License If any provision of this License is to be held unenforceable such holding will not affect the validity of the other provisions hereof Failure of a party to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right to enforce such provision If you fail to comply with any term of this License YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED This License represents the entire understanding between the parties with respect to its subject matter YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT AND UNDERSTAND THAT BY CONTINUING THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLA
104. are the only approver in the document s approval chain or the document does not have an approval chain the document is published immediately See Also Submitted Content on page 652 and Approving Declining Content on page 81 If you are the next person in the approval chain the Approve button EZ becomes active You can click the button to approve the document Otherwise the members of the Approval chain must approve it While its status is Submitted you cannot edit it To save it under a different name click the yellow Save button H The Save As dialog appears Enter the new name in the Content Title field To save it in a different folder navigate to that folder and click Save How Editing in Office Affects Content Status Before you save a document to Ektron CMS400 NET it has no status The first time you save a document its status becomes Checked Out You can continue to edit and save it within that Office session When you close the Office session you can either check it in or submit it for publication e lf you submit it for publication you cannot edit it until it completes the approval chain when its status changes to approved e If you check it in you and other users can continue to check it out and work on tt Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 227 Using the Document Management Functionality If you need to make additional edits to the document before
105. as read only Oval Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws an oval To use this command click the oval command drag the line and release the mouse To change the oval s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 541 Editing Images Dialog Box Attributes Paste as New Image Standard Toolbar Button Description After you copy or cut an image or an area of an image use paste as new image to insert it into a new file Before creating a new file WeblmageFX asks if you want to save changes to current file Pointer Selection Standard Toolbar Button Ka Description Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 542 Editing Images Click an annotation to select it After you select an annotation you can perform functions on it such as delete it This command is a toggle which means the first time you click it it is on and the next time you click it it is off Polygon Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a polygon that is a closed figure surrounded by straight lines To use this command follow these steps Click the polygon command Drag the line in one direction as far as you want Drag the line in the other directions to complete the polygon Double click the mouse to terminate the polygon oe ee To change th
106. available to you To insert a background image 1 2 3 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears Click the image of your choice Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a table it applies to the entire table including the borders if the table is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the table if the image is larger than the table the top left corner of the image aligns with the top left corner of the table The rest of the image fills as much of the table as possible you can also apply an image to individual cells see Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 587 make sure that the image does not obscure user s ability to read the table text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 576 Manipulating Your Table s Format Deleting a Background Image 1 Move the cursor to any cell on the table and right click the mouse 2 Click Table Properties from the menu Eii Bopp Paste Select All Inzert Aor Inzert Column Delete Howes Delete Columns Menge ells Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HT RAL View as HTML 3 Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt 4 Click OK setting Table Borders You can specify a border color or size for your table Assigni
107. chapter Web Alert Feature 7 If desired edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 218 8 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would any content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 219 Working with Open Office Files This section explains how to work with Open Office files through the following subtopics e Creating a New Open Office File on page 231 e Importing an Open Office File on page 231 e Editing Open Office Files on page 233 Creating a New Open Office File You cannot create an Open Office file within Ektron CMS400 NET You must create it in Open Office then import it into Ektron CMS400 NET Once the file is imported into Ektron CMS400 NET you can edit it from there See Also Editing Open Office Files on page 233 Importing an Open Office File Your computer or network may have Open Office files that you want to manage using DM Follow these steps to import any document into Ektron s Document Management functionality See Also The Work Offline Option on page 230 NOTE In addition to the procedure described below you can also drag and drop an Open Office file into Ektron CMS400 NET See Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 237 1 From the Workarea navigate to the folder in which you want to place the file See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 31 Ektron CMS400 NET
108. content reports For information about them see the Content Workflow Reports section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 116 Library Folder Library Folder The library folder stores images files quicklinks and hyperlinks that can be inserted into editor content Before you can insert them into content you must copy them from your computer to a larger file server computer that everyone editing your site can access This chapter explains how to copy such files and insert them into Web content through the following topics Terms Used in this Chapter on page 117 Accessing The Library on page 118 Library Folder Properties on page 120 Searching the Library on page 121 Files on page 124 Hyperlinks on page 136 Images on page 137 Quicklinks and Forms on page 138 Terms Used in this Chapter An image is any graphic file which can include illustrations and photos Common image file extensions are gif jpg tiff etc A file is type of computer file that can be launched from a browser such as Internet Explorer Examples include a Microsoft Word document and a PDF file A hyperlink is a commonly used or hard to remember Web address also known as a URL After you add hyperlinks to the library users can easily apply them to editor content So for example if the editor content is Contact Ektron the user
109. criteria see Retrieving Content into the Smart Folder on page 282 Learn More About the Created Modified Date Screen If you enter both Date Created and Date Modified date ranges the Smart folder only retrieves content that satisfies both criteria along with any other criteria you define for the Smart folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 287 Using Ektron Explorer To explain this point assume you set the following dates on the screen Create Smart Folder Web Page Dialog Step 4 of Date Created between To ag and ms a The following table explains how a Smart Folder retrieves content through four scenarios Created date Modified date Found by date range search 06 25 2006 08 01 2006 no created prior to created date range set on screen 08 01 2006 none yes if no modified date it is same as created date 3 08 01 2006 08 01 2006 yes both dates fall with date ranges set on screen 08 01 2006 08 05 2006 no while the created date falls within range set on screen the modified date does not Only content that satisfies both criteria appears in the Smart folder Recently Viewed Content The Recently Viewed Content option displays the most recently accessed content items up to a predetermined maximum The maximum number of items appears at the top of the right frame Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 288 Using Ektron Expl
110. date If an event is part of a series of recurring events the following icon appears next to it 3 From this screen you can perform the following functions Add anew event See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 304 View edit and delete an existing event The section explains how to edit a single event or a recurring series of events Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 312 Working with Calendars NOTE You can only edit a calendar event if you have edit permission for the folder to which the calendar is assigned See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 304 Editing a Single Event After a calendar event is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location times etc To edit a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to edit as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 304 Click the event you want to edit The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 313 Working with Calendars Edit Calendar Event E i LU 4 AN a d i Pe a E rna A Ai aa Event Title company meeting Event f montreal room Location One Time Recurring Date 56 Apr 2006 pa Start 1 00 00 PM End 2 00 00 PM W Display the times for the event Hyperlink C Launch link in a new browser Even
111. default size is small You can change it to medium or large NOTE You can only adjust the size of HTML or XML content If the content is an external file such as a Word document you cannot adjust its thumbnail size Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 254 Using Ektron Explorer Menu options let you to change only the selected image or all images in the right frame The new size is only used for the current viewing of the folder If you view other folders then return to this one the default size is used To display the menu for changing the thumbnail size move the cursor to the right of the thumbnail image and right click the mouse Then select View the desired size and whether the new size applies to only the selected content or all content in the folder Tesence with Markehno Interactive and Wi ee Gomme and BGT par and Int Perret rere E strator E i Mediurn E Large i All Small f All Medium E All Large f Removing Ektron Explorer from Display To remove Ektron Explorer from display click the X in the top corner of the left frame see below Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help daBack amp Ai EA Search jFavorites Media cS Ektron Explorer x i Explore Search E C Content O Calendar 9 Form Example contact u Thanks far information call you sho lI Last edited Administrata Application
112. definition of the term files see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 117 Copying Files to the Library Files must be copied to the Ektron CMS400 NET library before users can insert them into content To copy a file to the library follow these steps 1 Inthe Workarea browse the library folder and select a folder to which you want to copy a file NOTE When you copy a file to a folder only users with permissions to that folder can insert the file into content 2 A list of files in that folder appears 3 Click the Add Library button i 4 The Add File screen appears Add Library Item to Folder Contenti files Title Filename Description Bs Go cu 3 12 pt AW BZA Ym A Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 125 Library Folder 5 Enter the necessary information according to the following table Field Description O Enter a title for the file to be copied Filename Enter the folder path to the file to be copied You can use the Browse button to find the file Description You can enter a full text description to help other users identify this file The Description appears on the View File screen It also accompanies the file on the Search Results screen if the user selects Mixed when viewing the search results See Also Displaying Search Results on page 123 Below is a description of the buttons on the screen Da Caa View file to make
113. depth Changes the number of colors available to an image e eee Sharpens edges within an image Sharpen on page 548 brightness Changes an image s brightness Brightness on page 529 Image Info on page 538 Dimensions on page 535 Color Depth on page 532 Blur on page 528 contrast Changes the difference between Contrast on page 533 light and dark areas of an image dh horizontal flip Reverses an image horizontally left Horizontal Flip on to right page 538 tz vertical flip Flips an image vertically top to Vertical Flip on bottom page 552 c5 rotate Turns an image a specified number Rotate on page 546 of degrees Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 527 Editing Images Annotation Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see pointer selection Click an annotation to select it Pointer Selection on page 542 E choose color Sets the color for an annotation Choose Color on before you insert it page 530 AA choose font Sets the color of text before you Choose Font on insert it page 531 ae freehand Draws a line in any shape that you Freehand on want page 537 Draws a straight line Line on page 539 polygon Draws a polygon a closed figure Polygon on page 543 surrounded by straight lines rectangle Draws a rectangle Rectangle on page 54
114. different configuration edit a configuration create a new configuration delete a configuration The following sections explain how to install and use the Document Management toolbar Installing the Document Management Toolbar The Document Management toolbar is installed when you install the Ektron Explorer See Recently Viewed Content on page 288 Before beginning to install the Explorer close all Office applications including Outlook and Ektron CMS400 NET Your system administrator needs to create or update a configuration for you in the Configuration Manager It is available from both the Document Manager toolbar button and from Ektron Explorer The configuration lets you access Ektron CMS400 NET Displaying the Document Management Toolbar To display the Document Management toolbar within Office follow these steps Open an Office application Click View gt Toolbars gt Document Management 3 The Document Management toolbar appears on the screen You can drag it to another location if desired NOTE If you display the Document Management toolbar within Word and you use MS Outlook for email the toolbar appears when you create email You may want to move it away from the standard Save and File Open buttons to prevent confusion Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 222 Using the Document Management Functionality E Untitled Message File Edit View Insert Format Tools
115. do so follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Form screen of the form whose properties you want to view as described in Viewing a Form s Information on page 191 2 Click the Form Properties button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 192 Working with HTML Forms 3 The Form Properties screen displays a subset of form information e Title and Description e Database or Mail if form data is emailed whenever a site visitor submits it enter mail property information below See Mail Properties on page 193 e Autofill form values checked by default this allows the form s fields to be automatically filled when a logged in user visits a page and has filled out the form during previous visits e Limit Submission when checked you can enter the number of times a user is allowed to submit a form in the Number of Submissions text field e Assign task to see Assigning a Task to a Form on page 181 e Form block s ID number e Mail Properties Mail Properties Email address to which the form is sent when submitted See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 194 Text that appears in the email s From field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 194 Text that appears in the email s CC field See Also Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form on page 194 Subject Text that appear
116. edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 649 Note For the steps to create a new form see Creating a New Form on page 144 For the steps to create a new survey see Steps to Creating a Survey on page 207 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 202 Working with HTML Forms Choose a content folder From the View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the poll 3 Click New gt HTML Form Survey 9 CMS 4000 emo 4 Developer J Office Documents Managed Files Multimedia Open Office Collection Menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 203 Working with HTML Forms 4 The New Form screen appears New Form _ s a m Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for m m o oo e om o o oe o o o e o e a o o e e a e o n a e e y o a a e e e a e e e a o a e o a a oa o e e e e oa a ae e e a a o a a a a o o e e o s o o e e oe o os a a o s o o e o e a a a Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey E1 Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email A NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the number of steps i
117. editor the date and the time the information was changed This is important to remember if you want the original person who posted the blog to get credit for the post 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site right click the blog then choose Properties Next choose the post NOTE To add a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 Click the blog post title you want to edit 3 Click the Edit button L 4 Change the blog post Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 375 Blogs 5 When the blog is published the changes appear in the blog post on the Web site Approving a Blog Post lf someone who is not a member of the blog s approval chain creates or edits a blog post its status is set to Submitted It will only appear on the Web site after a member of the chain approves it While its status is Submitted it has yellow border on the View Posts in blog screen To approve a blog post see Approving Declining Content on page 81 Deleting a Blog Post NOTE Tobe able to delete a blog post you must have Delete permission on the blog s Standard Permissions screen The following steps explain how to delete a blog post 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site right click the blog then choose Properties Next choose the post NOTE To delete a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 From
118. expression group b fo el e Confusion over function application and multiplication Mathematical notation is often ambiguous There is often no algorithmic way to determine when an expression denotes invisible multiplication and when it denotes function application Jx y x z y One way to avoid confusion is to explicitly insert invisible function application and invisible times characters These characters can Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 638 Working with the Math Expression Editor be inserted from the toolbar However because they are invisible use of these characters is inherently error prone e Confusion over the symbol d The special character d is frequently ambiguous in math expressions involving differentiation and integration Is it just a variable or is it the differential d MathML has a separate character to represent differential d to clear up the ambiguity With Math Expression editor you can ensure you are getting the special version of the character and not the generic variable by using the calculus templates on the toolbar instead of the keyboard e Inherently ambiguous notations To give authors control over the conversion of inherently ambiguous notations WebEQ provides a way of giving semantic hints using the MathML other attribute on an expression The syntax for hints is a comma separated list of rule value pairs other rulena
119. feature e Adding Subfolders on page 55 e Searching the Library on page 121 e The Administrator Manual chapter Searching Content on the Web Site Blog Posts For a definition of blog posts see Introduction on page 343 From your Web site only published blog posts are visible But from the Workarea you can see all blog posts regardless of status Using the Workarea you can also create edit delete and archive blog posts the same way you work with content See Also Managing HTML Content on page 61 This section contains the following subtopics e Blog Posts on the Site on page 369 e Blog Posts in the Workarea on page 371 e Adding a Blog Post on page 373 e Editing a Blog Post on page 375 e Deleting a Blog Post on page 376 Blog Posts on the Site You can view published blog posts on the Web site The following is an example of one Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 369 Blogs o1 31 2006 m j kg n y i bo Bo le E E B e h li Ih B E m E E Em Blogroll Scott s Blog Toby Tyler s Blog Music Artist of the Week Best Week Ever T hic ic the Qtaru af Ada Fifa Contained within the blog post are its Title Content Comments Link Post Time Date and Editor Information Below is a breakdown of a blog post on a site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 370 Blogs ee ee
120. feature you create the Web content now and set it to go live a week before the sale The Ektron Windows Service manages these changes to your site See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing your CMS400 System gt Ektron Windows Service This topic is explained through the following subtopics e Setting a Start Date on page 61 e Setting an End Date on Content on page 63 e Setting Archive Options on page 64 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 60 Scheduling Content to Begin and End setting a Start Date To set a start date follow these steps 1 Access the editor by adding new content or editing existing content 2 If adding new content enter a title and the content 3 Click the Schedule tab Edit Content in Folder Root Tite English U S Content Schedule Comment BBE B M 4 4 oo Fe ARANA O a7 iI l h weeds Chola 25 Klee Th F TT A A a ME 4 Click the calendar button next to the Start Date field Start Date None 5 A calendar pops up 6 Select the date and time when the content will become visible on the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 61 Scheduling Content to Begin and End http localhost cMs4oo fa Bf ss Nov December 2005 Jan gt gt Sun l Mon Tue Wed Thu u Fri Fri s a a esjs
121. follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 392 Personalizing a Web Page 1 Goto the personalization Web page Your system administrator will tell you how to find it In the sample database provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the page Is http localhost cms400demo mypage aspx Click Personalize to enter personalization mode Move the cursor to the left of a content item s personalization menu illustrated below MainRightZone P Ektron Rated Positive Ektron Inc an innovator in Web ro The cursor changes to a four headed arrow Drag the content to a different Web part zone Editing Content Editing allows you to do the following to a content item e replace it with another item of the same type e move it to a different Web part zone e change its width and height Editing does not allow you to change the content of any item To edit content follow these steps 1 Goto the personalization Web page Your system administrator will tell you how to find it In the sample database provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the page Is http localhost cms400demo mypage aspx Click Personalize to enter personalization mode The screen refreshes If you have edit permission edit appears on each content item s personalization menu circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 393 Personalizing a Web Page MainRightZone Arthri
122. has endeared our products to the RO commmuruty We wall c improve our attordable products and hope you will become an RC international member Within the View Content Difference feature you can perform several tasks as well as view different versions of the content separately or compared The View Content Difference feature is explained through the following topics e When Can I Compare Content on page 93 e The Compare Content Window on page 93 e First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 98 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 92 Comparing Versions of Content When Can I Compare Content The View Content Difference feature is only available when e you are viewing an historical version of content e a staged version of the content is available See Also Staged Content on page 654 The following table explains when you can use the feature and which versions are compared Content Status Compares current published version with Published Historical version stored in the content history area Checked In Most recently checked in version Submitted Submitted version Pending Start Date Scheduled version pending start date Checked Out Not available If content can be compared with another version the View Difference button EA appears in the content history area or the Web page view The Compare Content Window NOTE The first time the View Conten
123. has some very large 18 point text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 463 Creating a Simple Web Page Creating a Sample Web Page To create this page follow these steps Enter the First Two Sentences 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Your Webmaster installs eWebEditPro XML on your computer and determines which fonts and sizes are available Your system may not match the example below Type the first two sentences This is some sample content You can make text bold italic and underlined with the push of a button Double click the word bold to select it Then click the Bold button B to apply bold to the word Double click the word italic Then click the Italic button Z to apply italic to the word Double click the word underlined Then click the underline button W to underline the word Create a Hyperlink e ww NN Type You can also easily add hyperlinks Double click the word hyperlinks so that it becomes selected Click the Hyperlink button i The hyperlink dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 464 Creating a Simple Web Page Hyperfink gt Hyperlink Information Type http Link http Bookmark Text content Target Frame 0 Cancel i Quick Link select link Mi 5 In the Link field after http enter www ektron com 6 Click OK Notic
124. how to display the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 123 Library Folder Search Library Folder Mixed Tea F Ceaarch ntinns View Description option If the item is an image display the Title image in the left column If not l ANM ON DEMAND arin n A E on Demand Conference and Exhibit display its title EEEE oaran Teaser ee ai Ektron CMS400 Net logo large size display the item s CMs z g Description Note Mixed search results require the Internet Explorer browser version 6 or greater Display item s title in the left column Title Type Folder Name jee AM Images CMS400Example uploadediImages type and folder CMS400 Logo Images CMS400Example uploadediImages name Codes Images CMS400Example uploadediImages CRSM Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Gilbane Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Market Cycle Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Panorama Images CMS400Example uploadediImages Files This section explains how to work with library files through the following subtopics Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 124 Library Folder e Copying Files to the Library on page 125 e Viewing Files on page 127 e Editing a File on page 129 e Overwriting Files on page 129 e Library Link Searching on page 132 e Adding a Library File to Content on page 133 For a
125. is licensed for use only in delivered code form Each copy of the Software is licensed for use only on a single URL Each license is valid for the number of seats listed below the Basic Package Any use of the Software beyond the number of authorized seats contained in the Basic Package without paying additional license fees as provided herein shall cause this license to terminate Should CUSTOMER wish to add seats beyond the seats licensed in the Basic Package the CUSTOMER may add seats on a block basis at the then current price for additional seats See product pages for current price The Basic Packages are as follows Ektron CMS300 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS400 NET Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro XML Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL For purposes of this section the term seat shall mean an individual user provided access to the capabilities of the Software The CUSTOMER may not modify alter reverse engineer disassemble or decompile the Software This software product is licensed not sold 2 Duration This License shall continue so long as CUSTOMER uses the Software in compliance with this License Should CUSTOMER breach any of its obligations hereunder CUSTOMER agrees to return all copies of the Software and this License upon notification and demand by Ektron 3
126. items use the View Content Difference feature explained in Comparing Versions of Content on page 92 NOTE The Purge History feature deletes historical versions of content according to user defined criteria Therefore some previous versions may be unavailable Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual gt Managing Content Folders gt Folder Properties gt Purge History The View and Restore features are explained through the following subtopics e Accessing Content History on page 99 e The Content History Window on page 101 e Restoring a Previous Version on page 102 e Comparing Historical Versions on page 103 e Removing Applied XSLT on page 103 Accessing Content History By default all users can view the history of Ektron CMS400 NET content You can access content history from two places e The Workarea s View Content page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 99 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content e The icon menu for content on a Web page Once you access the history the functionality is identical The following sections explains how to access the content history from both places Accessing the Content History from the Workarea To access the history from the Workarea follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Content page for the content whose history you want to view 2 Click the View History button Ta Accessing the Content H
127. language of a collection So create the content first then create the collection that links to them Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists 1 Click the content folder in which your collection exists The folder s contents are displayed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 417 Toe D N Working with Collections Click View gt Collections The View Collections screen is displayed Select the collection that you want to translate From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection Using the Add button ca select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the selected language Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist Navigate to the folder in which you will create the collection Click View gt Collections The View Collections screen is displayed Click the Add button ca and enter basic information about the collection This screen is described in Creating a Collection on page 407 The View Collections in Folder screen appears Click the collection you just created From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection Using the Add button ca select the content to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content you want to add You can only add content in the sele
128. mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Assigning Border Size You can also adjust the size of a table border Size is measured in pixels one pixel 15 pixel table border table border To assign a border size to your table enter a number of pixels into the Border Size field on the Insert Table dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 579 Manipulating Your Table s Format Border Color arram as Border Size If you set a table s border size to zero 0 but wish to view the table s boundary lines while you are editing it select the table and click the border button H Boundary lines will appear while you are editing but disappear when a user views the page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 580 Working with Table Cells NOTE Along with functions for managing tables described in Introduction to Tables on page 554 and Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 565 eWebEditPro XML also lets you perform actions on individual cells within a table You can perform the following actions on individual table cells e Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 581 e Inserting a Cell on page 582 e Deleting a Cell on page 583 e Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 584 e Specifying a Cell s Background Color on p
129. most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are e No validation response is not checked e Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked If you assign Cannot be blank the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field Message does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 180 Working with HTML Forms Implementing a Form on a Web Page After you create the form you need to link it to another page on your Web site You would insert the link as you would any form link See Adding a Library File to Content on page 133 Next open your Web Site navigate to the host page and
130. mouse Select New gt New Folder for the popup menu A folder icon appears with a blinking cursor next to it t Gage LOCA LISE Lo My Favorites Hv Recently Viewed Robot 1000 5 Enter a name for the folder NOTE You can create an unlimited number of folders underneath any folder Placing Content into a Workspace or Workspace Folder 1 Within the standard Ektron CMS400 NET folder structure in the top the left frame select the folder that contains the content of interest That folder s content appears in the right frame Place the cursor on the title of the content you want to place in the Workspace or Workspace folder 4 Hold the left mouse button down while dragging the content to the desired Workspace or Workspace folder N t You cannot drag and drop files from your computer s file system into Workspace ote folders Using Smart Folders Like Workspace folders Smart folders let you assemble content that you are interested in without regard to its Ektron CMS400 NET location Instead of dragging and dropping content however you enter search criteria The Smart Folder can retrieve all content that meet the criteria For example you want a Smart Folder that has vacation request forms from all departments created during August In Ektron CMS400 NET s folder structure each department s folder contains Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 280 Using Ektron Explore
131. navigation and selection Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 O A O Working with the Math Expression Editor Shortcut Supported Key Platforms lt Tab gt Cycles the cursor among open template blanks in an equation After all templates are visited lt TAB gt moves the cursor to the end of the equation Continuing to hit TAB repeats the cycle lt Enter gt When the cursor is at a location in the MathML structure where a on line is a valid action lt Enter gt inserts one Moves cursor to end of current line lt Home gt Moves cursor to beginning of current line lt Ctrl gt Moves cursor to beginning of equation lt Home gt lt Ctrl gt Move cursor to end of equation lt Enter gt lt Shift gt gt Extends selection to right lt Shift gt lt Extends selection to left lt Ctrl gt A Select all Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 647 Appendix A Content Statuses The table below describes all possible content statuses The rest of this appendix explains each status in more detail Border Color oo _ _ yellow Submitted for Approval Marked for Deletion grey Pending Go Live Date Awaiting Completion of Associated Tasks T Pending Deletion Content state Through the workflow and published on the Web site Currently being edited Has not been checked in Checked in for other users to edit S
132. need every advantage tilted in the The editor resembles popular word processing software You can enter text then select it and click a button to change its display Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 8 properties For example you can make text bold change the color or copy and paste it You can also insert images tables links to other Web pages and check spelling The Lifecycle of Content After you edit content you typically submit it for approval to one or more individuals who oversee changes to your Web site These people can review edit and approve the change When the last approver signs off the new content becomes available on the Web site In some cases you are one of the content approvers In this case you receive an email notifying you that content needs approval You look it over change it as needed then pass it on to the next approver If you do not agree with the changes you can decline the request In this case the user who made the edits is informed that the change is not approved The following graphic illustrates the content approval cycle Create or edit content Publish to Web site To help track content s position in this workflow Ektron CMS400 NET assigns a status to each content item The status determines what you can do with it and indicates what must occur in order for it to get published to the Web site For more information see Appendix A Conten
133. or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 6 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 7 Change the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 8 Click the Save button 1 Editing a Menu via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus Module follow these steps From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Click the menu you want to edit Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit oe I Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 5 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 6 As necessary update the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 7 Click the Save button 1 Editing a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Click the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 439 Working with Menus 3 The menu appears Click Edit Menu The View Menu screen for the menu appears Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit ot oY or oS
134. page Ektron DMS400 will be automatically downloaded and installed This process may take several minutes depending on the speed of your network connection Once downloaded Ektron DMS400 will not need to download again unless Upgrading to a newer version You must have authorization to install programs on your computer Follow these steps to install the Document Management software 1 Read the screen 2 Atthe bottom of the screen click Install Now 3 The following screen appears The line at the top of the screen circled in red may appear depending on your browser security Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 17 ef This site might require the Following Actives control DMS400 From Ektran Inc Click here to install Ektron DMS400 Automatic Download and Installation When the installation complete successfully please clase this window ig Click here to install the following Actives control OMS400 from Ektron Inc If a small red X appears try downloading the client installation program and running it For additional assistance visit Ektron s support page Close 4 lf that text appears click it The following menu appears IMS400 From Ektron Inc Click here to install Install Activex Control What s the Risk DMS400 7 Information Bar Help omatic ind Installation Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Versio
135. paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 147 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 149 10 Now that you have completed information about the form you can enter the form s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 152 Composing the Postback Message The postback message can contain text or graphics just like any other HTML content Typically tt acknowledges the site visitor s completion of the form For most sample forms provided sample text appears in the editor Modify it as you wish using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor to change the font size style color insert library items etc Inserting Fields into the Postback Message You can also insert fields that retrieve form information upon its submission Use the Insert Fields pull down to do this illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 146 Working with HTML Forms Business Phone Home Phone All form fields appear on the list In addition the following fields can be used to insert form information into the postback message although they re not completed by the person submitting the form e Form title e Form descript
136. perform these actions by logging in and navigating to the calendar on your site To view a calendar follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar you want to see as described in Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 295 2 Click the View Calendar i button 3 The calendar appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 300 Working with Calendars Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Bel 6 4 Bal e 5 EJA 6 Ed A 7 ALM Trade ALIM Trade SIT Trade show in show in show in Miani Miami Miani Ta E 11 Ed E 12 Ed E 13 Ed S 14 Ed E I Company meeting Ta E 18 Ed E 19 E S 20 Ed S 21 Ed 5l lk 1 See Also Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 302 4 lf you want to view events of a certain type only click the Select Event Type to View drop down list illustrated below Then choose an event type See Also Undersianding Event Types on page 308 show All Company Holiday Trade Show Company Event The page is refreshed and the calendar displays events of that type only Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 301 Working with Calendars From the View Calendar screen you can perform the following tasks Note that the Add and View buttons appear on each calendar day while the Return button is on the toolbar at the top of the screen Click on More Information Add Calendar Event Adding a Cal
137. procedure described in Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box on page 484 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar You can move a menu from the toolbar to anywhere else on the screen even if eWebEditPro XML does not occupy the entire screen You can also change the orientation of a menu that is not on the toolbar from a horizontal to vertical To move a menu follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the a WE fe dh beginning of the menu Click the mouse 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere on the screen 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 487 Customizing Your Toolbar Changing the Menu s Orientation To change the menu s orientation follow these steps Drag the menu from the toolbar 2 Move the cursor to the bottom of the menu until it becomes a double headed arrow illustrated below ee EBM om Ye wee 3 Drag the cursor to the lower left As you do the menu s orientation changes from horizontal to vertical illustrated below 25 Bae F lt 5 T m mi A 2 kj Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 488 The Context Sensitive Menu This section explains the functions available on the menu that appears when you right click the mous
138. reference The spell check feature does not use the other fields on this screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 502 Editing in Microsoft Word lf your computer has Microsoft Word 2000 or greater you can edit content within Word You may prefer to do this because of familiarity with Word s user interface and to use additional functionality available in Word See Also Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 214 NOTE Some Word formatting may not be compatible with HTML and as a result not be transferred to eWebEditPro XML To edit with Word follow these steps 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Press the Word toolbar button f The following dialog may appear warning you that some Word formatting may not be transferred back to eWebEditPro XML Press Yes if you still want to edit in Word Edit in ford i ou are about to edit your document in MS Word Due to the limitations of HTML there may be a loss of formatting when returning the document to the editor Do you wish to proceed 4 Microsoft Word opens Any content that was in eWebEditPro XML when you pressed the Word button is copied to Word Edit content as desired Press File gt Close 7 Another warning like the one in Step 3 may appear Press Yes to copy the edited content back to eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 503 Editing in Microsoft Word
139. removed If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content on page 81 You can delete a single content item or several content items in a folder Both procedures are explained below Deleting a Single Content Item To delete one content item follow these steps Deleting Content from a Web Page To delete content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button i The View Content screen for the selected content appears See Viewing Content on page 38 5 Click the Delete button 1 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 53 6 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E x This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request 2 Are vou sure vou wish bo submit this content block to the approvers For deletion 4 This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue Cancel 7 Click OK to delete the content Deleting Content from the Workarea 1 Access the View Content screen for the content you want to delete as described in Viewing Content on page 38 2 Click the Delete button i 3 The following message appears Are you sure vou wish bo submit this content block to the approvers For deletion This content wil
140. returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor Check In Save and check in the document This action returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor It does not submit the content into the approval chain Rather it allows you and other users to continue changing it Save Save the content without leaving the editor It is a good idea to save your work frequently Close the editor without saving changes Tabs on the Edit Content Screen Content Insert content For more information about using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor see Introduction to eWebEditPro XML on page 461 Summary Enter or edit the content summary See Also Adding a Content Summary on page 67 ai Metadata Enter or edit the content metadata Note All required metadata must be added before the content can be submitted into the approval chain See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 48 Comment Briefly describe the content or comment on changes made when editing content The history comment appears on the View Content and Content History screens If you don t want to submit the content to the approval chain immediately enter when it will be submitted See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 If appropriate enter a date when the content will no longer be viewable on the Web site See Also Setting an E
141. saving it thereby submitting it to the approval chain use the Work Offline option See The Work Offline Option on page 230 lf you later edit an approved document it status reverts to checked out Importing an Office Document Your computer or network may have Office documents that you want to manage using DM Follow these steps to import any document into Ektron s Document Management functionality See Also Drag and Drop File Uploading vs the New Content Menu Options on page 239 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the document See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 31 3 The default language appears next to the screen title To create the document under a different language click View gt Language and select the language 4 Click New gt Office Documents 5 The Insert New Document Object screen appears Insert New Document Object o 2 x aak f Create New Microsoft Excel Chart Cancel w ese sen le Microsoft Excel Worksheet E Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Microsoft Word Document Result Inserts a new Image Document object into your k document Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 228 Using the Document Management Functionality NOTE The list of object types is determined by the applications installed on your computer For example an MS Project file type only
142. search field Contains Match Partial words Words on page 110 Match Criteria Examples The examples below assume you entered these words into the Search Text field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 109 Searching the Workarea e partners e content e Monday e employee e green All Words All Words works like an and function The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday and employee and green The words can be in any order within the file Any Word Any Word is almost the opposite of All of the Words It works like an or function When you select this option the search returns all files that have at least one of the words entered in the search text field In other words it returns files with the word partners or content or Monday or employee or green Exact Phrase Exact Phrase returns content that have all five words in the order specified in the search text field A better example would be to search for a phrase such as Content Management Solution The search yields only content with that exact phrase Contains Match Partial Words Although you cannot search for wild cards the Match Partial Words option does almost the same For example enter at into the search text field then select Match Partial Words The search returns all content with the letters at finding words such as At Bat Chatter Atoll ATM etc Ektron CMS400 NET
143. select link 3 Click in the Link field after nttp 7 Then enter the address of the destination Web page For example to enter a hyperlink to the ektron Web site enter www ektron com 4 lf desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 602 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 5 Click OK Testing a Hyperlink Within the eWebEditPro XML editor you can test a hyperlink To do this select the hyperlink then double click it That action launches the Web page assigned to the hyperlink Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page Sometimes the destination Web page contains bookmarks and you want to jump from your page to a bookmark on another page Bookmarks are described in Using Bookmarks on page 599 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 606 Using Hyperlinks To create a hyperlink that jumps to another page s bookmark follow these steps Go to the destination Web page 2 Click the bookmark that you want to jump to For example on the illustration below the text Benefits to Partners jumps to a bookmark further down on the page PARTNER PROGRAM OVERYIEW Welcome Executive Summary Ektron Partner Programs Ektron Technology Partners Benefits to Partners Ektron Products Partners in L
144. task information Viewing a Task on page 331 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 342 Blogs Introduction Blogs short for Web Logs are a form of online information sharing A blog is often set up so a group of people can share their thoughts on a subject In addition blogs can be used to create an online diary of everyday life In the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea blogs and blog posts have a relationship similar to folders and content The blog is the equivalent of a folder and blog posts are the equivalent of content items While blogs and blog posts have a few unique properties they mostly work the same as folders and content On your Web site blogs are arranged so the latest post appears at the top This differs from paper diaries because you are reading the newest material first instead of the oldest Because blogs are laid out this way site visitors can quickly find the most recent entries Blogs are made up of multiple elements These elements allow site visitors to view or create a blog post add comments and see a roll call of associated blogs In addition if a blog calendar is present on the blog site visitors can see which days have blog posts Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 343 Blogs o2 06 2006 E Writing a Masterpiece I m gonna write the melody That s gonna make history Yeah and when I paint my masterpiece I swear Jil show
145. the Add Task screen the Select Content screen appears It shows only content in the selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 323 Managing Tasks Select Content Please select content by navigating the folders below Path 4 im Human Resources i Marketing B Products im Support B Syndication C Contact Ektron Greeting C Home Page Content C Introducing the RC Redstar C new content You should only select a content folder for which you have permissions To select a piece of content to assign to the task follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content Click any folder to open it 2 Click the circle to the left of the content w Support i Syndication contact Ektron C Greeting 3 Press the Save button fa Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 324 Managing Tasks Adding a Task Category and Task Type Task Categories and Task Types let users and administrators sort task by user defined categories and types By clicking the Add link located next to the Task Type drop down box you can add Task Categories and Task Types This allows you to add categories and types without leaving the Add Task screen NOTE Administrators can also add and edit Task Categories and Task Types from the Workarea by clicking Settings gt Configurations gt Task Types See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks
146. the Picture s Title The title that you entered in the Insert Media Item dialog box defaults into the Title field of the Media Selection dialog box You can edit the title in this field if desired NOTE The title is also the ait text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason The Options Button When you click the Options button on the File Properties dialog box the options dialog box appears The box displays information about your connection to the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 519 Inserting Images Cancel For information about these settings see Uploading Images in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Moving an Image to the Server If you insert an image from your computer into eWebEditPro XML content that image must be moved to the server when you save the content The image can only appear on Web pages that display it after you move it to the server When you save content that includes an image you inserted the following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 520 Inserting Images Files Waiting for Upload al Hone wnet 13 KB Estimated Upload Time 00 00 05 Files for Upload Upload Now Upload Later beanie Preview All inserted files appear in the dialog which also est
147. the View Task page for the task as described in Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder on page 331 NOTE You cannot edit a task after viewing it from the Content folder 2 Click the Edit button L 3 The Edit Task screen appears 4 Edit the task 5 Click the Update button i to save the changes Adding Comments to Tasks You can add comments to an assigned task if you want to provide additional information about its status For example if you update a task s status from n progress to Waiting on Someone Else you can use a comment to describe the status change such as left voice mail with John with questions about his changes to the home page Comments appear at the bottom of the View Tasks screen illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 337 Managing Tasks Sn kelLiLkikLikbLkeliLiLkeikbiLkeiLikL kel LkLiLkiLiLkeiLiLkeiLIiLkeliLiLkilikbLikbLkeliLiILhkeiLILkeILIkLI Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To E admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Mot Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blocks on the list Comments Date Time Added By 10 Jun 004 10 47 Sh Comments Be sure to check this list every day for content blocks needing approval John Edit Several comments can be adde
148. the alphabet as well as common words Examples of common words are about after all and also Avoid entering such words into the Search Text field because the search ignores them To find the list of noise words search your computer for files named noise xxx where xxx is a three letter abbreviation for the language For example noise eng lists English noise words Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 108 Searching the Workarea You can open a noise file with a simple word processor program such as Notepad to view any language s noise words You can also edit the file For example you can remove words that users should be able to search on Specifying Match Criteria NOTE This field is only applicable if you entered one or more words in the Search Text field From this dropdown list select criteria for how the search word or words must appear within the content of the files being searched 1 LIDFary 1 Inude Afcnlyved Search Text eg All ords nA We of d 5 Any Word Exact Phrase Your choices are described below A search returns content that has For more information see All Words all words in the search field All Words on page 110 Any Word any word in the search field Any Word on page 110 Title Exact Phrase all words in the order specified in the search field Exact Phrase on page 110 Contains match partial any part of any word in the
149. the configuration setup screen 5 When done click the Save button 1 The View Content page reappears The status of the content changes to checked out to you NOTE When you enter or edit existing content s summary its status changes to checked out After you create the summary click the Check In button to check the content in From that point you need to submit or publish it Editing a Summary NOTE You can only edit the summary of content that is published checked in or checked out by you To edit a content s summary follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose summary you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 38 2 Click the Summary tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 69 Adding a Content Summary Edit Content in Folder Root Wo ba E em a a English U 5 4 Tithe Sample Content Block Summary Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates BB EEGA oo Yu Mae TEEF gt Bi Apply Style Normal 3 BIUAA 7 Lir lin The Edit Summary window opens Click the Edit button The summary opens within the editor Make the necessary changes Click the Save button E The summary is saved and the View Content page is displayed with a status of checked out NO M e
150. the menu Te Sy z The Cell Properties dialog box appears Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Layout f Not Specified f Percent fa herd airan C Pisels 6 In the layout section of the dialog box enter the cell width at the Width field You can enter the width in pixels or percentage These choices are explained in Specifying Table Width on page 567 7 Click OK Inserting a Cell To insert a cell follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 582 Working with Table Cells 1 Move the cursor to the right of where you want the new cell to appear 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Cell from the menu The new cell appears to the left of the cell in which the cursor resides when you click Insert Cell The cursor cell and all cells to its right shift right to make room for the new cell In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked Insert Cell Before o pee e Co E E Deleting a Cell To delete one or more cells follow these steps Move the cursor to the first cell you want to delete 2 To delete only that cell proceed to the next step To delete several contiguous cells select them Contiguous cells can cross rows 3 Right click the mouse 4 Click Delete Cells from the menu Any cells to the right of the deleted cells shift left to occupy the vacant space In this example the cursor
151. the template and instead use Quicklinks to determine the page template See Also Quicklinks and Forms on page 138 If you specify a template all content in the collection uses the same screen elements other than the specific content For example the page header footer and information in the right frame of the screen are all the same On the other hand if you use Quicklinks every page in the collection uses its original template As a result the surrounding information may change for every content item in the collection Here is an example of links using Quicklinks Notice that content uses several templates As a result when a user clicks content in the collection the screen information around the content changes according to its template Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 409 Title Home Page Content Support Page Plastic Molder 123 RC Cheetah RC Redstar New Content Block Contact Ektron Swe oe ie 17 15 Working with Collections 5 i l CMS300Sample index asp id 1 CMS300Sample index asp id 8 CMS300Sample hr asp id 13 CMS300Sample products asp id 5 CMS300Sample products asp id 7 CMS300Sample index asp id 17 CMS300Sample index asp 7id 15 Here is an example of links when using a template named index asp In this case all pages have the same information Surrounding the content Title Home Page Content Support Page Plastic Molder 123 RC Cheetah R
152. the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 475 Toolbar Buttons If an image overlays text move the text in front of the image Text Direction Options The text direction menu options allow bi directional editing of text which is useful for Arabic Farsi and Hebrew The client computer must also support the language The text buttons determine the editing direction while the edit buttons determine the side of the editor that displays the scroll bar For right to left languages such as Arabic Farsi and Hebrew the text editing would be right to left and the scroll bar would be on the left side For western European languages the text editing would be left to right and the scroll bar would be on the right side T i i T alf a The vertical scroll bar appears on the alll Left Right Eoi right side of the window The vertical scroll bar appears on the left side of the window Right Left Edit Form Elements Toolbar See Inserting Form Fields on page 155 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 476 Toolbar Buttons Table Elements Toolbar Toolbar Description For more information see button Insert table Introduction to Tables on page 554 Add row Inserts a new row below the last one Add column Inserts a new column to the right or the right column Insert row Inserts a new row above the curren
153. to Edit The last user to edit this content Last Edit Date When the content was last edited Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 42 Field Description Start Date When the content will go live on the Web site End Date When the content will be removed from the Web site Action on End Date What happens to the content when its end date and time are reached See Also Setting Archive Options on page 64 Date Created When the content was created Approval Method Whether all approvers must sign off on content before it is published managed by your system administrator Approvals The users in the approval chain for this content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 81 Smart Form Configuration The Smart Form applied to the content This is typically managed by your system administrator See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms Template The template currently assigned to the content See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates The folder path to the content s folder A slash represents the Content folder Rating Ektron CMS400 NET provides a Content Rating feature that lets site visitors rate any content item on a scale of 1 to 10 If this feature is enabled for the content item the average numerical rating appears
154. unformatted free text response A text area field is similar to a Text Field except it scrolls vertically to accept more text To insert a text area field follow these steps 1 Place a text area field onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 154 2 The following dialog appears Textarea Descriptive Hame Field Hame Tool Tip Text Default value Validation validation Ho validation Error Message Fields on the Textarea Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 169 Working with HTML Forms Field Description Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 184 Descriptive Name Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this value field collects a city and most users enter New York enter New York as the value Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completin
155. via Content Folder To add a menu item via a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder that contains the menu to which you want to add items Click View gt Menus Click the menu that you want to add items to 4 Inthe View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu See Also Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 449 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 429 Working with Menus 5 The View Menu screen opens displaying the items already on the menu Submenus look like a folder with a plus sign to the left amp 6 6 To add anew item to the selected menu or any submenus on it move the cursor over the menu item and click Add from the popup menu NOTE View Menu Ser Feorder O trad L Edit cat O ped Df Delete Pie 4 When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 7 The Add New Item screen appears Use the table below to select a type of menu item and follow the steps to add it Assign this type of content to the menu Content Any library asset images files Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu External hyperlink Submenu to the main menu For details see Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 432 Adding a Library Asset as a Men
156. was in cell b when the user clicked on Delete Cells Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 583 Working with Table Cells Before setting a Cell s Border Color NOTE A cell border is the line that separates it from other cells By default the color of a cell s border matches the color of the table border However you can change the color of any cell border individually When viewed in Netscape Navigator cell borders are gray regardless of any change you make on the Cell Properties dialog box This example illustrates the effect of different cell border colors within a table E Sets the color of the table bec Sets the thickness of the tab late tha ceacines saree thes lf you want a cell s border to disappear set it to the same color as the table s background color To change the color of a cell s border follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 584 Working with Table Cells 4 Click the Border Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the cell border See Also Using the Color Box on page 588 Color Basic colors EE EHEHEH Define Custom Colors
157. wish and a Workspace can have any number of Workspace folders Furthermore any folder can have an unlimited number of subfolders So you can set up a multi leveled structure for managing content that suits your perspective Tip After creating Workspaces to manage your content click the negative icon to the left of the toomost Workspace for user name This action collapses the standard folder structure letting you focus on your Workspace organization Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 278 Using Ektron Explorer Content Management Explore Search lt amp Workspace for Bob admin Robot 1000 4 Sales 4 Marketing Robot 2000 9 Engineering Specs E Sales 9 North America 3 Europe Robot 3000 9 Marketing O Sales m To create a Workspace folder first create a Workspace then create its folders Next drag desired content into the folders Creating a Workspace 1 Inthe left frame of the Explorer right click the mouse 2 From the popup menu select New Workspace 3 A monitor icon appears in the bottom left frame ge Local Disk C My Favorites H Recently Viewed Robot 1000 4 Enter the name of the Workspace Creating a Workspace Folder 1 Hover the cursor over the Workspace Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 279 Using Ektron Explorer Right click the
158. within Ektron CMS400 NET Examples of a tasks include e updating content e publishing content e updating an image e reordering a collection The Tasks folder displays all tasks that are either assigned to you or that you assigned to another user or user group You can also assign tasks to yourself A task may or may not be related to a specific piece of content If it is you Can access content then attach a task to it This kind of task is managed just like the other tasks but you can also view and update it via the attached content For more information see Viewing a Task on page 331 This chapter explains how to work with tasks through the following topics e Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 318 e Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 325 e Creating a Task from the Web Site on page 330 e Creating a Task via the Content Folder on page 330 NOTE Tasks can also be created automatically when forms are submitted See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 181 e Viewing a Task on page 331 e Editing a Task on page 336 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 337 e Deleting a Task on page 340 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 317 Managing Tasks Viewing a Task s History on page 341 Task Module Toolbar on page 342 Creating a Task via the Task Folder This topic consists of the following subtopics Accessing th
159. word only Replace E eee Ease Replace All Direction Up Down Cancel You can use this dialog box to simply find text or to find text and replace it with other text Each option is explained below NOTE You can also use this dialog to delete text that appears repeatedly To do so follow the directions in Finding and Replacing Text on page 495 and enter nothing in the Replace With field See Also e Finding Text on page 494 e Finding and Replacing Text on page 495 e Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 495 Finding Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find in the content 2 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 495 3 Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the find text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 494 Finding and Replacing Text Finding and Replacing Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find 2 Inthe Replace With field type the text to replace the find text 3 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 495 4 If you want to replace all occurrences of the find text with the replace text click Replace All NoTE You can undo replacements one at a time using the Undo button replace only the highlighted term with the replace text click Replace find t
160. words that partially match the search string for example if you enter the word the the search returns content that includes theater e find content that includes all words you enter any of the words or just the exact phrase The options are explained in Specifying Match Criteria on page 109 Performing Actions on Content Ektron Explorer lets you perform several actions on Ektron CMS400 NET content For example you can edit content change its title move it to another folder etc This section explains these actions To see a list of available actions move the cursor to the right frame and right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 257 Using Ektron Explorer Edit Add to Fayvortes Cut Copy Rename Delete Send to Email Hew P View P i Properties The menu options may change depending on your permissions for and the status of the content Selecting Content To perform most actions first select content To do this move the cursor to the title until it changes to a hand see illustration Content Ma ment Bible This 1 the c te end to end solution for the complicated tast content he coe and provides everything readers need to kn build and manage robust content management systems for Last edited by bob bob on 2 23 2006 5 58 57 PM Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 258 Using Ektron Explorer
161. you first There just aint a way to see Who when why or what will be Til now is then it s a mystery A blessing and a curse Or something worse yeah Posted by John Fdit at 02 06 2006 04 10 16 PM Comments fo LF See FF LAF Gey Sa 26 2 Posted by John Edit at 02 06 2006 04 10 16 PM Comments 2 2 __ ies Looks good Make sure you show me first Posted by John Norman Howard email visit on 02 09 2006 01 57 PM Leave a comment Application Administrator Name required F mail required http URL Your Comment Post Comment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 344 Blogs Blogs in the Workarea appear as a language bubble in the folder structure This distinguishes a blog folder from a content folder E Folders E i CMS400Deme 9 _Rotatingl mages C About Us C Book Store 9 Conditions lt iii The following table lists elements commonly found in a blog Daaa Gaona Blog Title The name of your blog as you want it to appear on the site For example My Life Story Blog Post The main entry for each topic A blog post is made up of several sub elements Headline the title of the post Commentary the details of the post Comment Link links to a comments page where site visitors can view or add comments TrackBack URL a URL visitors can use to notify you when they are talking about the blog post on their site PingBac
162. 0 1S6 CMS200S5amplefndex asp id 7 Please Note You must loom and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditer Editorin Chief Comment NOTE Emails are only sent if your Administrator enables them The content contributor Sports Writer has completed his role in the approval chain but continues to receive emails notifying him of changes in the content s status First Approver After Sports Writer submits the content the first user in the approval chain Sports Editor receives an email stating content needs his approval He can change and approve the content or decline it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 87 Approving Declining Content Sports Editor logs into Ektron CMS400 NET navigates to his desktop where he sees a link Content Awaiting Approval User jedit pa A ee Ble Sais x Ne ee Basil he wv anc fs ic Pen a8 ca LA ee EN SEES EE NEST LN wee OEE ESET EA OEE A AEEA ene TS MOR ee NH ah EESO M EEEO Wyn EEEE ay OEE Hwee Winn eva EEE EET fee w NWN Rea UN ea wet ew Payee eM Smart Desktop for John Edit Content Awaiting Approval 2 L Content Currently Checked Out 2 Tasks 0 He clicks the link and sees all content awaiting his approval The approvals folder window displays information such as title who submitted it go live date etc The Sports editor clicks the subm
163. 0 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 A ina Editing Images Lets you choose the color of annotation text before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu 531 Arial Marrow F Arial Unicode MS F Batang O Berling Antiqua Book Antigua Color Depth Standard Toolbar Button Description Editing Images Regular Italic ald Bold Italic Changes an image s color depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 553 Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 532 Editing Images w Color Depth Contrast Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases or decreases an image s contrast that is the difference between light and dark areas of an image You can select a contrast level from 10 through 10 If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box w Contrast Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 533 Copy Editing Images Standard Toolbar Button Description Create New Copies a selected area of an image After you copy an image you can paste it using the paste command See Also Paste as New Image on page 542 To select an area of an image use the Select command See Also Select on page 548 If you do not se
164. 0 and Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 237 The user performing the drag and drop must have permission to add files to the selected folder To drag and drop external files into Ektron CMS400 NET follow these steps Open Ektron Explorer Make sure the Explorer tab is selected not the Search tab Resize Explorer to half of the screen aw i a Open Windows Explorer and resize it to the other half of the screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 271 Using Ektron Explorer 5 From Windows Explorer navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to insert into Ektron CMS400 NET 6 From Windows Explorer select the files you want to copy to Ektron CMS400 NET 7 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the files to the desired Ektron Explorer folder in the left frame m LL CJL Wie a LTS Los i es eee z a on i j ar hee cs x E a P Search r Favorites 1 O Back Q Ip F Jc l tg P 7 E 7 m 2 http localhostiCMS400Examplesintranetbasi 0 Links g gt Pe E pocumentetand setting lor et ame Acme Services Inc E Folders x Name grae Desktop a Oasi nE E My Documents Doc 5 Content EEPL AS ae E My Music a eee 5 s a G ral m EMS Calendar G E g m PO My PSP Files CMS Form Example Corporate mi My Videos Hl dete Press Feleases l E Ekt Purchase Ord O Visual Studio Pre j AE Latest News E a My Computer Elewe O Books 5
165. 00 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 608 Working with HTML eWebEditPro XML creates pages for display on the World Wide Web or an intranet These pages use HTML hypertext markup language to format text and images for display in a browser You do not need to know HTML to use eWebEditPro XML However if you Know HTML you can view insert or edit your Web page s HTML code This section explains e Viewing and Editing HTML on page 609 e Inserting Source on page 610 e Cleaning Source Code on page 611 e Inserting Content from MS Office on page 612 Viewing and Editing HTML When you choose to view your page as HTML the editor cleans the content using a method determined by your Webmaster For more information see Cleaning HTML in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide To view your page s HTML follow these steps 1 Click the View as HTML button e or right click the mouse and click View as HTML from the menu IEBIECL ll Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML wv View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Di k re Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 609 Working with HTML 2 The HTML code appears While viewing the code you can edit it using editor functions such as Cut Copy Paste and Replace To select all content press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt You can also set default values for the style size and color in which the HTML appear
166. 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 466 Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the buttons and drop down lists on the toolbar The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below LY BE BGA Boa Se ARANGE KL Bi Apply Style Normal BZ UAA p5 nbp TM j js EHC e The buttons let you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables ikl I II ut gi u gi Ii i hli All buttons may not appear Your Webmaster determines which buttons appear on your toolbar Also you can customize your toolbar so that it contains only the buttons you use See Customizing Your Toolbar on page 480 This section explains e Selecting Text on page 467 e Applying Formatting Attributes to Text on page 468 e Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 468 Selecting Text You select text before performing an action on it such as copying it e To select all information on a page press Ctrl A e To select a portion of the information on a page you have two choices Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the data you want to select Hold down the Shift key and the right arrow key E until the desired data is selected Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 467 Toolbar Buttons e To select a single word place the cursor on the word and double
167. 327 NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 5 Edit the information 6 Click Save lal 7 The Task Type information is changed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 329 Managing Tasks Creating a Task from the Web Site To create a task from a Web page follow these steps Sign in Browse to the content for which you want to assign a task Right click the mouse to display a menu 4 Click the Add Task button 4 IMPORTANT The Add Task button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 5 The Add Task screen appears The content you were viewing is assigned to the task 6 Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 319 The only differences are e the content s ID number and title appear on the screen e the language of the content is the default language Creating a Task via the Content Folder The above section describes assigning tasks from the Tasks folder Yo
168. 4 lt math gt lt mi gt x lt mi gt lt mo gt lt mo gt lt mn gt 4 lt mn gt lt math gt Moving the Cursor The Math Expression Editor tries to make cursor movement as natural and as intuitive as possible In general the left right up and down arrows move the cursor to the next valid insertion point in the corresponding direction Similarly clicking the mouse anywhere in an equation moves the cursor to the closest valid location to the click Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 632 Working with the Math Expression Editor Behind the scenes the editor is negotiating a complicated nested structure of MathML templates Moving the cursor to the right on the screen can involve jumping in and out of MathML structures behind the scenes The cursor may occasionally not move exactly as you would expect on account of the nesting of the MathML structure In these cases the cursor movement is giving you additional information about the structure of your equation To help you follow where the cursor is in the MathML structure of the equation Math Expression editor gives two visual cues The cursor position is represented by a blinking red vertical bar However note that there is a faint gray rectangle as well This gray rectangle is outlining the equation template containing the cursor location and is the first cue about the MathML structure near the cursor To illustrate consider stepping through t
169. 4 Click the image icon 84 The library window opens Navigate to the folder that contains the image you want to use Click the Insert button to insert it Using Image to Replace Title Text Alternatively you can have the image replace the menu text so that only the image appears to indicate the kind of information on the menu To do this check the Use image instead of a title checkbox Image Link i Use image instead of a title INESE TEMS are NOL required CMS400Example Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 426 Working with Menus e nics URL Link After you create a menu your developer links it to text or an image on a Web page by modifying a page template When a site visitor reading that Web page moves the cursor over the text or image the menu appears In the illustration below the menu appears when the site visitor moves the cursor over Products Product Support Hews Careers You can also assign a URL link to a menu using this field If you do and the user clicks the link text or image he jumps to the specified page For example in this field you assign the product landing page cms400demo products aspx In the illustration above if the user moves the cursor over Products the assigned menu appears However if the user clicks Products as indicated by the hand he jumps to cms400demo products aspx Entering the Path to the Land
170. 4 Blur Standard Toolbar Button amp Description Blurs or softens an image You can select a level of blur from O through 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 528 Dialog Box Brightness Editing Images If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Standard Toolbar Button Description NOTE Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Increases or decreases an image s brightness You can select a brightness level from 32 brightest through 32 darkest If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area You cannot adjust brightness if the image s bit depth is 8 or fewer See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 553 529 Editing Images w Brightness JOf Brightness Choose Color Standard Toolbar Button pes Description Lets you choose the color of an annotation before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 530 Choose Font Color Ei ES Basic colors al See nel ee DE f imi i ie oe ff ioe ff I m Custom colors iLL aS a a HEBER Define Custom Colors gt Cancel Standard Toolbar Button Description Dialog Box Ektron CMS40
171. 400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 445 Working with Menus 3 A menu is displayed For information on how to display a menu on a Web page refer to the section on menus in the Developers Manual and the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual sections e Menu Feature gt Permission to Use the Menus Feature e Menu Feature gt Implementation of the Menus Feature Reordering Menu Items To rearrange the items on a menu follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Menu screen for the menu that you want to rearrange See Viewing a Menu on page 443 Move the cursor over the menu and click Reorder The Reorder Items screen appears Reorder Items Contact Information Contact Form Site Map Deweloper Click the item you want to move 5 Click the up arrow to move it up or the down arrow to move it down 6 When finished click Save I Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 446 Working with Menus Deleting a Menu Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can delete a menu via e its content folder e menus module You cannot delete a menu from the navigation link on a Web page Deleting a Menu via Content Folder To delete a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 443 2 Move the cursor over the menu and click Delete NOTE When mov
172. 420 Collections Lets user view and work with Collection Working with Collections on page 401 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 36 For more information see Archived Lets user view and work with Archived Setting Archive Options on page 64 Content content That is content that passed its scheduled End Date and whose archive option is either Archive and remove from site or Archive and remain on Site Delete Menu This menu lets you perform the following functions Delete this Delete current folder and all of its content Deleting Folders on page 55 folder Delete content Delete one some or all content items Deleting Content on page 53 within folder Action Menu This menu lets you perform the following functions Export for Prepare content for translation by a Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator translation translation agency Manual section Multi Language Support gt Using the Language Export Feature Search through content in the Workarea Adding Subfolders on page 55 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 37 Viewing Content You can view all content in your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Viewing content allows you to see the content metadata summaries and other information To view content in Ektron CMS400 NET follow these instructions Viewing Content from a Web Page To view content from a Web page f
173. 453 and Accessing Online Help on page 458 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders appear in the lower left corner of the Smart Desktop Use them to access all other folders To open any top level folder click it When you do it appears in the frame above Typically you would a click top level folder to see its subfolders then click a subfolder to see its content The following graphic illustrates the location of Ektron CMS400 NET s major features from the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 23 Ektron CMS Workarea Site Map p Smart Desktop 6 Tasks 45 Reports content reports content folders a Library Modules Settings library folders Modules 16 Collections Settings H Menus 76 ssers HE Calendar 76 User Groups s5 Memberships Roles 3 Import XLIFF Files 1 Help 26 Site Analytics ED Ektron Explorer 44 Configuration 44 Business Rules From the Smart Desktop you can also e Modify the Display of Top Level Folders on page 24 e Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea on page 26 Modify the Display of Top Level Folders The display of top level folders can appear in two formats A full button with an icon and text B Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 24 An icon on the bottom of the left frame The full display is easi
174. 56 1033 5 About Us About Us Index logqin asps7id 276 296 1033 3 Blogs Home loqin asps7id 33 54 1033 G Conditions Privacy logqin asps7d 268 268 1033 3 Contact Infor Products products aspx id 76 QF 1033 a ektron Medice Products 4 Mm CQ Services gt Therapies Select Metadata O Developer J q EER E EI A EE E EAEI EAA 3 A R ra RE AAA E A AEA ASEA CA AAS ASAA MASAA a E AAS EAA EE EE OSAA OE AA AENA E Discussion Boarc mie Lira C HTML multimedia test G Openoffice co POF Use this screen to identify the related content To do this Select a folder from the left frame Double click the related content item from the top right frame The item appears in the lower right frame When all items are in the lower right frame click the Save button bel directly below Select Metadata e lf default metadata is defined for a specific data type you can click the Default button at the bottom of each field to restore it e Below each field is a Characters Left field which counts the number of metadata characters You cannot exceed the maximum 500 characters 5 Click the Save button 1 6 The View Content screen reappears The content is now in a checked out state to you For the changes to take effect on the Web site check in the content and submit it to the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 78 Adding or Editing Metadata See Also Approving Declining Co
175. 63 8 Click Save M Editing a Blog Roll To edit a blog roll link follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To add a blog category from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 362 Blogs click Properties Click View gt Folder Properties Click the Edit Properties button L Click the Blog Roll tab Find the Blog Roll Link for which the information needs to be edited 6 Edit the information 7 Click Save M oe Te NOTE As with adding a blog roll link you can edit multiple blog roll links before clicking Save Removing a Blog Roll Link There are two ways to remove blog roll links e Remove the last link that was added e Remove any link in the list individually The steps to perform each task are documented below Removing the Last Blog Roll Link Using this method to remove the last blog link on the page 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To add a blog category from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 363 Blogs 4 Click the Blog Roll tab 5 Click Remove Last Roll Link Edit Prop
176. 99 Using Bookmarks 1 Select the bookmark text or image Click the Bookmark button Mig 3 The Bookmark dialog box appears Enter the name of the bookmark The bookmark can include the following non alphabetic characters amp 949 _ Bookmark Bookmark name October_2000_minutes Add elete Rename 4 Click Add 5 The editor screen returns The bookmark does not appear on the page Select the source text or image Click the Hyperlink button jg 7 The Hyperlink dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field and click the bookmark you created in Step 3 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 600 Using Bookmarks mo z selectii OO OoOO O select link this pagel October 2000_rminutes this pagel Top 9 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 602 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 10 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 601 Using Bookmarks Changing the Destination Window While defining hypertext you can use the Target Frame field on the Hyperlink dialog box to change the window in which the destination page appears Hyperlink Information 0 Tee Http i Cat Link ipa S
177. Adding Content If you have permission to add content to a folder you can create content for that folder The following flowchart illustrates a typical sequence of events when working with content Check In Edit Approval Chain Publish to Web site After you create content you or your system administrator must make it available on the site For example you can add a hyperlink to it from another page or place it in a collection or menu Your administrator can add it to a list summary or content list HHH To add content follow these steps 1 Browse to the folder where you want to create the new content 2 Select a language from the language dropdown list Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 45 of Folder Content Ho oy Aw i T rd beh E m Te Dd by 0 3 14 2006 9 3 27 2006 9 sample F HTML Content E HTML ForrnSurvey ra Office Documents 5 Managed Files Multimedia i Open Office Slanguage E Menus re E Collections English U S spanish Traditional Sort 3 Select a content type from the New menu View Contents of Folder Content Alos 1E Na JE ioe T UPT en a i T i ey el be j r We ui LP WW I F a il Hie amp Eal Nh po YS tan Lt I _ i pa as _ a E qe ID Folder f 4E Blog ef Discussion Board 4 4E HTML FormS urey Office Documents ia Man
178. Although most jumps go to the top of another Web page you can also jump to a bookmark within a Web page This section explains e Creating a Hyperlink on page 603 e Testing a Hyperlink on page 606 e Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 606 e Editing a Hyperlink on page 607 e Removing a Hyperlink on page 608 e Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink on page 608 Creating a Hyperlink When creating a hyperlink you must specify a e source the text or image the user clicks to move to the destination e destination the Web page to which the display moves when the user clicks the source Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 603 Using Hyperlinks To continue with the above example Ektron Web Site is the source and the Web page available at www extron com IS the destination To create a hyperlink click the Hyperlink button iB When you do the Hyperlink dialog box appears From there you can select from a list of Web pages also known as Quicklinks Or if the page you are jumping to is not on the list enter the URL address of the destination Web page Each choice is described below Using a Quicklink Your Web master can add to the Hyperlink dialog box any number of Quicklinks that is Web addresses that you can link to simply by selecting an item from a drop down menu Quick Link select link M Ektron Home Fage Ektron Technical Sup
179. Attributes Text Attributes Font Style OB atang Bold fonds Mincha SIZE mP ingLill fi 2 fos iS un Arnal Old Sample AaBbYyZz M Underline T Strikeout Cancel The following table lists functions you can perform with this dialog strikeout for example sample Font Attributes Strikethrough font color Color Attributes Primary Color if text wraps when it reaches the Text Attributes Wrap end of aline Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 550 Editing Images Twain Acquire Standard Toolbar Button T Description Perform a single page scan from a previously selected source See Also Twain Source on page 551 Importing Scanned Images WeblmageFX lets you acquire images from a scanner or digital camera that supports the Twain standard You select the source using Twain Source and do a quick acquire from that source using Twain Acquire Limitations e You can only acquire one page at a time e Few digital cameras support twain Usually digital cameras resemble a hard drive or use proprietary software to extract images Ektron does not support an interface to proprietary software e Not all scanners support the twain standard Twain Source Standard Toolbar Button aie Description Lest you select a source for acquiring an image such as a scanner or digital camera See Also Twain Acquire on page 551 Ektron C
180. C Redstar New Content Block Contact Ektron iio 15 URL Link CMS300Sample index asp id CMS300S5ample index asp7id CMS300Sample index asp id d d CMS300S5ample index asp id CMS300Sample index asp id CMS300Sample index asp l 1 CMS300Sample index asp id 15 To toggle between a default template and Quicklinks follow these steps 1 Access the Edit Collection screen for the collection you want to edit 2 Modify the Template field 3 Click the Save fa button Assigning Content to the Collection After a collection is created your next step is to assign content to it To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 410 Working with Collections NOTE When viewing a Collection on the Web site the last published version of content appears If the content has never been published nothing appears 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 403 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 405 3 Click the collection to which you want to assign content View Collections in Folder Content Title ID Date Modified New Collection 21 8 17 2005 10 25 28 AM The View Collection screen appears Accept or change the language view Collection
181. CING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT S TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN EKTRON AND YOU THIS AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES Copyright 1999 2006 Ektron Inc All rights reserved LA10031 Revision 1 7 Trademarks All terms in this manual that are known to be trademarks have been capitalized Ektron Inc cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this manual does not affect the validity of any trademark The following trademarks might appear in Ektron manuals Active Directory ActiveX Authenticode BackOffice Clear Type Developer Studio FrontPage IntelliSense JScript Microsoft MS DOS SharePoint Visual C Visual C Visual InterDev Visual J Visual J Visual Studio Visual Web Developer TM Win32 Win32s Windows Windows NT Windows Server TM Windows Server System TM Netscape Netscape Navigator Mozilla TM Firefox TM Securing Ektron CMS400 NET security Checklist The following is a checklist of things an Administrator must do to secure Ektron CMS400 NET O Change Admin user password O Change builtin user password IMPORTANT If you changed the builtin user password during the site setup you do not need to change it again See Editing Builtin on page
182. Conte size assets only DMS rank assets center column lower middle 9 26 2005 6 19 PM Cent only CMS to Unveil New Product 8 17 2005 3 48 PM Storie language status Compose Email 12 1 2005 5 44 PM Conte Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 114 Searching the Workarea Information on the Search Results Screen The following column headers describe the information displayed for all content items that satisfy the search criteria Column Description Header Content Title The title of the content item Last Edit Date The most recent date on which content was edited If it was never edited its creation date Folder name The folder that contains the content Size The size of the content item in kilobytes DMS Rank An indication of how well a content item page matches the search criteria using a range of 0 to 1000 The higher the rank the more relevant content is to the search criteria Language The locale id value of the content s language For a reference list of these values see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Appendix A List of Supported Languages A one character abbreviation of the content item s status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 Status Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 115 Content Workflow Reports Content Workflow Reports The Reports folder contains various
183. Default If you want this field to be checked when the screen first value appears click True Otherwise click False Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Inserting a Hidden Text Field When the form is submitted this field can pass information that the site visitor doesn t need to know about such as a tracking number This is typically data to be stored in the database and or emailed along with the rest of the data To insert a hidden text field follow these steps Place a hidden text field fab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 154 The following dialog appears N Hidden text field Descriptive Mame Field 1 Field Hame Field Tool Tip Test Field 1 Value ome Fields on the Hidden Text Field Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 161 Working with HTML Forms ree p Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 184 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor
184. Document on page 228 e The Work Offline Option on page 230 e Editing an Office Document on page 230 Notes on Working with Microsoft Office Documents e If you have an Excel spreadsheet open outside DM then you open one within it and navigate to another template page on your Web site then return to the spreadsheet outside DM a new open worksheet appears Close it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 215 Using the Document Management Functionality e lf you are working with an Excel spreadsheet the File and Open toolbar buttons within Excel appear active that is not grayed out but are not operable Ea Microsoft Excel Eile Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window e lf you access an Office document on a Web page you must close that instance of the browser before proceeding to another Web page If you do not close the browser and continue to add or edit documents the original document continues to use up your computer s resources e You cannot import an Excel file that contains macros or JavaScript Creating a New Microsoft Office Document from the Workarea To create a new Office document from the Workarea follow these steps Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET From the Workarea select the Content tab Select the folder in which you want to place the document See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 31 4 The default language appears next to the screen tit
185. ET 2 0 Revision 3 81 Approving Declining Content Approval Chain Publish to Web site You can approve and decline all content that has been submitted to you from the approval folder Edit When creating or modifying content you can select a go live date and time If you do and the content makes it through the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET publishes the content to the live site at that time See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 While an updated version of content is in the approval process the current version remains on the site Also if you set content to go live on a future date the current version remains on the site until then The following topics guide you through the approval or decline of this content e Approve Decline One Content Item on page 83 e Approve Decline Several Content Items on page 85 e Example of an Approval Chain on page 85 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 82 Approving Declining Content Approve Decline One Content Item 1 Click the Smart Desktop button circled in red below Pao Rael 2 Click Reports 3 Click Approvals 4 Click the content you want to approve or decline I WoOntact EKtron vel Put Put C RC International Announces the RC Cheetah Del m Blea nart arnt D s To select all displayed content click Select All at the top of the screen aca All Clear All Title M Contact
186. Ektron CMS400 NET are USING Administrator Manual section Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer Refresh Redisplay both sides of the Explorer screen You usually do this to see the results of a change New Workspace Lets you organize CMS content in a way that s Using Workspace Folders on meaningful to you regardless of its organization page 278 within Ektron CMS400 NET Options Lets you determine certain aspects of Ektron The Options Dialog on Explorer behavior page 269 Properties Displays information about Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET Especially useful to a system administrator Administrator manual section Ektron Explorer gt Viewing Administrative Information General Diagnostic Ss Ektron Explorer Properties version 3 0 0 16 contig LMS400 location http 192 168 0 146 cme40 demo Username explorer The Diagnostic tab displays important information such as the server name application path client and server versions etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 268 Using Ektron Explorer The Options Dialog The Options dialog lets you determine certain aspects of Ektron Explorer behavior They are explained in the table below General Ektron Explorer Options Folder ption Display Favorites Folder Display Recently Viewed Folder Size of Recently Wiewed Folder per CMS Content Opti
187. Ektron CMS400 NET users can add Blog Posts on page 369 blog posts either from the Workarea or the Web site Depending on the user s permissions the post is either published immediately or submitted to the blog s approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 346 Blogs pm mn e Phase 4 The blog post is published Now site Blog Comments on visitors can view it and possibly add page 377 comments Depending on the blog s comment settings they either appear immediately or must be approved first The following sections explain using the blog feature in the Workarea e Adding a Blog on page 347 e Blog Properties on page 349 e Blog Categories on page 353 e The Blog Roll on page 358 e Language Support on page 368 e Searching Blogs on page 369 e Deleting a Blog on page 368 e Blog Posts on page 369 e Blog Comments on page 377 Adding a Blog NOTE To be able to create a blog you must have permission to Add Folders on the blog s Advanced Permissions screen To add a blog follow these steps 1 Go to the Workarea s Content folder 2 Click the folder in which the blog will reside 3 Click New gt Blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 347 Blogs 4 The Add a Blog screen appears Add a Blog to folder Purchase Orders Li lt Properties Categories Blog Roll Blogwa
188. FX command 535 delete cell toolbar button 477 delete column toolbar button 477 delete row toolbar button 477 deleting cell 583 folders 55 table 556 Detect All field eWebDiff 96 difference content view toolbar button 5 dimensions WeblmageFX command 535 display borders toolbar button 478 Do not apply XSLT button 57 document creating document management feature 234 importing into DMS 228 Office creating document man agement feature 216 document management feature adding documents to collections 241 adding documents to menus 241 approving file 241 checking in document 220 creating managed file 234 creating Office document 216 deleting document 241 document types 211 drag and drop files 237 exit without saving changes 220 file types 211 importing document 228 installing on client 16 introduction 210 managed files 213 234 Office document properties editing 218 Office document editing 230 Office documents 212 overview 210 reports 241 reports of document by status 241 saving recent changes 220 saving to local computer 220 security 214 submitting for publication 220 viewing documents in CMS 240 work offline 220 230 workflow 240 documentation online accessing 458 drag and drop files document management feature 237 using explorer 271 E edit button floating toolbar 5 editing content block overview 8 content toolbar button 57 HTML 610 Ektron Explorer workspace definition 276 Ektron Explorer w
189. Field Text Field Description User s response is either checked or unchecked Information a site visitor doesn t need to know about Free text field user cannot format text A password field Same as Text Field except field scrolls vertically to accept more text Several choices appear on screen User checks any number of appropriate boxes Same as Choices except options appear in a drop down box and site visitor can only select one choice Lets user insert a date by clicking a calendar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 For more information see Inserting a Checkbox Field on page 159 Inserting a Hidden Text Field on page 161 Inserting a Text Field on page 162 Inserting a Password Field on page 166 Inserting a Text Area Field on page 169 Inserting a Choices Field on page 171 Inserting a Select List Field on page 1 5 Inserting a Calendar Field on page 1 9 156 Working with HTML Forms After you complete the form you have the following options Postback Message See Composing the Postback Message on page 146 Metadata Edit the metadata for the content See Also Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 Assign start or end dates or both for when content is published to Web site See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 Enter history comment to indicate changes made to content Web Al
190. Finding Content Much of your work involves editing existing content or creating new content Ektron CMS400 NET provides three methods for finding content to be updated You can use whichever method is easiest e Navigate through your Web site to the content you want to edit e Find the content through the Workarea which resembles Windows Explorer and helps you find content by navigating through a folder tree See A so gt The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 15 e Use the Search button A which appears on many screens When clicked a screen prompts you to enter keywords and then finds content containing the keywords The Editing Process After you find content click the Edit button 4 to open it in an editor Below is an example of content within the editor Edit Content in Folder Content Wo bhk a x i Pet ee Poked ee eaa a i Mere EDIEN GE EIEE eT os STS See ee Se re e LE ee EELEE LEELEE CEC Title Sample Content Black English U 5 3 Content Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates BB BAAN amp Oa YS amp Eee E Bi pply Style Moral BFiunvA aA p5 T nbp mMEj H J III Thal gi Tall gi WW I hll Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls Developer productivity is a critical issue among Web teams Faced with the challenge reduced IT budgets smaller teams and compressed schedules to roll out new Internet Intranet sites and rich Web applications developers
191. If the cell spans two or more rows If the cell spans two or more columns The minimum cell width Whether text moves down to the next line when it reaches the specified width of a cell The alignment of data across a cell The alignment of data up and down within a cell The cell s background color if you want it to be different from the table s background color A background image for the cell Apply the table border color to this cell border Apply a color other than the table border color to this cell border The Table Context Sensitive Menu The following menu appears when you right click the mouse while the cursor is in a table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus For more information see Spanning Rows or Columns on page 589 Spanning Rows or Columns on page 589 Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 581 Word Wrap on page 596 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 591 Setting Vertical Alignment on page 593 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 585 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 587 Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 584 563 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus UT aan ej ay Hasie vege Wells All items on this menu are described in The Context Sensitive Menu on page 489 except Tables which is described in T
192. Insert Format Tools Slide Show Help femmine aaue Oe Slay see0 o ems 1 Bob s powerpoint project ei io hi m Common Tasks Bob s powerpoint project md 1 You can insert summary metadata schedule comment and task information for the Office document From the View Content screen you can use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions such as view history submit for publishing and delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 212 Using the Document Management Functionality For more information see Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 214 and Working with Open Office Files on page 231 Managed Files Ektron CMS400 NET can track and manage any non Office type of file that runs on your computer for example PDF gif and zip When editing these file types the host application appears ina separate window The Ektron CMS400 NET View Content screen remains in the background Edit Content a bi ei ee a EATEN AENEAN Title Machine serer license English U 5 3 Content Web Alerts Sj machine server license txt Notepad File Edit Format Help The server license 15 Intended for use on a single server with unlimited web sites All sites must run from a single webseryer system CAAA AAA AA AY SERWER LICENSE INSTRUCTIONS CAAA AAA AA AAA AAA A 1 Run the cMs400severLicense exe utility which was delivered with this 2
193. Legally Separat Evangelical Chr African A4merica High School GE Some College Female 31 40 Master s Degre 70 000 79 9 100 000 14 Married Protestant Chri Displays the results of the form in an XML format The following information is included e lt Title gt the title of the form block IMPORTANT With polls you can create a new poll question to replace an existing poll question By default the poll still has the same Title ID and other properties You can change the title of a new poll question when you are editing the poll Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 189 Working with HTML Forms e lt Description gt the description of the form e lt SubmittedData gt the information that has been submitted Sample of Submitted Data as XML lt Form gt lt Title gt Where did you hear about Ektron Medical lt Title gt lt Description gt Poll for finding out where visitor s heard about our site lt Description gt lt SubmittedData gt Date value 2006 05 16T17 25 35 gt 5 16 2006 5 25 35 PM lt Date gt lt User id 1 member false gt lt Name gt lt FirstName gt Application lt FirstName gt lt LastName gt Administrator lt LastName gt lt Name gt lt Username gt admin lt Username gt lt Email gt lt Email gt lt User gt form data id 2350 gt lt ektpol111147612046505 gt Navigation 2 lt ektpol11147812046505 gt lt Data gt lt Sub
194. MS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 551 Editing Images Undo Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses the most recent commands within the current editing session You can undo several commands at once by pressing the undo command repeatedly The first time you press the command the most recently completed command is undone The next time the second most recently completed command is undone etc See Also Redo on page 545 Vertical Flip Standard Toolbar Button tw Description Flips an image vertically top to bottom Click this command again to reverse the image vertically bottom to top A Image before vertical flip Image after vertical flip Zoom In Standard Toolbar Button EL Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 552 Editing Images Description Increases an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to increase magnification See Also Zoom Out on page 553 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 545 Zoom Out Ey Standard Toolbar Button Decrease an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to decrease magnification See Also Zoom In on page 552 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 545 specifying Color Depth To specify an image s color depth that is the number of colors available to an image specify a bit depth The color depth is derived from th
195. Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 383 Blogs Add Comment TF a Comment Display John Wiliams Name Email jwilliarnsiexample corm URL http ff Post 370 What is Guillain Barre Syndrome GBS state Approved s Fending Comment For a description of the fields on this screen see gt The Comment Form on page 381 Note that Add Comment screen provides an additional field State This field lets the submitting user set the comment s state to approved or pending Approved comments appear on the site immediately Pending comments must be approved before they appear To learn about the approval process for pending comments see Moderate Comments on page 379 Editing a Comment Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 384 Blogs From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post whose comment you want to edit 3 Locate the comment you want to edit 4 Click edit 5 The Edit Comment screen appears For a description of the fields on this screen see gt The Comment Form on page 381 Note that Edit Comment screen provides an additional field State This field lets the submitting user set the comment s state to approved or pending Approved comments appear on the site immediately Pending comments must be approved before they appear To learn about the approval process for pending comments see Moderate
196. Manual gt Content Reports gt Content Pending Start Date Report Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Refresh Reminder Report Expired Content Expired date has been reached CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Expired Content Report Content to Expire Will expire within specified number CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt of days Content Reports gt Content to Expire Report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 242 Using Ektron Explorer Using Ektron Explorer The Ektron Explorer lets you navigate through and view CMS content without signing in and using the Workarea You can also use a search screen to find and view CMS content So even if you have no knowledge of Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron Explorer provides a simple recognizable way to find and view content IMPORTANT Ektron Explorer only works with Internet Explorer Other browsers are not supported Depending on how your system administrator has set up the Explorer you may also be able to edit add and delete content The following is an example of the Ektron Explorer The left frame lets you navigate through Ektron CMS400 NET s folders The right frame shows the content in a selected folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 243 atent Management a BASS
197. New Image If you create an image in WebImageFX and then exit WebImageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML the system assigns the image a random name such as WIF50A jpg lf you want to assign a different name and or folder to the image use the Save as command See Also Save As on page 547 Toolbar Buttons and Menu Commands The following tables list each toolbar button and menu command They are followed by a more detailed description of each function Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 524 Editing Images File Menu Options Toolbar Command Button Brief Description For more information see Create New Creates a new image Create New on page 534 Open Selects an image to edit Open on page 540 Save Saves changes to an image Save on page 546 Saves the current image under a Save As on page 547 different name or format Save As Performs a single page scan Twain Acquire on Twain Acquire Before scanning you must select a page 551 source using the Twain Source command Allows the user to select a source for Twain Source on acquiring an image such as a page 551 scanner or digital camera Twain Source Exit Save changes and return to Exit on page 536 eWebEditPro XML Exit without save Ignore changes return to Exit without Save on eWebEditPro XML page 537 Edit Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For
198. O with dra Positian Objects ff for teME Test Direction C MS i nN ef a Miscellaneous denloym Form Elements Fktran CMSA MET ic a nawaorfol Mil cantant mz The optional toolbars are explained in these sections e Form Elements Toolbar on page 476 e Table Elements Toolbar on page 477 e Position Objects Options on page 475 e Text Direction Options on page 476 e Miscellaneous Toolbar on page 478 Nore _ The Data Designer feature also has a toolbar For information see Using the Data Designer on page 177 Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Ctrl X Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory also known as the clipboard If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 469 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Ctrl C Copy j l V E Paste Text Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on where it is page 493 If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain t
199. Refresh the login page Set smart desktop as the start location in the workarea This User currently belongs to these User Groups Everyone Task permissions Create Task Fedirect Task User Properties Automobiles Subscriptions Notification will send in language English U 5 4 Click the Edit button in the top left corner 5 The Edit User Information screen appears 6 The following table explains fields you can edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 454 Updating Your User Profile Field Description Password If desired enter a new password into this field If you change your password you do not need to log out then log back in However the next time you log in you must use the new password Confirm Pwd Confirm your new password by retyping it into this field User Language Select a language in which to view Ektron CMS400 NET Click the black down arrow on the right circled below to see a list of choices User Language English U3 English us a iY Disable E MaFrench stan Email Address Enter a new valid email address Notification email is sent to this address unless the Disable E mail Notification field is checked To understand how email notification operates within the content workflow see Example of an Approval Chain on page 85 Also this address identifies the user sending Instant email See Also Sending Instant Email on page 28 Forum
200. Removing Content from the Collection on page 414 Reorder Reorder items in a collection Reordering Collections List on page 415 Edit Edit collection information Editing Collection Information on page 416 Delete Delete a collection Deleting a Collection on page 416 Return to previous screen Creating a Collection Creating a collection involves two steps eo e Adding a Collection on page 408 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 407 Working with Collections e Assigning Content to the Collection on page 410 The following sections explain each step NOTE This section explains creating a collection in a site that does not support multiple languages If you want to create collections in several languages see Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 417 See Also Working with Collections on page 401 Adding a Collection To add a new collection follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder in which you want to create the collection 2 lf you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 417 3 Click New gt Collection NOTE If you access the collection via the Collections folder you cannot choose the collection s folder It is automatically placed in the Content folder 4 The Add Collection screen appea
201. Revision 3 127 Library Folder Field Deseripton Parent Folder File s parent folder Users need permissions to this folder to insert the file into content If the file can be displayed in your browser a preview of it appears at the bottom of the screen If it cannot display in the browser a link to preview it in its host application appears instead NOTE You may need to download some files before you can be view them for example mdb mp3 zip etc The following table describes the buttons on the View Library Item screen yx Edit the items title and description Editing a File on page 129 a Overwrite the library item Overwriting Files on page 129 Find content linked to the library item Library Link Searching on page 132 Delete library item See Deleting Library Items in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Cm Return to previous screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 128 Library Folder Editing a File You can edit the title filename and description of any file that was copied to the library To do so follow these steps 1 Access the View File screen as described in Viewing Files on page 127 Click the Edit button L The Edit File screen appears Edit Library Item in Folder Contenti files Tithe ID Filename ktron Partners and Customers 41 CMS400Exabnple uploadedFiles ektron partners custarr Description
202. S400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 559 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Table Properties Dialog Box The Insert Table dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a table s appearance Insert T able Size Rows E Columns Cancel ib 7 x Layout Borders 4 75 Use Default Color C Not Specified f Percent Pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Horizontal Alignment Cell Spacing Custom Background Background Color ff Unassigned Background Image From File The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 560 Field s Size Rows Columns Layout Width Layout Horizontal Alignment Background Color Background Image Borders Use Default Color Border Color Cell Padding Cell Spacing Lets you specify The number of rows and columns in the table Table width The table s alignment across the Web page The background color of the table A background image for the table Whether or not to use the default color gray for table borders If you do not use the default the color of the table border The size of the table border The space in pixels between the cell text and a cell s border The space in pixels between a cell and surrounding cells
203. SLT Removes XSLT applied to XML content viewed in the content history area Edits content or specific criteria in the Workarea Insert Library Item Inserts selected library item into content See Also Library Folder on page 117 Link Check Identifies content with a hyperlink to the current content You would typically use this feature to remove the links before deleting content If you do not remove the links they are inoperative after the content is deleted Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 57 Name Description Overwrite Replaces an image or file with a newer version See Also Overwriting Files on page 129 Previews item that was or will be added Publish Save and publish the content Removes items from folders and lists in the Workarea Reorder Changes the sequence of links in a collection See Also Working with Collections on page 401 Restore Restores previously published content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 99 Saves content that was modified Search Searches content and library folder screens See Also Searching the Library on page 121 Show Calendar Displays the calendar in the Workarea Submit Saves and submits content to next approver in the approval chain Update Changes are saved and content is updated View all calendar events for a selected day View Difference Opens the View Content Difference feature See Also Com
204. SS Bookmark r Test Same Window self Parent Window parent Quick Link select The possible values that you can enter into the Target Frame field are explained below If you want the destination page to appear Click this in the Target Frame field In a new browser window on top of the current New Window _blank browser In the same position within the browser window Same Window _self The new window replaces the current one Note this is the default If your page contains frames in the frame that Parent Window _parent contains the frame with the hyperlink If your page contains frames in the full display Browser Window _top area replacing the frames If your page contains frames in the frame with the Enter the name of the frame specified name Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 602 Using Hyperlinks Use hyperlinks to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another Web page The page can be within your network that is on an intranet or anywhere on the internet NOTE If you want to create jumps within a file see Using Bookmarks on page 599 For example if your Web page includes a jump to the Ektron Web site you would enter the text to indicate the jump for example Ektron Web Site then create a hyperlink to www extron com When users see Ektron Web Site in a different color they can click the text to jump to the site
205. Selected Choices This format totals for choice and select type fields the number of times each choice was selected Only choices that were selected at least once appear Sample Summary of Selected Choices Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 186 Working with HTML Forms General Demographic Survey Field Yalue Count Age range fo 95 26 30 31 40 Annual Income 30 000 39 999 40 000 49 999 70 000 79 999 Education Level High School GED Masters Degree Fathers Education Level High School GED Masters Degree Some College Gender Female Male Household Income 100 000 149 000 30 000 39 999 60 000 69 999 Marital Status Legally Separated Married Single Mothers Education Level High School GED Masters Degree Face African American eiel eM re rele re Pl RP mf RP oP re re RP Pf PO rererere re Native American White k Table of Values The table of values shows the following information for each completed form e a checkbox that lets you delete the response Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 187 Working with HTML Forms e an internal identification number of the response e the name of the user who submitted the form if he signed in to Ektron CMS400 NET beforehand If the user did not sign in anonymous appears e date response was submitted e descriptive name of each form field appears in the column header
206. Shield 8 The following window appears Click Next Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 248 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard _ xj Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Ektron Explorer The InstallShield Wizard will install Ektron Explorer on your computer To continue click Next Cancel 9 You are prompted to enter the location of Ektron CMS400 NET on your computer The default folder appears Press Next if that is correct or enter a different path then press Next Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 249 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard CHS Site Location netalls meld 10 You are prompted to select a setup type Choose Complete NOTE When you install Ektron Explorer you also install the Document Management toolbar See Creating a Microsoft Office Document from the Document Management Toolbar on page 220 If you do not want to install the Document Management toolbar click Custom then uncheck Ektron Explorer Office Plug in Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 250 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Select the setup type to install Please select a setup type All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space Select which program features you w
207. Sorting Tasks By Column On every View Tasks page you can sort the information by most columns Information can be sorted by the following Title Alphabetically by title of associated content By task state from first to last Priority By task priority High appears first followed by Normal then Low Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 335 Managing Tasks Due Date By due date beginning with dates closest to today Assigned To Alphabetically by user to whom the task is assigned Note Once set a task s assigned to user does not change throughout the life of the task Assigned By Alphabetically by user who assigned the task Last Added Comment Alphabetically by the most recently created task comment Create Date By date task was created beginning with dates closest to today emailing Tasks You can email the contents of any Task screen emailing tasks works the same as emailing reports See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Content Reports gt Common Report Topics gt emailing Reports Editing a lask You can change task information such as e Title e Assigned to e Language e Content e Priority e Task Category Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 336 Managing Tasks e Task Type e Status State e Due Date e Start Date e Description To edit a task perform the following steps 1 Access
208. Standard Toolbar Button Description Save changes to an image If required information is missing such as the image name you are prompted for this information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 546 Editing Images Dialog Box Save Image As Save Ir ADOBEAPP ima ge Gear Program Files BDE CH Inetpub CI PSFONTS CFUSION Install L System Volume Config Msi OnE dit_M anual Tech Pubs der Documents and Settings mspclnt Temp EktronD ey MSSOL Unzipped ewebeditpro biy Music y file drop Norton Systemworks 001 401 voroker framemaker test portutility WewletBuilderz eel 7 My Compute Dake ee File name JUntitledt Ps oa Save as type GIF Files gif Cancel A History My H NOTE The dialog box only appears the first time you save the image If you later want to save it to a different folder or under a different name or file type use the Save As command Save As Standard Toolbar Button j Description Save the current image under a different name or format For example you might save mypicture gif as mypicture jpg Your system administrator determines which file formats are available Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 547 Editing Images Dialog Box See Save on page 546 Select Standard Toolbar Button aie 3 dant Description Selects an area of an image You can then execute other commands on
209. User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 110 Searching the Workarea Additional Search Criteria The next section of the search screen lets you choose one or more customized search criteria Note that if you enter more than one criterion only content satisfying all criteria appears on the search results screen Fields that Apply to Content Forms and Assets Title The title of the content form or asset You can enter a partial word For example entering Part yields the following results e Multi Hospital Nurse Executive Participation e Ektron Partners and Customers You can also enter more than one word or phrase as long as they are in the correct sequence Note When searching the Title field for assets the title assigned within Ektron CMS400 NET is not considered Rather the document s title field is searched In the illustration below if you search for Home Budget your search would return the document But if you search for Spreadsheet no result will be Edit Content in Folder Root ow aay Ones a Sea hel ee Se ee ee ee ey ee ee ee ee CO eae Ee aie ana F SESINISIN NE i 3 ITY Ch See SSS es See ee EEEIEE Lib EFA hii itle i Content Summary Co SS General Summary Statistics Contents custom Tile Home Budget Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 111 Searching the Workarea The content or form s comments w
210. View Calendar SCreen scssseesessesseeeees 295 Viewing a Calendar sisssiccnnsncsnececesccssavcsinsnsensesansevcnassuusexcnnsasavesciie 300 Tips on Viewing a Calendar ccccccssseeescesseeeseeeeeesseeneees 302 Adding a Calendar Event ccccccssssessseeeeseeseeessseeesseeesseeennes 304 Viewing a Calendar Event ccccccsssssecesssessseeeseneesseeeseeesseees 311 Editing Calendar Events assnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 312 Deleting Calendar EVents cccccssssseecsssesseeeeseeeeseeeeseneenseeees 315 Managing TaskS cccccsscsscssecsssesseeeseessenseessnseeeeoneeeeees 317 Creating a Task via the Task Folder ccccsssssseeesessesseeeseees 318 Creating a Task from the Web Site cccsssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 330 Creating a Task via the Content Folder scccseesseeeeeeees 330 VENO a Ta EA 331 Editing a TaSkK aannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 336 Adding Comments to TaskKS ccccsssseessesseesseenseesecenseessoeees 337 STIG a TISK ras Ea 340 Viewing a Task s History cccccsssecseseseseseeenenersneneeenenseenenseens 341 Task Module Toolbar sarcsssvecsassncescsesisnecsenwecemecsaimesnsnesemxiaimeceenss 342 BIOO ee EE E AEE 343 Introduction svvsiviiisstiewiasecensetancvassasaueandnediatsaninuiirassaeaesiwaavesiansenansnans 343 ABa A Ol siten E 347 Blog FPO GTS S scrsssicnin EEA 349 Language SUPPONI cssc
211. WebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Down Remove Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox First item is Check here if the first item on the list is not a valid value but instead text that not a Valid prompts the user to respond to the field An example of such text for a list of Selection states would be Select a state If you check this box and the user selects the first value on the list most likely by default an error message appears when he tries to save the screen Customizing a Standard List You can customize any list of predefined choices For example you can change the calendar years so they begin in 1995 and run through 2020 To do this follow these steps Choose the standard list that you want to customize Change the value of the List field to Custom All of the predefined choices appear in the Item List box To e add new items use the Item Value and Text fields a e delete an existing list item select it and click Remove erearrange the list use the Move Up and Move Down buttons e edit a l
212. Working with Table CellS sccccccsssseeesseesseeseenseeseeesseeees 581 Specifying the Width of a Cell cssseecsessseeeeeeeeeeseeneees 581 Inserting a Cell Seen erence nner nrerts are rn Merton rne mr er ntyeerr rt 582 BIST aCe ie C eee eee meee EEEa 583 Setting a Cell s Border Color cscccssssseecsssseeseenseeeseeees 584 Specifying a Cell s Background Color cccccseseeseeeeseeeeees 585 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell csssseeseeeees 587 Spanning ROWS or ColuM cccscseeeseeeseeeeeesseeseenneessenees 589 Aligning Text Within a Cell ccccssssseeesssssseeesseeesseesseeeeneeees 591 Splitting tt I ses aaisaiaaemutuussiesaiovidanapeatimaaenasasihaneiesiadbiaadeehsabaawenas 594 Merging Two 1 Seseneeee eee 595 AOI a E 596 Setting Cell Padding and Spacind cccssseecssseeseeneeeennees 597 Using IBOOKIN AUICS sacsscassictsesaceriris ania 599 Using MY DGTUUKS siisastsaviseshsnssieicneseesnisxiseessaticidedinncidaseeensiaies 603 MORIN With MTME siroesirsectatagneedececanienntnessiecstueaueteudtiwmtunties 609 Section 508 COMPLiANce ccccssscesssseecsesseeseeseeseeseeseenees 613 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML csscceeees 613 Using eWebEditPro XML without a MOuSE ccsseeseeeees 614 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 vi Section 508 TaDle S wrccssccscccesdccceceiceeil
213. X nbsp TM Punctuation rules You can click the link to open the file Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content Use this procedure to insert an image into content that has not yet been copied to the library This procedure inserts the item into the library then into the content 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET Edit Content in Folder Press Releases b aax o e E ties Gonna Camedl Vira tas amp Apply Style Normal 2 10 pt A oy B TUA 45 2B BE M4 gene raana A 2 nbsp gi E Ee gs Ektron Announces Winner of All Stars Customer Competition 2 Click the library button i cea HEC Ht T pi Ii W HI Thal Tal Hh Il 3 The library opens 4 Navigate to the folder that will contain the file after you insert it 5 From the File types dropdown select the type of file you want to insert Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 135 Library Folder Click the Add Library button K 7 Anew screen appears Browse to the file you want to insert Or you can click the search button jt to search for a file to insert Enter a Description for the file lf metadata is required for the library item you must complete it Metadata fields may appear in the lower section of the screen 10 Click the Add Library button ER 11 The file is inserted into th
214. a associate a task assign Web Alerts etc You must have Edit permission for the blog to perform these functions WARNING You can also add a history comment to the blog post by clicking the Comment tab This is not the same as adding a comment to a blog post on a site When you add a history comment it has the same properties as a comment associated with content Adding a Blog Post NOTE Tobe able to add a blog post you must have Add permission onthe blogs Standard Permissions screen Follow these steps to add a blog post Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 373 Blogs 1 Inthe Workarea navigate to the blog folder Click New gt Post Or From the Web site right click the blog then choose New Post NOTE To add a blog post from the Web site you must be logged in 2 When the Add Content screen appears use the editor to create the blog post You create a blog post the same way you create content See Also Adding Content on page 45 IMPORTANT If you are using categories or tags they can be assigned to a blog post by clicking the Summary tab and choosing a category For more information on categories see Blog Categories on page 353 For more information on Tags see Tags on the Summary Page on page 375 Web Alerts Description Categories BB BEGA om y ow Gat 7 Oar Feb Apply Style Normal TimesNewRoma A C Music L Sports F A F H II HEH 1 Ta
215. a 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submutted content block on the Web site httow 192 168 0 156 CMS200Samplefndes asp 7id 17 Please Mote You must loan and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor EditorIn Chief Comment EJ EditorInChief logs in to Ektron CMS400 NET and accesses his Workarea The Workarea has an Approval folder with the content awaiting his approval EditorInChief navigates through the Approval folder until he finds the content Red Sox win World Series From this window EditorInChief can view information about the content including title go live date user who created it etc He then clicks the content he wants to approve This window is similar to the previous approver s but includes a Publish button at the top of the screen The EditorlnChief has a publish button instead of a submit button because he is the last Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 90 Approving Declining Content approver in the approval chain When he approves the content it is published to the Web site Like the Sports editor the EditorInChief has the following options eS Publish the content 1 Sends an email to the creator notifying him her Decline that content was declined 2 Removes content from the approval chain Invokes the editor The approver changes t
216. a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Due Date Using the calendar button choose the date by which the task needs to be completed The due date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by due date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 322 Managing Tasks SS Description Add additional information to describe the task The description appears on the View Task screen circled below view Task Task Title testing self assignment Assigned To a jedit Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Completed Due Date 23 Jun 2004 Start Date 11 Jun 2004 Description testing self assignment Comments Date Time added By Caomments 4 Click the Save button E If email notification is enabled an email is sent to the user user group to which the task was assigned Selecting Content for the Task When you click Select Content from
217. add content a calendar a collection a blog etc After you add the content type click Done Add Content Then within that content area click edit A new screen area appears Use that area to define the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 400 Working with Collections Web Site Navigation Aids Working with Collections A collection is a list of content links offered to the readers of a Web page In the following illustration the circled content is an example of a collection on a Web page RC International Home Products Support Mews Careers RO Sportster RG Cars RC Cheetah Product Name RC Che Description RC Internationals most entry in to the competit racing world is the RC C RC Cheetah is designed core RC enthusiast The RC Lilly RC Redstar You can also use a collection to display listings such as job postings press releases and knowledge base articles The following graphic illustrates a collection on the landing page of Ektron s Knowledge Base Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 401 Working with Collections Highlighted Knowledge Base Articles INFO Release notes for evWebEditPro ML v4 2 INFO Release notes for eWebEditPro 4 2 INFO eWWebEditPro 3 amp 4 JavaScript Object Model INFO eWWebEditPro error messages INFO Windows P Service Pack 2 This section explains how to create collections Your s
218. age 585 e Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 587 e Spanning Rows or Columns on page 589 e Aligning Text Within a Cell on page 591 e Splitting a Cell on page 594 e Merging Two Cells on page 595 e Word Wrap on page 596 e Setting Cell Padding and Spacing on page 597 HTML does not allow you to adjust the width of a cell s border You can also select several cells or a row of cells and change them as described above However you cannot select and change a column of cells Specifying the Width of a Cell As described in Specifying Table Width on page 567 there are several ways to set the width of a table Within a table you can also specify the width of an individual cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 581 Working with Table Cells When you set a cell width there is no guarantee that the cell will occupy that width when displayed in a browser This is because the cell is part of a column and changes to other cells in the column can affect the cell whose width you set Setting cell width only guarantees that the cell will not be ess than the width you specify lf you want to ensure that a cell s size does not change set all cells in a column to that width To specify a cell s width follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell whose width you want to set Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from
219. age 81 Export Raw Data Download form data to a Microsoft Exporting a Form s Raw Excel spreadsheet Data on page 190 View Reports View submitted form data can select Viewing Form Reports range of dates on page 184 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 200 Working with HTML Forms Button or Description More Information Tab rf View Content Access view properties for the Viewing and Editing a or Form Properties content Form s Properties on Properties page 192 View If you can view forms in more than language one language select a language from the drop down list Add Add Lets you copy current form into new Translating Content on select select language block and translate it to selected page 649 language language Creating Polls and Surveys Polls and surveys are a type of form All of the same functionality is available and applies WARNING For complete understanding of Forms Polls and Surveys you should read the entire Working with HTML Forms chapter Polls are generally one question and appear on a site for a very short time an hour or a day Surveys are usually multiple questions and appear on your site for a longer time than a poll NOTE For information on scheduling when your polls and surveys appear on the site see Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 With polls and surveys you can show ongoing results to the site visitors a
220. aged Files E Multimedia Collection TO Menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 See Also Types of Content on page 5 4 The Edit Content window opens 5 Create content in the editor using the following table Responding to the Fields on the Add Content Screen Description Enter a title for the content Add to Check if you want to create a Quicklink to this Quicklinks content If you do users can insert links to this Table content from within other Ektron CMS400 NET content items See Also A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet on page 118 Content Check this box if the content should be found when Searchable someone searches your Web site After you respond to the above fields the following buttons are available Buttons on the Add Content Screen pae rome beeen Al Submit Submit the content into the approval chain This action also returns the new or updated content to the database and exits the editor See Also Approving Declining Content on page 81 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 47 p Publish Publish the content to the Web site e Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button See Also Approving Declining Content on page 81 This action also
221. al Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 356 Blogs 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Categories tab 5 Click Remove next to the category to be removed Edit Properties for the folder GBNB Properties Metadata Categories Web Alerts Blog Roll Categories Add New Category Remove Last Category Remove Remove Remove 6 A dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Click OK if you want to remove the category You can continue to remove categories from the list by clicking the Remove link next to each category 8 Click Save M Web Alerts Web Alerts notify users when a blog post is published This feature is explained in the Administrator Manual Section Web Alert Feature gt Assigning Web Alert Information to Folders and Content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 357 Blogs Smart Forms Use a Smart Form when you want to create structured blogging Structured blogging provides a form for the blogger to fill out instead of free form writing For example you create a blog for book reviews You want to make sure that when someone submits a review he provides the following information e Book title e Author e Date of review e Review text For information on working with Smart Forms see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms
222. all files in a selected library folder enter nothing in this field Or to find all files in a selected library folder of a type for example images select the type and enter nothing in this field Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 122 Library Folder SS Filename Search If you check this box the search considers the file name when returning search results Otherwise the file name is not considered by the search For example if you enter ppt into the keyword field the search returns all files that include that string Such as all Powerpoint presentations Only search items The search only considers library assets that were last modified by last edited by myself you One or more of the search criteria set by your system administrator in the Metadata Definitions screen NOTE Some search field check boxes are circles while others are squares If the box is a circle you can only choose one option If it is a Square you can choose as many as you want The search then displays all library items that meet the search criteria on the search results screen You can click any item to view its properties such as Library ID number Last Edit Date and Description Displaying Search Results Search results appear in this order e images e files e hyperlinks e quicklinks e form links Result Display Options At the top of the library search screen a pull down list lets you choose the
223. althcare PJ D J Fone Index f lt im Done aJ Local intranet NOTE You cannot select another type of item If needed you can delete this content item and add a different type of item in its place Ww 7 Ifa Zone dropdown list appears in the Editor Zone you can use It to move the selected item to another zone Adding Content When you enter Add Content mode a new screen zone appears displaying content you can add to the page Your system administrator determines which content items appear To add content follow these steps 1 Goto the personalization Web page Your system administrator tells you how to find it In the sample database provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the page Is http localhost cms400demo mypage aspx 2 Click Personalize to enter personalization mode The screen refreshes If you have add permission Add Content appears below the Personalization Manager see below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 395 Personalizing a Web Page deliver indexed content via the vy Personalize Manager Reset To Default Done Personalization For Current User Public Users 4 An add content zone appears Your system administrator determines its location on the page Below is the add content zone on the sample page E Personalize Manager Done Add Content Reset To Default Personalization For Current User Public Users H
224. ame as using a PC The following functionality is different when using a Macintosh e creating and editing HTML forms is not supported e creating and editing XML Forms aka the Data Designer is not supported e working with Document Management content is not available Using the Integrated Macintosh Editor The Integrated Macintosh Editor IME plays the same role ona Macintosh that eWebEditPro plays on a PC that of a content editor While both editors have similar functionality some functions are accessed differently with the IME Ektron CMS400 NET clients only support the IME when used on an Apple Macintosh running the Safari browser Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 655 lf you use another browser such as Internet Explorer Firefox or Netscape Navigator a plain text box appears where the editor should be and you can add content as plain text or html code Below is an image of the Integrated Macintosh Editor in the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea Seals Workarea i Title SafariContentOl E English U S Content Edit View Insert Format Tools Table ee a baie Menu Items and Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the menu Items and toolbar buttons in the Integrated Macintosh Editor IME The menus are located above the rows of toolbars button across the top of the editor window illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2
225. an The Workarea and Smart perform all Ektron CMS400 NET Desktop on page 15 tasks NOTE Your administrator can set up your system to have borders always appear ona page In that case you don t need to click the mouse to make it appear For information on the classic user interface see the Administrators Manual gt Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET gt Getting Started gt Recognizing Content gt Returning to the Classic User Interface Types of Content Every piece of content in Ektron CMS400 NET is one of the following types The table below summarizes all types Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 5 HTML content Content designed to be published on the World Wide Web HTML Form Survey Online forms polls or surveys designed to collect information from site visitors Office Documents Files normally created and edited using Microsoft Office Managed Files Files created outside of Ektron CMS400 NET such as PDFs and jpeg files You cannot create or edit these files within Ektron CMS400 NET you can only store them Multimedia Files that run in a media player such as sound and movie files Open Office Files normally created and edited using Open Office For more information see For information on using Ektron CMS400 NET s editor see Introduction to eWebEditPro XML on page 461 Working with HTML Forms on page 141 Working wit
226. and the List Summary Fea UI o E E E E E E E E E 418 Working with Menus s assnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 420 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items ccecseesenseeeees 421 Access to the Menus Feature ccsssecsecsscsssessecnsceeneenseeees 422 Managing Menus icissiissscinsiiininnniunnnnn naaa 423 Ektron CMS400 NET System Management 453 Updating Your User Profil scccssesssseseeeeeeeseseees 453 TNE g eee een ieenrer care nR ect ecnc err et erent erent mere era cnet tree 458 Accessing Online Hel p cccssssecssesseeessesseeeeeseeeseesseeseeesnees 458 Accessing Online Manuals csscccesseeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeneees 460 Introduction to eWebEditPro XM L 461 Creating a Simple Web Page ssccessseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 463 Creating a Sample Web Page ccccssssseeeeseeesseeeeseneseeensenes 464 TOOIDar BUON S sea 467 Customizing Your Toolbar cccsssccssseecseseeeeeeeseenees 480 Removing Or Adding Menus ccccccsesseeeseesseeeeenseeseenseeeens 481 Removing or Adding Menu Items cccsesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 482 Restoring TOOIDATS eases ensusssnccerectereessraneeeeeenee areca 485 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 V Rearranging the Menus On a TooIbat cccsscccessesseeeeenneesees 485 Creating a New Menu cccccssssseeeseseeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeensees
227. and view important information about it The options change depending on the content s status and your permissions for the content For example one toolbar button lets you edit the content while another lets you view previous versions of it If granted permission by your administrator you can create new content and edit or delete existing ones Most of your work with Ektron CMS400 NET involves working with content Buttons on the Menu The following table describes each button that may appear Approve Approve or decline a request to Approving Declining Content publish or delete content on page 81 Add Task Assign a task to a user Managing Tasks on page 317 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Delete Open View Content page From it Viewing Content on page 38 you can delete the content mf Check out content for editing Editing Content on page 49 Logout Log out of Ektron CMS400 NET Logging Out of the Sample view of Web site Site on page 13 Preview content before it is published pe Open content s View Content page Viewing Content on page 38 View Display differences between a Comparing Versions of Content previous and published version of Content on page 92 Difference content Te View History Open View History screen where you Viewing and Restoring can view previous versions of content Previous Content on page 99 Workarea Opens Workarea From here you c
228. ant installed Recommended for advanced users InstallShield Back Cancel 11 The installation copies the needed files to the specified folder and displays a final screen Click Finish Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 251 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard e E InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successtully installed Ektron Explorer Click Finish to esit the wizard Back Eancel Displaying Ektron Explorer After you install Ektron Explorer you can use it from both Windows Explorer and Internet Explorer To make it available follow these steps 1 Open Windows Explorer or Internet Explorer 2 From the menu across the top of the screen select View gt Explorer Bar gt Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 252 Using Ektron Explorer Fie Edit view Favorites Tools Help H Folders e x lt Name w Status Bar m ar Auf Desktop Explorer Bar Search Ctrl E 5 My ai Favorites Ctrl I Hg ac Large Icons ads i Small Icons me ee History Ctrlt H be all Vis Lis Ektron Explorer ae My Con 8 Petal w Folders H 344 Thumbnails 7 Tip of the Da Loc Arrange Icons F P Y 3 The Ektron Explorer replaces Windows Explorer As you select a folder or conduct a search in the left frame the related content appears in the right frame Onc
229. any holidays e deadlines These are only a few uses of calendar events Calendars are versatile and can easily meet all of your needs A sample calendar appears below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 292 Working with Calendars Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Bal E a Ee 5 mE 6 Tal z Edel ALIM Trade ALM Trade ALM Trade show in show in show in Miami Miami Miami Ta 6 11 Ed S 12 E E 13 Ga S 14 Ed 6 Company meeting al 6 18 Fal Sl 19 Gal S 20 Ed S 21 Gal S The Calendar Feature is explained through the following topics e Understanding Calendars on page 294 e Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 295 e Viewing a Calendar on page 300 e Tips on Viewing a Calendar on page 302 e Adding a Calendar Event on page 304 e Understanding Event Types on page 308 e Viewing a Calendar Event on page 311 e Editing Calendar Events on page 312 e Deleting Calendar Events on page 315 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 293 Working with Calendars Understanding Calendars Before working with calendars you should understand the following points Ektron CMS400 NET supports several calendars at one time There might be a site wide calendar and other calendars for special interests such as an athletic events calendar Each date can display several events Only system administrators can create a calenda
230. arate each address with a semicolon Zip code US 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnnnn nnnn Zip code US required 5 nnnnn or 9 digits separated by a dash after the fifth nnNNn nnnn A response Is required Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 165 Working with HTML Forms Option Characteristics of Valid Response Social Security US Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn Nine digits in this pattern nnn nn nnnn A response is required Social Security US required Postal Code Canada ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric Postal Code Canada required Social Insurance Number Canada Social Insurance Number Canada Required Telephone number US and Canada Telephone number US and Canada required ana nan where a is an alphabetic character and n is numeric A response is required A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A nine digit number in the format nnnnnnnnn A response is required A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A seven or 10 digit number in the format nnnnnnn or nnnnnnnnnn The site visitor can insert separator characters such as dashes between numbers A response is required Inserting a Password Field Use a password field when you want the user
231. as table headers Summary If desired enter the table summary Non visual browsers can use the summary to explain the contents of the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 619 Section 508 Compliance Field Description O Caption If desired enter the table caption The caption appears centered below the table when viewed Horizontal If desired enter the caption s horizontal alignment Caption Alignment Gee e kjeft e right Vertical If desired enter the caption s vertical alignment Caption Alignment e bottom e top After you complete the Table Properties dialog click OK to make the table comply with Section 508 Setting Abbreviation and Category Attributes You can modify abbreviation ABBR and category AXIS attributes within a table To do so follow these steps On gt 4 Select one or more cells Right click the mouse Select Table gt Cell Properties Access the Cell Properties dialog The Cell Properties dialog includes fields that let you adjust the Abbreviation and Category Attribute field values see illustration below NOTE Your system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility fields from the Cell Properties dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 620 Section 508 Compliance Cell Properties x an ee E OF Rows Spanned Cancel Columns Spanned Borders
232. ase e You can now personalize certain Web pages See Personalizing a Web Page on page 387 e You can create and edit documents within any Microsoft Office application and save them directly to Ektron CMS400 NET from within Office without signing on to CMS See Creating a Microsoft Office Document from the Document Management Toolbar on page 220 e New Workspaces within Ektron Explorer let you arrange content according to your preferences regardless of their location within Ektron CMS400 NET See The Workspace on page 2 6 e The editor features a math expression editor See Working with the Math Expression Editor on page 654 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 i What s New in the 6 1 Release Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 ii Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Using Ektron CMS400 NET to manage Web content is easy once you know the basics of setting up and maintaining your site This documentation explains how to maintain an Ektron CMS400 NET site from a user s point of view By reading this documentation you will gain an understanding of how Ektron CMS400 NET works This section introduces basic concepts that you should understand when beginning to work with Ektron CMS400 NET through the following subtopics e What is a Content Block on page 1 e Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET on page 7 e Editing Content on page 8 e
233. at contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 437 Working with Menus Click C Add The Add Menu screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 432 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 434 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 434 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 435 Editing a Menu You can edit a menu via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page This section describes each option Editing a Menu via its Content Folder To edit a menu from a content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu Click View gt Menus 3 Click the menu you want to edit Move the cursor over the menu that you want to edit Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 438 Working with Menus 5 Click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus
234. ata Mail Database Task To unassigned Select User or Group 399 Jroperties ed id EOC To J to addresses in field E email address Note that the To and CC fields can accept fields whose validation type is email address or email address list On the other hand the From field can only accept fields whose validation type is email address that is a single email address To set this up follow these steps 1 Add a form field whose Validation type is Email address or Email address list The field prompts the user completing the form to enter his email address Label the field something like Enter your email address TIP If the field allows more than one address add on screen instructions to separate each address with a semicolon Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 195 Working with HTML Forms Plain Text Field Descriptive Name email address Field Name email_address Tool Tip Text emai address Default value Validation Please submit your emal address submit Survey Validation Email address list Error Message E mail address list Go to the Edit Form screen gt Mail Properties section 3 Move to the field labeled From At the dropdown list following OR to addresses in field select the field you created in Step 1 Now when a user completes the form the value he enters in the field created in Step 1 is used for the email
235. ated with the task Click the Tasks tab The page lists all tasks assigned to the content Select a task From the view task page you can add a comment to the task See Adding Comments to Tasks on page 337 for more information Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder To view a task from the Tasks folder follow these steps 1 2 From the Smart Desktop select the Tasks folder Click the task you want to view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 331 Managing Tasks 3 The View Task screen is displayed From here you can perform these tasks e Editing a Task on page 336 e Deleting a Task on page 340 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 337 See Also Task View Options on page 332 Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 335 Sorting Tasks By Column on page 335 Managing Tasks on page 317 emailing Tasks on page 336 Task View Options Beneath the main task module folder several view screens display all tasks filtered by specified categories After viewing tasks in any category most screens let you perform an action on the tasks the actions are included in the table below For example you can change a tasks state to another state To select all tasks ona screen click the check box in the header row illustrated below i a Title CID State Pron Prep to Move Downstairs On Hold Low All tasks assigned to you that are in one Click
236. ategory and Task Type appear in the drop down boxes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 326 Managing Tasks Task Type Availability Task types can be hidden from users by clicking the Not Available check box in the Add Task Type and Edit Task Type screens By making Task Types not available you can make the Task Type unavailable without deleting it Editing a Task Type From the Add Task screen you can edit a Task Type This will allow you to change the Task Type name Task Type description and Task Type availability To edit a task type follow these steps 1 Goto the Add Task screen as described in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 319 Choose a Task Category and the Task Type to edit Click Edit next to the Task Type dropdown box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 327 Managing Tasks Task Title Assigned To Language Content Priority Task Category State Start Date Description 4 The Edit Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 328 Managing Tasks Edit Task Type Task Type Task Type Description Documents that need to be reviewed Task Type Availability Not Available From this screen you can edit the following e Task Type e Task Type Description e Task Type Availability See Also Task Type Availability on page
237. athing muscles and face GBS is the most common cause of rapidly acquired paralysis in the United States today affecting to two people in every 100 000 Last Edited by Generated User on 6 2 2006 2 13 51 PM Status A B world Population to reach 6 5 Bilion Last Edited by Application Administrator on 3 13 2006 5 09 46 Status 4 Mo comments E gt Welcome to ektron Medical The View Posts in Blog screen shows the following information about each blog post See Also Blog Posts on page 369 Blogs on page 343 a a aa The headline of the post Usually what a site visitor scans through to find a post to read Comments Information The comments link shows the number in parentheses of comments for a post When this link is clicked the View Comments for Post screen appears If a red flag appears next to the comments icon they are awaiting approval Editor Information The person who created or last edited the blog post Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 372 Blogs SS Post Time and Date The date and time the blog post was created or last edited Status The status of the blog post For example if the blog post is checked in the status is I See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 View Posts in ne Life Story From this screen you can perform all functions with a blog post that you can with content You can give it a Summary add metadat
238. aved and submitted into the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content on page 81 Requested for deletion Approved but the Go Live date hasn t occurred yet Task s assigned to content are not complete Content was created with a future start date then checked in and deleted This status only remains until the start date is reached At that point the content is deleted Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 More Information Active Content on page 649 Checked Out Content on page 651 Checked In Content on page 650 Submitted Content on page 652 Marked for Deletion Content on page 653 Pending Start Date Content on page 654 648 Active Content lf content has a green border it is live on the Web site i CME200 i ig ontrolled from this eos ee eV ee ce divers lee civic ve te aes ce ke ved Sie Le When content is active you can perform the following actions on it depending on your permissions The content s status remains active until it is checked out and changes are made to it Button Description For more information see Edit Check out the content to Editing Content on change it page 49 Edit Summary Edit the brief summary used to Adding a Content describe the content Summary on page 67 Edit Metadata Change the content s metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 Delete S
239. ay April 06 2005 Start 12 00 AM Q a End 12 00 AM a if Display the times for the event Hyperlink Launch link in a new browser Event Type Svallable Selected Company Holiday gt Mo Event Types Trade Show Company Event a 5 Respond to the fields using the following table as a reference Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 305 Working with Calendars Field Description Event Title Enter a title for the event Note If you enter a Quicklink in the Hyperlink field the Quicklink s content title replaces this title You can then edit the new title if desired If desired enter a location for the event for example Conference Room 1 or Cafeteria Event Location One Time Recurring If you want to enter a one time only event continue reading If you want to add a recurring event see Adding a Recurring Event on page 308 Date Click the calendar icon 8 to display a calendar From it select a start date Technical note If you see a mix up of the month and date of your entry for example you select March 2 but see February 3 make sure the date format specified in the Windows Control Panel Regional Settings dialog matches your current language Also make sure the settings apply to the default user Start Time Click the clock icon to display a clock From it select a start time End Time l I E Click the clock icon S to display a clock Fr
240. b fr Click to activate and L Properties mage Properties Font Size 12 File Hame Font Color i Unassigned a Description Background Color if Unassigned Ok Later if you want to edit the expression select it right click the mouse and select Edit Math When you do the Math Expression editor reappears with the expression Edit as needed then press OK Accessibility and the Mathematical Expression Editor To get a white paper Making Mathematics Accessible on accessibility and MathML see hitp www dessci com en reference accessibility NOTE _ The rest of this chapter was copied from documentation provided for the Math Expression Editor by Design Science Inc http www dessci com en Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 630 Working with the Math Expression Editor Editor Overview The Math Expression editor is based on the idea of an equation template It includes templates for fractions subscripts superscripts matrices etc To build an equation insert templates and then fill in the blanks E Mathematical Expression T 3O eet g onic i a f lt gt Ec iy T Ala i yo OG 16 lt sin a lad gt E x lt gt ec VA a7 TAa ET y aw x O lim y A Fo m 0 0 an m fodo ig Odo us o Eao Mo Mao Properties V o Vo Vxo Image Properties Font Size i fry File Name Font Color d a Se eim 7 Description Background Co
241. bar following an identifier Math Expression editor inserts an Invisible Times character By doing so the a and the b each go into identifier tokens of their own with the Invisible Times operator token in between The a and the b remain in the customary italic typeface giving you a visual cue that you have encoded a multiplication Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 644 Working with the Math Expression Editor lf you press the space bar after anything other than an identifier Math Expression editor inserts a space character as usual Text Tokens vs Identifiers Ordinarily Math Expression editor assumes alphabetic characters are identifiers Sometimes however you may want to treat a run of alphabetic characters and spaces as text In particular if you are entering a bit of descriptive text in an equation you want the space bar to insert spaces not Invisible Times characters You can tell Math Expression editor to treat a run of characters as text by inserting a text template from the toolbar When you insert a text template the editor assumes subsequent alphabetic characters and spaces should be treated as text and won t break them into smaller tokens See Also Text Cursor on page 641 To switch out of a text token to an identifier token enter a number followed by the identifier Then delete the number Entering the number starts a number token and the following alp
242. bered assign this line 1 numbered assign a number one more than the line above Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 474 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Align paragraph so that it is arranged e evenly on the left side uneven on Left Center i the right Justify in the center of each line e evenly on the right side uneven on the left evenly on right and left side E About Display a dialog box that shows your eWebEditPro XML version of eWebEditPro XML and your license keys Position Objects Options These buttons let you absolutely position elements pictures tables etc anywhere on a page WARNING Some older browsers for example Netscape 4 do not display absolutely positioned elements Absolute position uses the style attribute If you use this feature the content is not compatible with all browsers z Position Lets you move selected table or image anywhere on the screen Locks selected table or image at its current screen position Nothing can move a locked object To move the object unlock it by clicking this button again i Lock Ty If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image in front of Move to Front the others nee If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image behind the Move to Back others If text overlays an image move the image in front of
243. brary Folder on page 117 Add Task Assign task to a user See Also Managing Tasks on page 317 Approvals View approval chain for folder or content See Also Approving Declining Content on page 81 Approve content that awaits your approval In the approvals folder approves all content awaiting your approval with one click Archived Content If current content is being displayed switch to display archived content If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content See Also Setting Archive Options on page 64 Return to previous screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 56 Button Name Description S Calendar Lets you choose when content will go live See Also Working with Calendars on page 292 Cancel Cancels action you are performing without saving the information Check in Saves and checks in content you are working on See Also Checked In Content on page 650 Check out Checks out content to edit prevents others from simultaneously working on it Checked Out Content on page 651 Collection Accesses the collection area for content lets you create edit and delete collections See Also Working with Collections on page 401 Declines an approval request submitted to you Deletes selected item Delete Content Deletes multiple content items at once x Delete Folder Deletes current content folder Do Not Apply X
244. can select the text click the library button select hyperlinks to find the Ektron hyperlink and apply that hyperlink to the text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 117 Library Folder Library Folder Content hyperlinks M A e ei hyperlinks Tithe ID Date modified Ektron Inc 23 05 Sep 2002 05 46 PM Once the page is published a person reading it can click the text to jump to the Web address www ektron com e A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content item on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet Whenever content is created if the Add to Quicklinks table box is checked a quicklink is created for it Edit Content in Folder Content De fe fl x 2 Pee Rata Bees Benes Paes TAA Pore es Pees Paces Pee es Paes Pees Pees Pea Pee Pe Title Jy Add to eles table Content Searchable Content Summary Metadata Schedule Comn R BR MA OY mw Bi Apple Style Normal verdana 7 e A formis a quicklink to HTML form content Whenever content is created a form link is automatically created for it Accessing The Library 1 Click the Workarea button Sworkarea or icon 2 Click the Library folder in the lower left corner of the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 118 Library Folder Library Folder Content images
245. character after the word Fixing Spelling Errors There are two ways to fix a spelling error indicated by a wavy red line e Click the misspelled word and then right click A menu displays words that are similar to the misspelled word Click the correct word e If you know the correct spelling type the correction Checking Spelling Upon Demand If you do not want to use the spell check as you type feature you can begin spell checking whenever you wish To do this click the spell check button 7 When you do the system checks each word in the file If the spell check finds a word in none of the dictionaries it displays the Spelling dialog box Spelling x Mot in Dichornary O leal O leal E All Suggestions Change Change all Change all Cancel e Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 499 Checking Spelling The Spelling Dialog Box The Spelling dialog box displays e the word not in the dictionary in the Not in Dictionary field e suggested spellings for the word in the Suggestions field The most likely replacement is selected at the top of the list e buttons that let you ignore the word change the word or exit If you want to Do this Replace the word with one of the suggestions and continue Click the suggested word spell checking the page _ Click Change Replace every occurrence of the word with one of the Click the suggested word Suggestions and continu
246. ck Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 7 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 441 Working with Menus Editing a Menu Item via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus module follow these steps 1 Access the Menu Report screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 444 Click the menu you want to edit The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all items on the menu View Menu ut Us L Why Choose Ektron L Business Practices D Company Profile L Mews L staff List Careers L Ektron Medical Blog L Forum L site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer Ab 4 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit and click Edit from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 5 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 Editing a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via navigation link on a Web page follow the
247. ck OK to insert the image into eWebEditPro XML Image Explorer folde Select folder3 indes simlie ipg See Also e The Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 513 e Adjusting a Picture on page 514 e Pixels on page 515 e Setting a Border on page 515 e Aligning the Picture on page 516 e Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment on page 518 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 518 e Editing the Picture s Title on page 519 e The Options Button on page 519 The Picture Properties Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 513 Inserting Images You can also use the Picture Properties dialog box to adjust the picture s width height border thickness and alignment reset the image s properties width height border thickness and alignment to their original specifications set spacing between the picture and surrounding information on the page enter or edit the picture s title view technical information about your connection Adjusting a Picture The layout area of the Picture Properties dialog box lets you adjust a picture s width height border thickness and alignment Layout width fi 6 Height fi b fo Border Thickness Alignment Mot set bi Reset You can use the following fields to adjust the picture before inserting it into the editor To make this change Use this field Th
248. cked out state and only you or a system administrator can check it in to work on it again When you check it in the file on your local computer is loaded into the Workarea As a result you can edit the document on your local computer anywhere without a network connection When you are ready to return it to the document server check it in save it or submit it for publishing You must check the document in on the same computer and folder to which you checked it out NOTE A system administrator can check in any checked out document If he does the most recently published document gets checked in Editing an Office Document After an Office document is saved follow these steps to edit it 1 From the Workarea select the document s folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 31 From the View Contents of Folder screen click the document The View Content screen for the document appears Click the Edit button L The document opens in the host application D n pe VN Edit the document as well as its summary metadata schedule tasks Web Alerts or comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 67 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 e Managing Tasks on page 317 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 230 Using the Document Management Functionality eEktron CMS400 NET Administrator manual
249. click the hyperlink to access the form Now you can test the form and make Sure it works as you expected If needed you can return to edit mode change the form and test it again until you are happy with it Assigning a Task to a Form NOTE While tasks typically help Ektron CMS400 NET users track content activities you can also assign a task to users or user groups whenever a form is submitted For example your Web site offers a free product demonstration to anyone who completes a form Whenever a site visitor submits the form a task is assigned to your sales department s administrative assistant He uses the information collected by the form to schedule a demonstration The sales manager can review the task history to audit sales leads and ensure demonstration requests are being handled in a timely manner To set up a task that it is assigned to users or groups whenever a site visitor completes the form follow these steps You should be familiar with tasks before beginning this procedure See Also Managing Tasks on page 317 1 If you are creating a new form assign the task at Step 3 of the Forms Wizard If you are editing a form assign the task on the form s Edit Properties screen In both cases you identify only users and groups to whom the task will be assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form Ektron CMS400 NET assigns the remaining task information 2 You complete the form and make it available o
250. click the mouse Selected text has different background and foreground colors as illustrated below Horizontal Sets the horizontal position of the entire Alignment able Border olor Sets the color of the table borders unless Pisce Afani Crataris checker Applying Formatting Attributes to Text Several buttons apply formatting attributes to text such as bold and italics There are two ways to apply these attributes e Enter the text Then select the text and press the toolbar button The button is now in a pressed in condition and the text has the formatting attribute e Press the toolbar button Then begin typing the text As you type the formatting is applied To stop applying the formatting press the button again This action changes the button to a pressed out condition and terminates the formatting Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The toolbar buttons and drop down lists on the default toolbar are explained below Five optional toolbars are also available To display one place the cursor on the standard toolbar right click the mouse and select it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 468 Toolbar Buttons Content Summary Metadata La RRMA Oa ys CEM AYA Ei Appl Style Normal Verdana 2 10 pt Eciit View 45 Format Ta al Special Characters n Paragraph Format A Native NET Content Manag Improve Table ektron O
251. content an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content For example each document stored in the Document Management functionality has a unique part number Your system administrator adds a custom search field called Part Number and specifies that only numbers can be inserted into the field When you add a document to Ektron CMS400 NET you access the content s metadata and insert the correct part number for the document illustrated below Edit Content in Folder Content Tithe Sample Content Block English U 5 9 Content Summary Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates title Sample Content Block _ Defaut current character count 20 500 mas Collection None selected ID Change Clear keywords document management content management ems Default Search Data Part Number Then anyone visiting your Web site can find that document by its part number or a range of part numbers using the field on your Web site s search screen illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 73 Adding or Editing Metadata Search Text Search All the words C Any of the words Exact Phrase Match Partial Words _Part number between an NOTE When your system administrator sets up metadata he determines whether or not is it publicly viewable If it is the search field appears on the search s
252. creen opens as shown below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 234 Using the Document Management Functionality Edit Content select file ta be uploaded 6 Click the Browse button Browse through your computer and network to the file you want to import When you do the file s path appears within the File field Insert a Title Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 10 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 67 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 e Managing Tasks on page 317 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 11 Click the appropriate button to either check in Ei or publish ES the file See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 219 and Adding Content on page 45 12 A window appears indicating that the file is being uploaded to the DM server Editing a Managed File After a managed file is stored in DM follow these steps to edit it 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the managed file s folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 235 Using the Document Management Functionality 3 From the View Contents of Folder screen click the managed file 4 The Content tab displays the file name and a button to let you vie
253. creen that site visitors use along with the search screen in the Ektron CMS400 NET Workarea If the data is not publicly viewable it only appears on the Workarea search screen Entering or Editing Metadata To enter or edit content s metadata follow these steps WARNING You may only edit metadata of content that is published checked in or checked out by you 1 Access the Edit Content screen for the content whose metadata you want to enter or edit as described in Editing Content on page 49 2 Click the Metadata tab Edit Content in Folder Root Wo ba fl x a Caii Bn Sa ae Aj i Title Sample Content Block English U 3 Summary Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates title aa Content Block Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 74 Adding or Editing Metadata 3 The Edit Metadata screen opens with the current metadata displayed In order to add metadata to content an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content NOTE Your screen may differ from the example below Your system administrator determines the appearance of the Metadata screen Edit Content in Folder Content Tithe Sample Content Block English U S 4 Summary Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templates 2 OF title Sample Content Block J current character count 20 500 max Collection None selected 1D Change Clear
254. cription for the form Form Data The type of form data Mail or Database See Also The Structure of Form Data on page 143 Form Submissions Shows the amount of times a user can submit the form This is often used with polls and surveys to limit the influence any one user has a given poll or survey Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 191 Working with HTML Forms Assign Task to Users and groups to whom a task will be automatically assigned whenever a site visitor completes the form See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 181 Content Properties Displays the properties of the form s content Content Title Title of content associated with form Note The content name is the same as the Form name Content ID Content ID number assigned to content Status The status of the content Last Editor Last user to edit the content Start Date Date and time when the content will go live on the Web site if set for a future date End Date Date and time when the content will be removed from the Web site if set for a future date Date Created Date and time when content was created The View Form screen also contains several buttons to perform actions To learn about the buttons see View Form Toolbar on page 199 Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties To see and update additional form information that does not appear on the View Form screen view its properties To
255. ct permissions your user name appears followed by Select User or Group To assign the task to yourself proceed to the next field To assign the task to someone else click Select User or Group and choose a user or group The user to whom the task is being assigned must have permission to edit the con tent When you complete the screen an email is sent to the selected user or user group informing him of the assigned task Note email is only sent if email notification is enabled for Ektron CMS400 NET Select the language of the user who will perform the task Content If this task involves a piece of content select it When you click Select a new window appears From this window you can navigate through folders to find the content You can only select a piece of content whose language matches the user language selected above See Also Selecting Content for the Task on page 323 Priority Select the priority of the task Your choices are High Normal and Low The priority appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by priority Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 320 Managing Tasks SS Task Category Select a category for the task When a Task Category is chosen the Task Type drop down box is auto filled with task types associated with that category See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 325 Task Type Select the Task Type for this
256. cted language Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Features A menu a collection and the Listsummary function are similar in that they let you add a list of links to a Web page The following table compares these features to help you understand which one would best accommodate your needs for a particular page NOTE To implement these features the assistance of a developer is required Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 418 Working with Collections Collection Men List Summary Display title of all content in a folder and possibly subfolders Display title of selected content in a folder and possibly subfolders Display external hyperlinks amp library assets Display content summary optional Display additional content information comment last modified date start date end date user who last edited it ID number path relative to your site s root Can be multi leveled that is you can have submenus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 419 Working with Menus Working with Menus Ektron CMS400 NET s Menu feature lets users create and maintain a dropdown menu system for your Web site The menu options can link to content library assets external hyperlinks and submenus Below is a sample menu In this example delivered with Ektron CMS400 NET the menu appears when a site visitor moves the cursor ove
257. ctors For Heart Disease F x E esit What Are the Risk Factors for Heart Disease 4 To remove that item from that Web part zone click the delete button 5 A warning message appears Click OK Minimizing a Content ltem There are two reasons for minimizing content e You want to reduce the clutter while working on a page in personalization mode When you minimize only the title and menu appear in the zone Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 397 Personalizing a Web Page MainRightZone What can I do to lower my risk 2 P D edi MainRighntZone What can I do to lower my risk 2 fi edit Making changes in your lifestyle is a proven method for reducing your risk of developing heart disease While there are no guarantees that a heart healthy lifestyle will keep heart disease away these changes will certainly Improve your health in other ways such as Improving your physical and emotional well being Also because some risk factors are related to others making changes in one area can benefit other areas Here are some ways you can reduce your risk of heart disease Quit smoking Smokers have more than twice the risk for heart attack as nonsmokers and are much more likely to die if they suffer a heart attack Smoking Is also the most preventable risk factor In this case you would restore content to full size when you finish You want to suppress the content for a
258. d All whose state is Completed Action you can perform from view screen Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following state Archive Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 334 Managing Tasks Sorting Tasks By Task Type On every View Task page you can sort tasks by the Task Type assigned to the task You sort by Task Type using the Show Task Type drop down box It is located in the upper right corner of the Workarea Note Task Types only appear in the Show Task Type dropdown box when they have _ been added to a task Show Task Type jue Date Assidmlal Not Specified l Mar 2005 f Mar 2005 f 1 Mar 2005 To sort by Task Type click the drop down box and choose a Task Type Words in bold Italics are Task Categories You cannot sort by Task Categories
259. d edit upon expiration content within Ektron CMS400 NET upon expiration Archive and remove from Yes within its folder by clicking site expire the View gt Archive Content option Note If this option is assigned to content it only moves into the archived area of its folder after a site visitor accesses the host Web page Archive and remain on Site Yes Yes within its folder by clicking The content does not appear on a the View gt Archive Content page that uses the ListSummary option function but does appear wherever the ArchiveListSummary function is used Note If this option is assigned to content it only moves into the archived area of its folder after a site visitor accesses the host Web page Add to CMS Refresh Report Yes in the active area of its folder and on the Refresh Report See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Content Reports gt Refresh Reminder Report Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 65 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Restoring Content from Archived to Active State To restore content from archived state to active follow these steps Navigate to its folder N If necessary click the Archive button to view it See Archive Options on page 65 Click the Edit button CY Click the Schedule tab Remove the End Date or change it to a future date o p Submit the content for publishing Wh
260. d to a task to record its progress from assignment to completion To add a comment to a task follow these steps NOTE When an approver approves declines content from the Content Awaiting Approval screen if the content has an active task the Add Comments to Task screen appears The screen lets the approver insert comments about the task associated with the content 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 331 2 Click the Add Comment button E 3 The Comments window appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 338 Managing Tasks Comments Times New Roman 3 12 pt hi A oa E 7 U BEGY sA Insert Close 4 Enter your comment in the editor Note that you can format and spell check the text using the toolbar buttons 5 Click the button 6 The View Task screen reappears with the comment at the bottom of the page Updating Comments To update a comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen that contains the comment you want to update as described in Viewing a Task on page 331 2 Click the comment s Date Time link illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 339 Managing Tasks View Task Y 0 mh Se Ibi bbe IRIE I eI RELI Ie IE Pe Re Pe Re Re Pe RR eR Lt Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To f admin Assigned By jedi
261. dard users that demonstrate Ektron s flexible user permissions model The table below lists the username and password needed to log in as each user type as well as the permissions assigned to each user Standard user jedit jedit Basic for example add edit content manage library files etc Membership user Read only permission to private content 5 Click the Login button 6 The Web page appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 11 Logging In and Out You can navigate around your Web site as you could before signing in But now the content is surrounded by a colored box when you move the cursor over it illustrated below Sess CELL 422 EzE i 2 he WELCOME TO OUR SITE At ektron Medical we focus on assisting people with some of the most complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia cancer Immune disorders and kidney disease We do this by applying our expertise in medical devices pharmaceuticals and biotechnology to make a meaningful difference in patients lives Site Preview While logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can preview the Web site as it would appear to visitors or view it in regular view Button Description Appearance E oreen Preview Content appears as last edited The advantage of this mode is Preview Mode that you can see a Web page as it will appear when published to your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with its app
262. deleting 566 spanning 589 specifying 565 section 508 616 width setting by percentage 568 setting by pixels 570 tasks add button 56 assign button floating toolbar 4 assigning to content block 320 to HTML form 181 to user 320 comments adding 337 updating 339 creating via content block 330 via task folder 319 definition 317 deleting 340 due date 322 editing 336 priority assigning 320 redirecting to another user 320 relationship to content blocks 317 start date 322 state assigning 321 toolbar buttons 342 viewing 331 options 332 sorting options 335 template link field on Add Edit Menu screen 428 text aligning 475 in columns 557 within a cell 591 direction menu 476 indenting 474 remove formatting 474 replacing 494 searching 494 selecting 467 WebImageFX command 549 title bar displaying button text 456 toolbars buttons 56 468 collections 407 customizing 480 floating 4 buttons 4 redisplay 485 restore 485 trademark character inserting 472 toolbar and menu option 472 translate toolbar and menu option 471 twain acquire WebImageFX command 551 twain source WeblmageFX command 551 U underline toolbar option 478 undo toolbar option 470 WebImageFX command 552 uppercase words spell checking 501 URL link field on Add Edit Menu screen 427 users email address editing 455 language editing 455 profile customizing work page height 456 customizing work page size 455 customizing work page width 456 landing
263. dialog after insertion follow these steps 1 Click the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table Properties from the menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 555 Introduction to Tables When creating a table you can specify the e number of rows and columns e width e horizontal alignment on the page e background color or background picture e border size and color For more information about managing tables see Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 565 For more information about managing individual cells within a table see Working with Table Cells on page 581 Deleting a Table To delete a table follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the table until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow 4 2 Click the mouse button The table becomes selected small Squares appear around it Gi Co 3 Press lt Delete gt Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 556 Introduction to Tables Inserting a Table within a Table You can insert a table within a table You might want to do this to arrange text in columns NOTE HTML does not let you use tabs or spaces to align text in columns You must use a table to align columns You can remove the table s border so that no lines appear between the columns and rows To insert a table within a table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell into which you want to i
264. displays if MS Project is installed 6 Check the Create From File button Pree eee errr rere rer CAD ocuments and Settingssbbolt EK TR j es Browse 7 Click the Browse button and browse to the file you want to import Click OK 8 The document appears within the host application 9 Enter a Title and add content to the document NOTE If you want to retain the original document name insert the full filename into the Title field For example you could enter mydocument doc 10 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if it should be searchable 11 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 67 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 12 If desired you can edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 218 13 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 219 and Adding Content on page 45 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 229 Using the Document Management Functionality The Work Offline Option After creating or editing a document you can save it to your local computer instead of the document server To do so click the Work Offline button 5 If you do the document remains in a che
265. ducts English Us Title B RC Sportster B RC Cheetah B Rc Lilly B RC Redstar More info Title Products ID 1 Template fCMS300Sample products asp Last User To Edit Application Administrator Last Edit Date 2 9 lct 2002 09 36 PM Date Created 2 9 lct 2002 09 34 PM Description Products navigation Include Subfolders Title ID Language ID URL Link B_ RC Sportster 4 1033 CMS300Sample products asp vid 4 ERC Cheetah 5 1033 CMS300Sample fproducts asp7id 5 Rc Lilly 6 1033 CMS300Sample products asp7id 6 B_ RC Redstar 7 1033 CMS300Sample products asp id The screen displays each item in the collection To learn more about a collection click More Info When you do the lower section of the screen displays the following information about the collection title description ID number template Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 406 Working with Collections e last user who edited it e last date when it was edited e date it was created e whether or not the content folder s subfolders can be included e for each content item in the collection a link to the content click this to view and edit the content ID number quicklink Collections Toolbar The following table describes the collection toolbar buttons ao oOo Add new collection or add items to a Creating a Collection collection on page 407 Remove Remove items from a collection
266. dure for editing an Open Office file is the same as the one for editing a Microsoft Office file For details see Editing an Office Document on page 230 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 233 Using the Document Management Functionality Working with Managed Files This section explains how to work with managed files through the following subtopics A managed file is any kind of file that you can import into Ektron CMS400 NET other than HTML XML Microsoft Office Open Office or Multimedia e Creating a New Managed File on page 234 e Importing a Managed File on page 234 e Editing a Managed File on page 235 Creating a New Managed File Unlike an Office document you cannot create a managed file within Ektron CMS400 NET Instead you must create it on your computer using the host application After creating the file import it into DM Importing a Managed File To import a managed file into DM follow these steps See Also Drag and Drop File Uploading vs the New Content Menu Options on page 239 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the file See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 31 3 The default language appears next to the screen title To create the document under a different language click View gt Language and select the language Click New gt Managed Files 5 The Edit Content s
267. e Norrral Change the font style Your Webmaster Times New Roman determines which fonts are available Font Style Note If more than one font appears in a selection the browser on the reader s PC tries to display text using the first font If the browser cannot find that font it tries to use the second etc Change the font size Your Webmaster determines which font sizes are available lanzo Size Font A Font Color Change the font color Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 473 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only h h k d color of the text WSipackground Color Change the background color of the tex Note To remove background color from selected text click the Normal button A I B Make th Id T Ctrl l Make the text italic Italic Apply strikethrough to selected text For example Here s semetexdt Remove all formatting from selected text ae Make selected text appear smaller and above text line Strikethrough x Superscript Subscript Make selected text appear smaller and below text line Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all selected lines with a bullet Bullet Increase or decrease the current line s distance from the left margin m Begin the line on which the cursor rests Number with a number If the line above this line is not num
268. e Important If you created menus prior to upgrading to this version of Ektron CMS400 NET those menu items are assigned as Quicklinks You cannot change them to template links simply by entering a template link here Instead you must go to each menu item and change the Link field value from QuickLink to Menu Template as illustrated above Add a more detailed description for the menu Folder See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Menu Associations Feature gt Assigning Folders to a Menu 6 Click the Save button H With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 429 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 428 Working with Menus Adding a Menu via the Menus Module 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 Click the Add Menu button qq 3 The Add Menu screen appears Add Menu E Th tao Peele Title English U 5 4 Advance Settings 4 To complete the fields on the Add Menu screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 429 Adding a Menu Item Similar to being able to add edit view or delete a menu Ektron CMS400 NET also allows you to add edit view and delete a menu items See Also The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 421 Adding a Menu Item
269. e screen that explains how to use the event type selection box By default this text is Select Event Type to View Select Event Type To View Opa All OO Company Holide Trade Show Your system administrator can change this text Show All Label If this calendar uses event types the list of event types appears at the bottom of the screen On top of the list is text indicating that all event types will appear on the calendar By default this text is Show All Select Event Type To View Chay AJl Company Holiday rade Show r Your system administrator can change this text Long Description Lets the user enter additional text while adding a calendar event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 299 Working with Calendars SS Folder Name Name of content folder to which the calendar is assigned for permission purposes You can only add edit or delete events for calendars in folders to which you have been granted permission Folder Path Complete path to the calendar s content folder The View Calendar screen may contain the following toolbar buttons that let you perform other tasks View Show calendar in the Workarea Viewing a Calendar on E Calendar page 300 e Back Return to previous screen Viewing a Calendar NOTE This section explains how to view a calendar and enter calendar events from the Workarea Once a calendar is available on your Web site you can also
270. e Ektron Explorer is enabled a new toolbar button appears for quick access to Explorer Edit View Favorites Tools Help ack gt A J Search SP Favorites http iim ekkron comi a Management Workspace for admin J Default CHS a a i See Also e Display of Content on page 254 e Removing Ektron Explorer from Display on page 255 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 253 Using Ektron Explorer Display of Content The right side of the screen displays content in the selected folder The following graphic illustrates the information available about that content it x Displaying 8 items arch About Us z Services provided by ektron Medical Last edited by bob bob on 3 1 2006 12 55 AM _Rotatinigl mage About Us Blogs j Conditions ee Contact Information Index i Contact Intar ga resthtml Optionally the right side of the screen may contain metadata additional information about the content If metadata appears it is red and appears under the Last user information as illustrated below Ll Sample Content Block Sample Content Block Summary Last edited by bob on 3 13 2006 5 14 11 PM description Training presentation for new employees author eu Hi Ling Changing the Thumbnail Size You can change the size of the thumbnail images in the right frame The
271. e Math Expression Editor After you click the Mathematical Expression button the editor appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 627 Working with the Math Expression Editor E Mathematical Expression uE wa lee fel fa ee Sie eee Poe oon arny iy ayo AF 1o lt sin ka T gt x lt gt ec YJjay PA atib F x ka X o y x y px y x Properties Image Properties Font Size 18 File Hame Font Color Unassigned m j i Description Background Color Unassigned a DE Cancel Note that you can easily change the expression s font size color and background color via the Properties area lower left corner The Toolbar The editor s toolbar provides special characters that are not otherwise available While entering an expression you can use that toolbar along with your keyboard to compose the expression Use the toolbar to insert equation templates and symbols It also has buttons for common operations like cut and paste The standard toolbar contains three main panels The left side of the toolbar consists of pull down menus displaying a variety of equation templates Templates are highlighted as you mouse over them To insert a template click or release the mouse over a highlighted template Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 628 Working with the Math Expression Editor E Mathematical Expression
272. e Tasks Folder on page 318 Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 319 Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 325 Accessing the Tasks Folder To access the Tasks folder follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop as explained in Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 The Smart Desktop folders appear in the top left frame O Smart Desktop BE Tasks H Reports Click the Tasks folder The following subfolders appear Assigned To Me tasks assigned to you Assigned By Me tasks you assigned to someone else Created By Me tasks you created Assigned To User search for tasks assigned to a user Not Started tasks whose state is set to not started Active tasks whose state is set to Active Awaiting Data tasks whose state is set to Awaiting Data On Hold tasks whose state is set to On Hold Pending tasks whose state is set to Pending Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 318 Managing Tasks e Reopened tasks whose state is set to Reopened e Complete tasks whose state is set to Complete You can click any folder to view only tasks in that category Also the View Tasks screen appears in the right frame listing all tasks assigned to you or assigned by you iii ia View Tasks Assigned By and To John Edit n JE ere Bo e a at Bek hd eh Ad ead ed wed ed eS A A ee BN Oe ad a ea a a aa aaa a aa e a e 3 Tasks Show Task T
273. e bit depth Here are the bit depth values Bit depth Color depth 2 colors 256 colors 16M colors Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 553 Introduction to Tables Sometimes the information on your Web page looks better when displayed on a table Here is an example Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Cubs Black Hawks This section explains e Creating a Table on page 555 e Deleting a Table on page 556 e Inserting a Table within a Table on page 557 See Also e Table Dialog Boxes and Menus on page 558 e Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 565 e Working with Table Cells on page 581 e Section 508 Tables on page 616 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 554 Introduction to Tables Creating a Table To create a table click the table button E3 then click Insert Table from the menu When you do the Insert Table dialog box appears Insert T able Eo 0 Ep Cancel Mil Borders 3 75 Use Default Color C Not Specified f Percent Pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Horizontal Alignment Cell Spacing Custom Background Background Color ff Unassigned Background Image From File You can also access this dialog box after you insert it You would do this if you wanted to edit any of the information entered in the dialog To access this
274. e over the button as illustrated below Edit User jedit Landing Page after If you want one page in your Web site to appear after login sign in enter the URL to that page You might select a page that leads to a group of pages that you maintain If you don t know the URL navigate to the page go to the browser address bar and select the text following the directory in which Ektron CMS400 NET resides For example if the browser address bar says http www ektron com customers aspx id 945 you would enter customers aspx id 945 here Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 456 Updating Your User Profile ed Pesernton Set smart desktop as If you want the Smart Desktop to appear as soon as you the start location in the enter the Workarea click inside this check box Workarea See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 If you leave this check box blank when you enter the Workarea you go to the folder of the content specified at the Landing Page after login field Inherit Task This area indicates your task permissions and if you Permissions From inherit them from user groups to which you belong User Groups For more information seethe Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Managing Tasks section Task Permissions User Properties See Custom User Properties in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual 7 Edit the fields as desired the
275. e polygon s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 543 Editing Images Rectangle Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a rectangle To use this command click the rectangle command drag a rectangle and release the mouse To change the rectangles line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 544 Editing Images Attributes Redo Standard Toolbar Button Description If you use the Undo command and then decide that it was a mistake use this command It re applies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo See Also Undo on page 552 Reset Zoom Ratio Standard Toolbar Button Description Displays image at full size See Also Zoom In on page 552 Zoom Out on page 553 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 545 Editing Images Rotate Standard Toolbar Button GI Description Turns an image a specified number of degrees Note that the dialog box lets you rotate the image e left or right e 90 180 or 270 degrees e any number of degrees between 1 and 359 Dialog Box w Rotate Of x fc 180 C 270 jao 1 353 ro Save
276. e selected library folder and the content Hyperlinks For a definition of the term hyperlinks see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 117 Adding Hyperlinks You must copy hyperlinks to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy a hyperlink to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 125 The only difference is that you insert a hyperlink instead of a file Viewing Hyperlinks To view a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 127 The only difference is that you view a hyperlink instead of a file Editing Hyperlinks To edit a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 129 The only difference is that you edit a hyperlink title instead of a file title You can also edit the URL Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 136 Library Folder Adding Hyperlinks to Your Content Once a hyperlink is added to the library users can add the hyperlink to their content To add a hyperlink to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 133 The only difference is that you add a hyperlink instead of a file Images For a definition of the term images see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 117 Uploading Images You must copy images to the library before content creators can insert them into content To copy an imag
277. e spell checking the page _ Click Change All Correct the spelling of the word by typing it and continue Click in the Not In Dictionary spell checking the page field Correct the spelling Click Change Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page Click Ignore You would normally do this if a word such as a company name is spelled correctly even though it is not in the dictionary Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page ignoring all other occurrences of the word Stop spell checking Click Cancel Click Ignore All Spell Checking Selected Text To check the spelling for a single word or a group of words follow these steps 1 Select the text that you want to spell check 2 Press the manual spell check button 7 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 500 Checking Spelling 3 The spell checker reviews the words in the selected text and stops at any word not in the dictionary For documentation of options when a misspelled word is found see The Spelling Dialog Box on page 500 4 When the spell checker finishes reviewing the words in the selected text it displays the following message Finished checking selection Do you want to check the rest of the document Click Yes to spell check the rest of the document including text above the selected text Click No to stop the spell checker Setting Spell Check Options eWebEditPro XML ca
278. e that the word hyperlink now appears in a different color When you save this Web page and a user views it if the user clicks hyperlink a new Web page will display Ektron s home page NOTE If your computer has an internet connection you can double click the hyperlink to test it Applying a Bullet to a Line of Text Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line Type You can begin a line with bullets 2 3 Click the bullet button i 4 Notice that the line is indented and now begins with a bullet You can begn a line with bullets Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 465 Creating a Simple Web Page Changing the Size of Text Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line Type Finally you can change the font to a large size Select the words large size se ee Click the down arrow to the right of the font size list When you do the list of available fonts appears 5 Click 5 18 pt 6 Notice that large size is now much larger than the other text Congratulations You have just created your first Web page with eWebEditPro XML You have learned how to apply bold italic and underlining create a hyperlink add a bullet to a line and change the size of the text This sample used only a few of the many features available The following sections explain the rest of the details about using the product Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6
279. e to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 125 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file Viewing Images To view an image follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 127 The only difference is that you view an image instead of a file Editing Image Titles To edit an image s title follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 129 The only difference is that you edit an image s title instead of a file title Overwriting Images When an image in the library becomes out of date or if the wrong version of an image was copied you may overwrite that image with a new or correct version Overwriting images minimizes disk space and the number of copied library images NOTE Overwriting images is a permission that your system administrator may or may not assign to you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 137 Library Folder To overwrite an image follow the procedure described in Overwriting Files on page 129 The only difference is that you overwrite an image instead of a file NOTE You can only overwrite an image with another image of the same extension that is gif gt gif not jpg gt gif Adding Images to Your Content Once an image is added to the library users can add it to content To add an image to content follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content
280. e undone Menu Edit gt Redo Keystroke Control Y Insert Hyperlink Launches the Insert Hyperlink dialog box Button Adds hyperlink to text in the editor Menu Insert gt Insert Hyperlink Keystroke Control K Bookmark Button None Launches the Insert Bookmark dialog Menu Insert gt Bookmark box Adds a bookmark to the content Keystroke None Remove Hyperlink Button None Removes the hyperlink from text in the Menu Insert gt Remove Hyperlink editor Keystroke None Files Images Hyperlinks Launches the Library dialog box which Button E allows you to add library items to the Menu Insert gt Files Images Hyperlinks content Keystroke None Insert Symbol a Launches a special characters and Button symbols dialog box Choose a character Menu Insert gt Insert Symbol or symbol and click Insert Keystroke None Insert Horizontal Inserts a Horizontal line below the line Rule Button where the cursor is located Menu Insert gt Insert Horizontal Rule Keystroke None Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 659 Insert Table Add Row or Columns Insert Cell Delete Row Delete Column Delete Cell Split Cell Merge Cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Button Menu Insert gt Insert Table Menu Table gt Insert Table Keystroke None Button rows F column 4 Menu Table
281. e width of the picture in pixels Width Add a border around the picture Border Thickness For more information see Setting a Border on page 515 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 514 Inserting Images To make this change Use this field Adjust the alignment of the picture Alignment For more information see Aligning the Picture on page 516 WARNING If you substantially adjust the picture s height and or width the picture may be distorted when users view your Web page Pixels A pixel is a single point in a graphic image Computer monitors display pictures by dividing the screen into thousands of pixels arranged in rows and columns The pixels are so close together that they appear connected Below is an image shown at regular size and then enlarged so you can see the pixels that make up the picture regular size enlarged to show pixels Setting a Border To add a border around a picture enter the border s thickness in pixels in the Border Thickness field on the Picture Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 515 Inserting Images dialog box Layout width fi 6 Height fi b Border Thickness p Alignment Mot set Reset Here is a picture with a 1 pixel border lll Here is the same picture with a 10 pixel vena Mel lf the picture is not a hyperlink its border is black If the picture is also
282. e within the eWebEditPro XML editor You can also access this menu by pressing the application key Eh Because this menu can change depending on what you are doing it is called a context sensitive menu Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML wv View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag NOTE A different context sensitive menu is available when your cursor is within a table That menu is described in The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 563 The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 489 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Menus View all toolbar menus Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 614 Cut Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information into memory the information in memory is lost Copy Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on page 493 where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Paste Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste Text Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all
283. ealth Centers Select the content you would like to browse Arthritis Center 3 Diabetes Centers 3 aleeip cee Tae Diabetes Centers Diabetes Health Center News What are the symptoms Warning Signs wadd ta In this example the administrator provided three categories of content and each category has several items When you select a category its items appear below 5 Select the items you want to display Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 396 Personalizing a Web Page 6 Select the zone in which you want to place them Click the Add button When you do not need to add more content click Done Add Content Deleting Content You can only delete content that you added See Adding Content on page 395 When you delete content you remove a version of it from its Web part zone But if it exists in another location on the same page or on any other page it remains there And you can still add it to any Web part zone To delete content follow these steps 1 Goto the personalization Web page Your system administrator will instruct you on how to find it In the sample database provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the page Is http localhost cms400demo mypage aspx Click Personalize to enter personalization mode A delete button appears on the personalization menu for any content item you added to the page See illustration below MainLettZone Risk Fa
284. earance In Preview mode click the Preview button to switch to regular mode Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 12 Logging In and Out Button Description Appearance Regular View The most recently published version of content appears In this mode colored borders surround content when you move the cursor over it In regular view click the Preview button to switch to preview mode Toggling Site Preview To toggle site preview on and off follow these steps 1 Navigate to a page that includes the login logout button 2 Click the Preview button preview 3 The Web site is now in preview mode i y E SOME WORDS ABOUT US LATEST NEWS r Deals m 4s a global leader ektron Ektron Rated Post fedicafl strives to improve Ektron Inc an int Se aaa lives in its local and global Web content man COMMUNITIES particularly with software today a regard to Increasing access to Ektron to Demons fe high quality healthcare for Healthcare ei logout Underserved populations It is Healthcare Conte Z workarea a commitment to the long Framework whict term sustainable well being of hospitals medical ri d AANA the communities in which health insurers to employees live and work Indexed content wv YML H lid 4 To turn preview mode off click the 8 preview button on the login screen Logging Out of the Sample Site To log out of Ektron CMS400 NET follow th
285. earning Program 3 When you click the bookmark its full address appears in your browser s address bar This bookmark s address looks like this http www ektron com single cfm doc_id 35 Benefits2 4 Click the address bar The address is selected Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt to copy the address into the Windows clipboard Go to eWebEditPro XML 6 Select the text or image from which you want to jump to the bookmark 7 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears 8 Move the cursor to the Link field 9 Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt to paste the address you copied in Step 4 into the Link field 10 Click OK Editing a Hyperlink If you need to change a hyperlink s destination Web page or target frame follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 607 Using Hyperlinks 1 Click the Hyperlink button i The hyperlink dialog box appears Edit the Link or Target Frame field as needed 3 Press OK Removing a Hyperlink lf you want to remove the hyperlink from text or an image select the text or image and press the Remove Hyperlink button Bs Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink lf you enter a URL or an email address into eWebEditPro XML it automatically becomes a hyperlink To prevent this enter an extra Space in the URL or address For example instead of entering sales ektron com enter sales lt blank gt ektron com Ektron CMS4
286. ed Files Multimedia Open Office Language A Menus Collections English U S Archived Conte Spanish Traditional Sort Each folder lists the following information about its content Field Description O The name of the content The language of the content The number assigned to the content by Ektron CMS400 NET It is used to retrieve the content from a database Status The status of the content See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 Date The most recent date the content was added edited or Modified published Last Editor The last user who accessed the content Additionally each folder has the following menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 34 NOTE Depending on your permissions you may not see all menu options e New Menu on page 35 e View Menu on page 36 e Delete Menu on page 37 e Action Menu on page 37 New Menu Menu Creates the following new item For more information see Option within selected folder Discussion Discussion Board Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Board Manual Section Discussion Boards HTML HTML content Adding Content on page 45 Content HTML Form HTML Form Poll or Survey Working with HTML Forms on page 141 Survey Smart Form Smart Form Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Section Managing Content Folders gt Smart Forms Office Office Document
287. ed on the read only Statistics Slides field on PowerPoint PowerPoint s File Properties window s Statistics tab Result Display Options At the top of the search screen a pull down list lets you choose the how to display the search results Search Content Folder TS Sa aor Te xi k Rte rs Graphical Text Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 113 Searching the Workarea View Description Example option If the item is content ora form display a thumbnail of it If the item is an asset th dated CMS Developer we APY a A Native NET Cont Chas 400 net Last edited by Appli display a generic icon that 12 2 2005 12 56 Ph indicates asset type In both cases to the right are the item s title summary last edited user date and time Sample HTML content You can click the title to display the item inside the CMS400 Replication 4 doc View Contents screen T From there you can i Last edited by Application Adr perform all available on 12 2 2005 12 36 PM functions on the item Note Graphical search results require the Internet Explorer browser version Sample Microsoft Word document 6 or greater Text Display item s title in the left column To the right Search found 15 result s that matched your keyvwo display the last edit date time ile ccs a PEPEE Content Title Folde folder name sdai E kes Breakroom Survey 12 1 2005 5 51 PM
288. ell checking 501 italic tooloar option 474 J jumps see bookmarks and hyperlinks justify tooloar option 475 L landing page after login customizing for user 456 language user editing 455 library accessing 118 add items button 56 asset adding as menu item 434 copying files to 124 definition 117 file extensions 121 files editing 129 inserting into content 133 overwriting 129 viewing 127 folder properties 120 forms adding to content 138 viewing 139 hyperlinks adding 136 adding to content 137 editing 136 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 iv viewing 136 images adding to content 138 editing titles 137 extensions 121 overwriting 137 uploading 137 viewing 137 quicklinks adding to content 138 viewing 139 search results include images 114 124 text only 114 124 searching 121 license keys viewing 475 478 lifecycle content block 9 line WeblmageFX command 539 link check button 57 links broken finding 55 ListSummary compared with collection and menu 418 lock table or image in position 475 log in 10 log out 12 button floating toolbar 5 Macintosh support 655 menu items 657 toolbar buttons 657 using editor 655 managed files 234 creating 234 document management feature 213 editing 235 importing one 234 manuals online accessing 458 marked for deletion content 653 menus accessing 422 add new content block via naviga tion link 437 adding new via content f
289. en Office files creating 231 editing 233 importing 231 open WeblmageFX command 540 oval WeblmageFX command 541 overwrite button 58 P padding cell 597 password changing 455 paste toolbar and menu option 470 paste as new image WeblmageFX command 542 paste text toolbar and menu option 470 pending start date content 654 pictures inserting see image upload properties image upload 508 pixels 515 pointer selection WeblmageFX command 542 polls creating 201 creating in Workarea 202 editing from Web site 206 replacing existing with new from Web site 205 polygon WeblmageFX command 543 position objects menu 475 prerequisites 10 preview button 58 floating toolbar 5 feature 12 print editor content toolbar button 479 profile users updating 453 viewing 453 properties button floating toolbar 5 content 42 publish button 58 content to web site 84 published Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 content block viewing 59 Q quicklinks 604 adding to content 138 broken finding 55 definition 118 using for a collection 409 viewing 139 R rectangle WebIlmageFX command 544 red content border color meaning 648 redisplay toolbars 485 redo toolbar and menu option 470 WeblImageFX command 545 registered trademark character inserting 472 remove alignment toolbar button 478 remove button 58 remove XSLT from XML content block 102 reorder button 58 replace toolbar and menu option
290. en the content is published it will no longer be archived Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 66 Adding a Content Summary Adding a Content Summary A summary provides a short description of content to supplement the title when displaying a list of content on a Web page When you create or edit content you can create a summary Then your Web site developer can create Web pages that contain just the summaries to attract readers to the full story A good example is a news Web site A page on that site could list the titles of the top stories followed by a summary of each illustrated below TOP STORIES Ektron Named a Rising Star 08 15 2003 August 15 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ekern e Ie elidi sididOweieore ibid ikelo Come Siac management and authoring has been named a Rising Sele das part of che prestigious New England Technology Fast 50 Program Ektron Launches International Distribution Program 08 08 2003 August 8 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ektron Ine an 1NNOV tOr In namic Web content authoring and management with over 350 000 users today announced the Lavine or eeo neer nae onal ais on ueo Program Like content summaries can include images and files as well as different font styles and sizes This chapter explains how to create summaries and how they can help navigation within your site Your system administrator determines how to display the su
291. endar Event on page 304 View Calendar Events Viewing a Calendar Event on page 311 Return to Previous Screen Return to previous screen Event title within calendar sample below East Ea RC International Announces the RC Jump to calendar event s Web page if available See Also Working with Calendars on page 292 Tips on Viewing a Calendar e The monthly calendar displays the current month In the intranet sample today is highlighted in yellow illustrated below At the top of the calendar are the previous and next months Click them to view those months Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 302 Working with Calendars e Where an event appears move the cursor over it to see a popup box with the event name location and start and end times a r _ If a Web page is linked to the event you can click the event name to jump to that page e Click the number that represents any day to view detail for that day illustrated below lt lt 3 31 2005 Friday April 01 2005 FEFE 00 AM 0 00 AM 2 00 PM birthday party 00 PM 00 PM e From the daily view you can Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 303 Working with Calendars see all events and the hours they span proceed to the previous or next day click a date in the upper
292. enenenes 485 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar ccccssseeesesesseeeeeneeeeees 487 Changing the Menu s Orientation cccssseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 488 The Context Sensitive Menu cccccssssessesseeseeseeeseeaes 489 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features 492 Copying from Other Applications cccsssecsseseeeseeseeeenees 493 Finding and Replacing Text cccscscceeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 494 Che eckiho Spelling ieee eee nen eee eee 498 Editing in Microsoft VV OM sieeve ce wccececeeccrecsmncsecasevceseaxwedsecevene 503 SSOP NINA CS isc a rserececcd ceteris AAR 506 Editing fl lit 8 ck Peeeepe eee ene ree Eenren tree rere erty renee ec rren errrrn err een rr 522 Specifying Color Depth ccccccsssseeesenseescesseeeeeeneeeseeeneees 553 Introduction tO TableS ccccceesseeeeneeeeneeeseeneeeeeneeenenseneens 554 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus ccessecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 558 Manipulating Your Table s Format ssscceesseeeeeeeeeeees 565 Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns cscc0000 565 Specifying Table Width cccccssseeeesseeeenneesenneeseeneesennees 567 Specifying Horizontal Alignment c cssecceseseeeeeseeeeenees 572 Table BACK GIOUNGS ii iieseiieavanssissisnnanississisaaaisswenxisvinsascssencisendiasaicn 573 Setting Table Border S ccccsssseeceseeeeesseeeenseeseeseesenneesennees 577
293. ent name or to Saving an Document under a a different folder Different Name or to a Different Folder on page 224 Navigate through CMS400 NET s folders Using the Toolbar to Edit an Office and select a file to edit Document on page 225 View a list of changes to the document you The Content History Window on are working with page 101 Edit a document on your computer When The Work Offline Option on you finish save it to CMS400 NET page 230 Only appears if you are the next user in the Approving Declining Content on document s approval chain Click the button page 81 to approve the document Only appears if you are the next user in the Approving Declining Content on document s approval chain Click the button page 81 to decline the document cMs4o0D Lets you view and update the configuration Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator cmo i being used Manual section Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 221 Using the Document Management Functionality Button Description For more information see Refreshes the list of configurations Use this Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator after adding a new configuration Manual section Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer Lets you Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer e choose a
294. ents Use the Blog Properties screen to set them See Also Blog Properties on page 349 The following table describes these properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 377 Blogs Description Enable Comments Allows user in Workarea and site visitor to add blog comments Also displays comments on site and in Workarea Note A member of the Administrators group can always add comments regardless of how this checkbox is set Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 378 Blogs aS Moderate Comments Determines if comments must be approved before they appear on site If this field is checked only users with permission to edit the post can approve comments see illustration of this permission below View Permissions for Folder Blog Allow this object to inherit permissions The content in this folder is private and can only View Advanced Permissions User or Group Mame Read Only Edit acd Delete F bob x E H If users without this permission add comments they only appear on the Web site after being approved by someone with permission to edit the post If someone has edit post permission and authenticates before submitting a comment it is approved automatically Appearance of Unapproved Comments On the Workarea s View Posts in Blog screen an unapproved comment is indicated by a red flag amp comments 3 On the View Com
295. eps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Form button i 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK View Form Toolbar Several toolbar buttons and tabs help you work with forms To learn about toolbar buttons available when creating or editing a form see Inserting Form Fields on page 155 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 199 Working with HTML Forms Button or ban Description More Information Edit Content Edit the form s content which Editing a Form s contains the form fields Content on page 198 View Staged Click View Staged button to view Published Content content that has not yet been published Click View Published button to view content that is live on the Web site View History View and possibly restore older Content History on versions of a content block page 80 View Difference Compare two versions of content Comparing Versions of Content on page 92 Edit Form Properties Edit Form properties not available via the Edit Content button Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 192 Delete Form Delete a form Deleting a Form on page 199 Check Links Check for other content that contains a link to this form Add Task Add a task Managing Tasks on page 349 View task information Add Form Add a new form Creating a New Form on page 144 Link Checking on p
296. er it value here Regardless of the default value the site visitor can change it while completing the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The for mat of the response is not checked Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit Site visitor s entry must be at least 8 characters and include one digit If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s Message response to this field does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Minimum of 8 characters with at least one digit the error message could be Please enter at 8 or more characters with at least one digit By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 168 Working with HTML Forms Inserting a Text Area Field Use a text area field when you want the site visitor to enter an
297. er to see but the icon format allows more space for the folder structure You can decide which option best suits your needs Switching Between Full Buttons and Icons By default top level folders appear as full buttons To switch the display of all folders to icons double click the down arrow circled below To switch back to full buttons double click the up arrow circled above You can also switch the display of folders one at a time by clicking the up or down arrow As an alternative method of switching the display you can 1 Place the cursor on the bar above the display of top level folders The bar has several dots in the middle 2 When the cursor turns to a double headed arrow drag it to the bottom bar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 25 To return the display to full buttons drag the same bar above Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea You can hide the left frame of the Workarea to provide more space for working in the right frame Below is an example of the Workarea with a minimized left frame Note that you cannot see the folder display in the left frame Yievr Content abc test fee A Oe Awe abe test Za Checked Out Last User To Edit admin Last Edit Date 11 May 2004 10 02 AM None Specified None Specified 11 May 2004 10 02 AM Approval Method Do Not Force All 4oprovers Approvals jedit admin XML Configuration None Specified HTML Content 4ssu
298. er until you see a four headed arrow illustrated below When a table is selected small squares surround it Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 617 Section 508 Compliance Employee Id Department 1546 1549 Human Resources 1550 sales 1551 Adminstration Click the Tables button E3 Click Table Properties The Table Properties dialog appears oo M Click the Accessibility button NoTE Your system administrator can add or remove the Accessibility button from the Insert Table dialog Size Cancel Roms Columns Accessibility i LL aaa a en r Borders ane 7 The Accessibility dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 618 Section 508 Compliance Accessibility Ea Heading Rove 0 Heading Columns 0 Cancel Summary en Caption Horizontal Caption Alignment Vertical Caption Alignment Accessibility Dialog Respond to the fields in the dialog They are described below a aa Heading If you want your table to have a horizontal header enter Rows the number of rows that it should occupy Beginning with the top all cells in the specified number of rows are designated as table headers Heading If you want your table to have a header enter the Columns number of columns that it should occupy Beginning with the left column all cells in the specified number of columns are designated
299. er you want to change Click the up or down arrow to move the content in either direction 7 Repeat steps five and six until you set the desired order 8 Click the Update button fi Editing Collection Information To edit information about a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 403 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 405 3 Click the collection whose information you want to change Change any of the field values For documentation of the fields see Complete the screen using the following table on page 408 Deleting a Collection When you no longer want a collection you can delete it To delete a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 403 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 405 Click the Delete button 1 4 Aconfirmation message appears 5 Click OK to proceed Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 416 Working with Collections Working with Collections in a Multi Language system NOTE In a multi language Ektron
300. eral J Smart Folder Properties Folder Mame My test Smart Folder Folder to Monitor Url Http 192 168 0217 5ceme400derna Search All Subfolders kepword Match Type All Words Match Partial Wards false Date Created between 3 9 2006 and 6 9 2006 Date 4 between 579 2006 and 6 9 2006 Modified Last Editor s Last Warne false Status Filter Deleting a Smart Folder To delete a Smart Folder select it right click the mouse and select Delete Folder Retrieving Content into the Smart Folder To apply the Smart Folder s search criteria to Ektron CMS400 NET click the folder This action begins a search through all selected folders All content that matches the search criteria at that time is retrieved to the folder Since content changes constantly whatever is retrieved now will may differ from what is retrieved later Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 282 Using Ektron Explorer Creating a Smart Folder To create a Smart Folder follow these steps 1 Smart folders reside within a Workspace If you already created a Workspace skip to Step 2 Otherwise create a Workspace as described in Creating a Workspace on page 279 Select the Workspace and right click the mouse Click New gt New Smart Folder The following dialog appears Create Smart Folder Web Page Dialog Step 1 of 5 Cancel 5 Enter the name of the Smart Folder 6 Click Next
301. erlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 307 Working with Calendars i Note This field only appears if your system administrator set up one or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 308 To apply an event type to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow R to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event 6 Click Save 1 Understanding Event Types Your system administrator can set up types of calendar events For a personal or workgroup calendar examples might be staff meetings employment interviews conference calls For an educational institution examples might be academic deadlines sporting events and tuition due dates If you assign a type to an event while creating it you can later display only events of that type This feature lets the viewer temporarily suppress unwanted events As a result the calendar display is cleaner because it only shows relevant information Adding a Recurring Event You can assign an event to occur multiple times on a calendar To do so follow these steps 1 Add a calendar event as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 304
302. ert a comment into the content Use the Math Equation editor Insert a picture Edit an image Insert or edit a table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Using Hyperlinks on page 603 Removing a Hyperlink on page 608 Adding a Library File to Content on page 133 Moving an Image to the Server on page 520 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content gt Translating Content gt Using Machine Translation Adding Comments to Content on page 624 Working with the Math Expression Editor on page 627 Inserting Images on page 506 Editing Images on page 522 Introduction to Tables on page 554 471 Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Edit in Microsoft Word Fa Data Design Mode iat Data Entry Mode Ei View as WYSIWYG View as HTML el Copyright Registered Trademark Edit content in Microsoft Word Switches to Data Design Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature Switches to Data Entry Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature Display the page content as WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get WYSIWYG is the ability to see in the editor what will appear when user views the Web page
303. erties for the folder GBNB f TEE w kj e al a lara e a ws a sus oes e s os ete w ons Oo a s Ts cad ost se m oats n BERUPA 7s T taal Ae Ts x ates oTi f aee A asta Sa s a Ay a ee a s a niai fy aTa 7 an z5 at a a a A aa a a E E E n a P a EEEE TEE eT ee TE EE E E TT A eer er z a Ps Pe Pd ee ee ee ee Pd Pn ee ee ee Pe Pe ee Pd ed a PP EP a ee iH x P EN J EFT ets Pea a s sa EILL ss y e TN oe z g ss 8 sk PY EEE z sek y n p i 2 4 et ee Tiy Remove Roll Link Link Name Scott s Blog URL http www testscottsblog com Short Description Test site for Scott s blog Relationship Edit Remove Roll Link Link Name Toby Tylers Blog URL http www tttestsblog com Short Description Test site for Toby s blog Relationship frend colleague Add New Roll Link Remove Last Roll Link 6 A dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Click OK if you want to remove the last blog roll link You can continue to remove categories at the end of the list by clicking the Remove Last Category link 8 Click Save M Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 364 Blogs Removing a Blog Roll Link To remove any blog roll link on the list follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To add a blog category from the Web site you must be logged in
304. erts Assign or update Web Alert information for the form See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature A Submit content into approval process 5l Submit B Publish content to Web site Publish e Note If the content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button e Save and check in content This button does not submit the Check In content into the approval process but rather lets other users change it mj Save the content without submitting it into the approval process Save If a user clicks save and then closes the editor other users cannot edit the content This buttons appears if you are the next approver in the approval list Click it to decline the changes made to the content Note If content has any active tasks a comments window pops up You can insert comments to describe how approving or declining the content affects the task Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 157 Working with HTML Forms Close the editor without saving changes Next click the Save and Submit or Publish button Eo The form only appears on your Web site after it is published After you complete and save the form it may need to go through the approval process When that is complete add it to the site by assignin
305. es Use the Item and Item List fields to do this Note If after seeing the following predefined choices you want to customize the choices available to site visitors return to this field replace the value with Custom then define the ranges you want in the Item field Age Ranges Use the predefined choices for age ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Numeric Ranges Use the predefined choices for numeric ranges You can see the ranges on the screen after you choose this option Gender Use the predefined choices for gender You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Marital Status Use the predefined choices for marital status You can see the values on the screen after you choose this option Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 173 Working with HTML Forms SS Allow Click More than one to allow the site visitor to select more than one item on Selection the data entry screen Otherwise click Only one For example if you click More than one and the choices are music art sports the user could select all three choices If you click Only one the user could only select one choice A selection is required Check this box if the user must select at least one item in the list Appearance Click Vertical List to arrange the choices vertically feet art music sports Click Horizontal List to arrange the choices horiz
306. escription tor the file NOTE You can only select files in the To Select a Local File field if your computer has permission to upload files to the server To insert a picture from your computer follow these steps Click the Browse button 2 Navigate to the file that you want to insert and press Open to insert it Your Webmaster can set a maximum size in kilobytes for images If you select an image that exceeds the maximum an error message appears and you cannot insert it Your Webmaster can also restrict the type of image file you can insert For example if your Webmaster does not authorize you to insert bitmap bmp files and you try to do so an error message lists valid file extensions and you cannot insert the image Microsoft Internet Explorer AN You have not selected a file with one of the valid extensions gif jpo png peg it Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 511 Inserting Images 3 Click in the Enter a description for the file field Enter a title to describe the file 4 After you insert the picture the title appears in the dialog box s top left corner to identify the picture to you and all users connected to the same Web server NOTE The title is also the ait text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason 5 Information about the picture s file size width and hei
307. ese steps 1 Click the Logout button in the content s floating toolbar or click the Logout button 3 logout f on the Web page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 13 Logging In and Out 2 The Logout confirmation box appears 3 Click the Logout button 4 You return to the Web page from which you logged out However it is in standard view not Ektron CMS400 NET view Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 14 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea is a central screen from which you perform all Ektron CMS400 NET activities From it you can access the Smart Desktop view the system s top level folders navigate through the folder structure perform actions on content This chapter describes using the Workarea and Smart Desktop through the following subtopics Accessing the Workarea on page 15 Installing the Document Management Functionality on page 16 Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop on page 23 Sending Instant Email on page 28 Accessing the Workarea To access your Workarea follow these steps 1 Click the Workarea button at the bottom of the screen lt Sworkarea or the Workarea button z in the content s floating toolbar 2 The Workarea appears 3 The following illustrates one of several screens that may appear in the Workarea Your
308. esenisseduedsnrtisesnnaeadnanmncnies 241 Approving Documents asssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 241 Adding Documents to Collections and Menus 241 Document Repor sS isacscscccctcaecensxecniecensnventicaxsenessinemeaneneeneaeanexeons 241 Using Ektron Explorer icssesiessassisecnsestepmaseemseienennn 243 Installing Ektron Explorer ccccscsecssseesssseeeseeeesseeeneeeeseeseaees 246 Displaying Ektron Explorer ccssscssssssssseesssesssseeeseeneseennes 252 Searching for CMS Content cscseeeesssseeeeeesseeseeeseesseeees 256 Performing Actions ON Content ccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeesens 257 Performing Actions ON Folders cccecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeenes 263 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 ili Inserting External Files into Ektron CMS400 NET 271 PaO eee nee RO Re eR ea E ee ee ee ee mae 272 The DON os cirassenedean et oanececenantsececapinderivemesatamsatemewasewuseiweees 276 Using Workspace Folders cccssscccseseeceeseeceeneeseeseeeeeneeseees 278 Using Smart OVO CEG visenedarendns se ararnestsasausieeniiviraiaearsnereeenadenndncse 280 Recently Viewed Content cssccsecessssssseeeessessseeeseneseeeeseees 288 Working with Calendars ccsccesseeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeeeees 292 Understanding Calendars ccccccsssseecssesseescnsseeseeenneesees 294 Accessing the
309. esults follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 149 Working with HTML Forms 2 Select Report on the form Edit Content in Folder Content English U 5 Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page e e cane Window 3 Choose whether you want the results to appear in the Same Window or a New Window 4 Choose the style of the report Edit Content in Folder Content English l Display a message Redirect to a file or page Redirect form data to an action page Report onthe form Same Window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 150 Working with HTML Forms Chart Types The following table describes the types of charts available Data Table The poll or survey answers are displayed with the percentage of users 50 18 21 who responded to 204 22 25 each item 0 26 30 250 31 or over Age range 4 responses Bar Chart The poll or survey answers are Age range 4 responses displayed with a bar graph Use this chart type when you want a quick visual representation of the responses
310. eteccscetieteciedesteincdecucivescdadens 616 Inserting Comments within Content ccccccssesseeeseneeeeees 623 Working with the Math Expression Editor ssecsssee 627 Prerequisites for the Math Editor sssccsssesssseeeeseseeneesens 627 Using the Math Expression Editor ccsesseesesseeeeneeeees 627 Saving and Editing a Mathematical Expression 629 Accessibility and the Mathematical Expression Editor 630 Editor VEU VIEW sissstsenannnedmnaceredeliednetenntelesnipsemennsinosiimisias 631 Appendix A Content Statuses 648 Active Content 2 cccceceececeeceeceececeeceeeeeeceseeseecescaseeeesenseeeeesanees 649 Checked In Content anannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 650 Checked Out Content ccccccecceceececceceecescuseecesceseeeeeceeeeeerenees 651 Submitted fe S22 1 op eee meee a en ne RS ee ese a 652 Marked for Deletion COntent ccccccecceceeceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 653 Pending Start Date Content ccccceesseesseeeeseeesseeeeseneeneeeees 654 Stag d Content sieraimiin innia 654 Appendix B Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients cccccsseceseeeseeeeseeseseeees O55 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 vii Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 viii What s New in the 6 1 Release What s New in the 6 1 Rele
311. ewed Content on page 288 Displaying Ektron Explorer on page 252 Searching for CMS Content on page 256 Performing Actions on Content on page 257 Performing Actions on Folders on page 263 Inserting External Files into Ektron CMS400 NET on Favorites on page 272 Using Workspace Folders on page 278 Using Smart Folders on page 280 Recently Viewed Content on page 288 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 245 Using Ektron Explorer Installing Ektron Explorer To install Ektron Explorer follow these steps NOTE During the installation you are asked to identify the folder that stores your Ektron CMS400 NET If you don t know ask your system administrator for this information before beginning 1 Close any Office applications that are open including MS Outlook and Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Sign on to Ektron CMS400 NET Your system administrator provides the address to place in your browser s address field For example http 163 198 0 227 cms400demo default aspx 3 From the Ektron CMS400 NET workarea click Settings gt Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer Download gt Settings 3 a a BE Users Click download to begin download of the Ektron aE User Groups Explorer Client Install 3 Ektron Explorer ae Configuration en Active Directory cen Web Alerts SMe lleer Pronerties lt nT ix 4 Click the download button 5 The follow
312. ext That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Launches the Search and Replace dialog Finding and box The dialog searches for and lets Replacing Text on you optionally replace text that you page 494 specify Find next occurrence of the string Finding and Replace g Find Next entered into the Find What field of the Replacing Text on Search and Replace dialog box page 494 E und Ctrl Z Reverse the most recent action as if it neg never occurred You can undo as many actions as you wish Ctrl Y Reverse the undo action l Seanas Begin spell checker Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 499 Ba Spell Check manual Turn on or off spell check as you type Checking Spelling feature as You Type on page 498 Spell Check automatic Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 470 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only we Edit Hyperlink Eha Remove Hyperlink I Library i Upload Files a Translate Add Comment 4 Mathematical Expression 7 Image Editor Table Change information about a hyperlink Remove a hyperlink Insert a library file Upload any external files such as images to the server Translate content into another language Ins
313. ext if desired Click the Insert button The comment is saved Click the Close button The comment window closes and a comment icon is placed where the comment was added to the content Ki tay fs rE Ee l a Ce EES DA H f t e O P oN pp oe i I Iili hll il Icome to RC International 2 AC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC ra qas become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 624 Inserting Comments within Content Each comment appears in the table at the top of the window From this window you can add another comment and update an existing one See the next section for more details Viewing a Comment After a comment is inserted into content it can be viewed by any user who can edit the content To view a comment follow these steps 1 Edit the content that contains the comment 2 Within the content double click the comment icon 2 7 BE Ha A ID BAe EEBE SSSse2ze come to RC International RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC ra las become one of the leading manufactures of RE racing 3 The Comments window opens Adding Another Comment To comment on an existing comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Comment window for the comment as described in Viewing a Comment on page 625 Insert the comment Click the Insert button The comment is saved a
314. f the screen lists available buttons that do not currently appear on the menu To add a button to the toolbar drag it from the right side of the screen to the location on the left side where you want it to appear You can also click a button then click lt Add This action places the button at the bottom of the list To remove a button from the toolbar drag it from the left side of the screen to the right You can also click a button then click Remove gt The Move Up and Move Down buttons let you to move any button up or down one slot within the list of buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 484 Customizing Your Toolbar Rearranging the Items on a Menu 1 Click the button you want to move 2 Click Move Up and Move Down to move the button up or down one slot for each click Restoring Toolbars If you remove all toolbars from your menu and then want to restore the menus but do not have the Customize menu option follow these steps Place the cursor in the editor Right click the mouse A menu appears with a Redisplay toolbars option gt w pP Click this option to restore all menus Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar To move a menu to a different toolbar location follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the SE ME E g beginning of the menu Click the mouse 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new
315. ffect of Spanning a Cell When you set a cell to span rows or columns the editor does not remove the cells that are in the way Instead it moves those cells across or down to the next available position For example the following table has two rows and two columns Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 590 Working with Table Cells If you set cell A to span two rows note that cell C moves across to make room for cell A This action pushes cell D to the next column Aligning Text Within a Cell Within a cell you can specify how your text aligns horizontally and vertically Setting Horizontal Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the horizontal alignment of a cell You have set the alignment to left center or right or e left e center e right e justify the text is justified down both left and right edges Many books use this alignment style This alignment is not supported by all browsers Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 591 Working with Table Cells This example illustrates these choices text right justified center justified ext left justified This text is both justify left and right justitied To set horizontal justification of a table cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu
316. folder structure You can click any folder to display its content in the right frame while its subfolders appear below it e The right frame shows content in the currently selected folder Above the right frame is a toolbar of buttons that represent tasks you can perform on selected content e The lower left frame shows Ektron CMS400 NET s top level folders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 31 View Contents a 5B CMS 4000 ema G _Rotatingl mages About Us a 35 A 3 10 20 About Us About Us Index 276 A 3 10 20 By El l i Contact Information 460 I 3 27 20 m Hoos oe TPE Footer E 372 A 3 13 20 Conditions s 9 Contact Information Hear About as Ie ey Ektron Medical Center 2l_ Home ected tater 3 23 20 5 Flash LB Privacy 3 7 2001 E Products 76 A 3 7 2000 Template Header Flash B 378 A 3 14 20 Therapies m a m 1 he E i 4 i E In this chapter you learn about adding editing publishing and deleting content through the following subtopics Permissions and Approvals are explained in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 56 Viewing a Folder on page 33 Viewing Content on page 38 Expanding the Content Area on page 44 Adding Content on page 45 Editing Content on page 49 Adding Content on page 45
317. fter they submit their answers The following sections provide information that a user creating a poll or survey might be interested in beyond the normal form information e Working With Polls on page 202 e Steps to Creating a Survey on page 207 e Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 149 e Viewing a Form s Information on page 191 e Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 192 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 201 Working with HTML Forms For information on how to display a poll or survey on a Web site see the Developer Reference Manual section Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Poll Server Control To create a poll or survey use the Forms Wizard Working With Polls Below is an example of a Poll Note that when a site visitor hovers over the poll the question also appears as ToolTip text I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Online b O Friend Where did you hear about Ektron Cowo Options are required D Newsgroup O Other Pr conditi This subsection contains the following e Steps to Create a New Poll in the Workarea on page 202 e Replacing a Poll with a New Poll from the Web Site on page 205 e Editing a Poll from the Web Site on page 206 Steps to Create a New Poll in the Workarea To create a new poll follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new
318. g the screen Validation Select the kind of validation to apply to this field The choices are No validation response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Allow maximum of 1000 characters Site visitors entry cannot exceed 1000 characters If you assign to this field any value other than No validation the field is surrounded by red dashes when it appears on your Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 170 Working with HTML Forms SS Error Enter text that appears on the screen if the site visitor s response to this field Message does not satisfy the validation criterion For example if the validation criterion is Cannot be blank the error message could be Please enter a response By default the error message is the same as the validation criterion you choose You can use this field to customize its text Note You can only enter double byte characters if your Windows settings include that language If you enter characters that are not in a language defined in your Windows settings question marks appear instead of the characters Inserting a Choices Field Use a Choices field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices You can allow the site visitor to select only one or more than one choice You can also determine the list of choices and the appearance of the list To inse
319. g it to a page template See Implementing a Form on a Web Page on page 181 Form Validation You can apply validation rules while creating or editing the following field types e text e password e textarea e calendar Validation rules ensure that the form information entered by site visitors meets your criteria For example a validation rule can specify that a site visitor s response to the Telephone field conforms to a standard format for example 7 or 10 digits If the response does not conform an error message informs the site visitor of the problem The input must conform before the form can be submitted For a list of validation rule types see Validation Options on page 165 When Validation Rules are Applied Validation rules are applied when a site visitor submits an entire form not as soon as the input is entered If invalid input is found the error message that you define appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 158 Working with HTML Forms The site visitor must change his response to conform to the validation rule When he does the next field is checked and if that is invalid its error message appears etc Tip If you apply validation rules to more than one field include the field name in the error message For example enter The name field only allows text This is good practice because error messages only appear after the form is submitted and if the mes
320. g toolbar 4 folders add button 56 button for deleting 57 content toolbar buttons 34 deleting 55 information available when viewing 34 screen display 31 view history restore 102 viewing 33 fonts background color 474 color 473 heading size 473 size 473 style 473 form elements toolbar 476 forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 iil adding to content 138 HTML assigning task 181 creating 144 creating content block 152 database 199 deleting 199 editing content block 198 introduction 197 summary 198 field validation options 165 implementing on Web page 181 inserting fields 155 calendar field 179 checkbox 159 choices 171 hidden text 161 password 166 select list 175 text 162 text area 169 introduction 141 mailto 199 processing overview 143 reports exporting 190 reports viewing 184 structure of data 143 toolbar 199 toolbar options 154 validation 158 viewing 191 properties 191 viewing 139 freehand WeblmageFX command 537 G gray content border color meaning 648 green content border color meaning 648 H height work page customizing for user 456 help online accessing 458 hide borders toolbar button 478 history button view floating toolbar 5 content accessing from Web page 49 100 accessing via Workarea 50 100 viewing 58 window 101 horizontal flip WeblmageFX command 538 horizontal line inserting toolbar button 479 HTML cleaning 611 editing 610 in
321. ght appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 6 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box Click OK The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the picture s properties For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 514 e Setting a Border on page 515 e Aligning the Picture on page 516 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 518 e Editing the Picture s Title on page 519 9 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box When using the second Media Selection dialog box you can insert a picture from any folder available to your computer whether the folder is on your computer or a remote computer or from the Web server Your Webmaster determines which pictures are available on the Web server To insert a picture from e a folder available to your computer click Select New File navigate to the file of interest and click OK e the Web server click the Select Server File button You are prompted to enter a User Name and Password Your Webmaster assigns these codes to you which are needed to copy the file to the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 512 Inserting Images Next the Image Explorer dialog appears illustrated below Navigate through the folder structure until you find the image Then cli
322. ght corner Basic colors EE 6 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 588 Working with Table Cells 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Spanning Rows or Columns You can create a table cell that stretches across more than one row or column In the following table notice how the row that contains Sports Teams spans three columns Sports Teams Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Black Hawks You can also create a column that spans several rows as illustrated below Notice that Boston spans three rows Colleges ee Boston Boston College Northeastern University Boston University Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 589 Working with Table Cells Colleges C Spanning More than One Row or Column To have a table cell span more than one row or column follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that will soan rows or columns 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears In the Rows Spanned or Columns Spanned field enter the number of rows or columns that you want this cell to span Span Rowe Spanned Columns Spanned 6 Click OK E
323. gt Purge History Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 367 Blogs Language Support Language Support for blogs and blog posts work the same way as it does for folders and content See the Administrator Manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content for an explanation on working with multiple languages Deleting a Blog NOTE To be able to delete a blog you must have permission to Delete Folders on the blog s Advanced Permissions screen Deleting a blog removes the blog and all posts comments and quicklinks for the blog WARNING After a blog is deleted you cannot retrieve its posts comments or quicklinks The following steps explain how to delete a blog 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder Or From the Web site right click the blog and click Properties NOTE To delete a blog from the Web site you must be logged in 2 Click the Delete gt This Blog 3 A dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer Are you sure you want to delete this folder a TE This will also delete all content quicklinks assodated with the content and subfolders Continue 4 Click OK if you want to delete the blog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 368 Blogs searching Blogs Searching blogs works the same as searching HTML content See the following topics for an explanation of using the Search
324. gt gt OF Cancel Specifying a Cell s Background Color Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 574 explains how to apply a background color to a table You can also apply a background color to a cell To apply a background color to a cell follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 585 Working with Table Cells Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu Click the Background Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color Sccae ae W Unassigned 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears See Also Using the Color Box on page 588 Color Basic colors EE 8 6616 Oe EE HEHEHHE EE EHHH Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 6 Click a color to apply to the background of the cell Deleting a Cell s Background Color To delete a cell s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Cell Properties dialog box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 586 Working with Table Cells Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned specifying a Background Image for a Cell Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 576 explains how to apply a background image to a table You can also apply a backg
325. h Microsoft Office Documents on page 214 Working with Managed Files on page 234 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Document Management Administration gt Managing Multimedia Assets Working with Open Office Files on page 231 When creating new content you must assign a type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 View Contents of Folder Content aik Discussion Board TML Content E i HTML Form Survey J Office Documents Managed Files NM Multimedia Upen Office Collection As you can see the New menu lists all types of content you can work with Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET Organizations typically want a Web site that is updated frequently with the latest information They also want to decentralize the update process so that non technical users from any department can make changes Further organizations want oversight over those changes to ensure the accuracy of the information that the content adheres to corporate guidelines etc Ektron CMS400 NET manages the lifecycle of content from creation through approval and publication It helps your organization set up a process for overseeing changes to a Web site indicate content s status within that lifecycle and inform the next approver that it is their turn to review the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 Editing Content
326. habetic character then starts an identifier token as usual Merging Style Properties When two token elements with differing style properties merge the resulting token may or may not have the desired style properties There is no alternative but to reset style the properties of the new token when this happens Keyboard Shortcuts Though most people prefer to use menus and a mouse when first learning an application in the long run it is often more convenient to use keyboard shortcuts for common operations Math Expression editor has a number of useful shortcuts which are listed below Template Shortcuts These keyboard shortcuts handle the insertion of templates Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 645 Working with the Math Expression Editor Shortcut Supported Platforms Key lt Ctrl gt L lt Ctrl gt B lt Ctrl gt _ insert subscript template lt msub gt lt Ctrl gt H lt Cirl gt P lt Ctrl gt insert sub and superscript template lt msubsup gt lt Ctrl gt 0 insert parenthesized expression template insert superscript template lt msup gt not MAC OSX lt Ctrl gt 9 insert definite integral template Also pressing the caret character adds a superscript to the previous expression So for example if you enter x42 the result is an x with a superscript of 2 Navigation and Selection Shortcuts These keyboard shortcuts facilitate cursor
327. hain before it is removed Approving Documents Documents are placed into the approval chain like other types of content For more information see Approving Declining Content on page 81 Adding Documents to Collections and Menus You can add a document to a collection or menu as you would any other type of content For more information see Working with Collections on page 401 and Working with Menus on page 420 Document Reports Ektron CMS400 NET provides several reports that track documents by status Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 241 Using the Document Management Functionality Report Displays documents in this For more information see status Approvals Requiring your approval CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Approvals Report Checked In Content Checked in CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked In Report Checked Out Content Checked out CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked Out Report New Content New that is created and saved CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt but never published Content Reports gt New Content Report Submitted Content Submitted for publication CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Submitted Report Pending Content Approved and pending a start date CMS400 NET Administrator
328. hanging the page So anyone visiting the page sees your content and arrangement Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 389 Personalizing a Web Page NOTE While the first three permissions affect your ability to personalize a page the last one lets you design a page that anyone browsing to it will see If you have any permission you can also perform these actions on a personalization page e remove content from a zone temporarily close e remove content from a zone permanently delete e suppress content from a zone minimize These tasks are explained in more detail below The Personalization Menu The top right corner of any content item contains a menu of options you can perform on it circled below 3 Why Choose Ektron Medical 4n Exciting Environment ektron Medical is a fast paced technology driven company that provides its employees with opportunities for professional growth as well as the flexibility to achieve a balance hetween wark and nersonal lite Reina nart of ektron Medical means workinn with The options change depending your permissions your mode for example Add Content mode and the current state of the content Also each content item has its own menu So if a Web part zone contains three items you see three menus one in the top right corner of each item The following table describes Personalization menu options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for
329. he Default button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 76 Adding or Editing Metadata change the sequence of terms by selecting one then pressing the up and down arrows e f related content metadata is available for the content its name appears followed by None Selected ID Change Clear Click Change to display a window of choices For example if the related content type is a collection all collections appear in the popup Select the appropriate data for this content Selected items appear in the bottom of the screen You can reorder them by selecting an item then clicking the up and down arrows To remove items from the bottom of the screen select them and click the delete I button Select Collection Title ID Description Path Homepage Ads 4 Y Homepage Mews 6 Y About Ws 3 Y List of contacts at Ektron CMS4000Demo54bout contacts 10 Medical Ls Statt Select Metadata e ji p Ux al 7 Title Ea v 2 e About Us Homepage News 6 lf the related content type is either content item or library image hyperlink or file the following window appears when you click Change Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 77 Adding or Editing Metadata ee oa Library Folder CMS400Demo quicklinks O Blogs fla Sia aR NON E I E E at C eee Title ID Content Lanquar O _RotatingIma out Us login asps 7id 35 56 G Rotating About Us I tid 35
330. he Insert Table Menu on page 558 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 564 Manipulating Your Table s Format This section explains how to manipulate your table s format by specifying e anumber of rows and columns e awidth e horizontal alignment e a background color or image e border color and size NOTE You can also apply most of these properties to individual cells within a table See Working with Table Cells on page 581 for details e Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 565 e Specifying Table Width on page 567 e Specifying Horizontal Alignment on page 572 e Table Backgrounds on page 573 e Setting Table Borders on page 577 Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns Use the Size section of the Insert Table dialog box to specify the number of rows and columns in the table Insert Table Size Bows 2 Columns 2 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 565 Manipulating Your Table s Format A row is a horizontal series of cells while a column is a vertical series j Rows m Columns If you know how many rows and columns the table will be enter those numbers If you don t know the number of rows and columns you need when you create the table estimate how many you need You can add or remove rows and columns later Placement of Inserted Row or Column If you add a row it appears above the row i
331. he content After reviewing the content the EditorInChief decides it is great and publishes it At this point the content becomes live on the Web site and the approval chain is complete The user who created the content receives an email notifying him that it was published amp Content changes have been made File Edit view Tools Message Help G G g a gt X B J Reply Reply AR Forward Prt Delete Previous Next Adaresses Fron Webmaster your company com Date Friday May 03 2002 4 22 PM To Sports riers qurcompany cow Subject Content changes have been made The changes to the content Red Sox Win World Senes have been approved The content changes went hve immediately Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 91 Comparing Versions of Content Comparing Versions of Content The View Content Difference feature highlights changes that were made to selected content Below is an example of the View Content Difference screen showing two versions of content The changes are indicated by e redlining deleted content e highlighting in yellow added content F CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer almalla x Welcome to RC internNational Re oo ee is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve RO rac Re ational has become one of the leading manutactures of RC racing and flying vehicles sport and the enthusiasts who play it
332. he cursor over the menu and click Delete Deleting a Menu Item Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can remove a menu item from a menu via e its content folder e its menu folder Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 443 2 Move the cursor over the item NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 3 Click Delete Removing a Menu Item via Menus Module 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 443 Move the cursor over the item Click Delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 448 Working with Menus NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with Working with Menus in a Multi Language System Note For background information about supporting multiple languages on your Web site see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section You can create an edition of any menu in every supported language When a site visitor selects a language navigates to a page that has a menu and clicks the menu link Ektron CMS400 NET disp
333. he following equation with the right arrow l x 2 z As the cursor moves to the right note that as it moves into the fraction the outline shifts to the fraction instead of the entire equation E Entering Symbols For simple equations you may only need the letters symbols and digits available on the keyboard However in many situations you will want to enter special mathematical symbol characters You can enter a symbol in an equation by clicking it on the toolbar or by selecting it from one of the symbol palettes also on the toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 633 Working with the Math Expression Editor E Mathematical Expression onl ao l g Yop Lyle s T dar ap y E C WF OB L K j vV O T p a U Properties Ima r 7 xk Ww ow Font Size T File Java Applet Window Font Color wd Upeerer B Description W Unassigned Background Color Uk The standard toolbar configuration contains many commonly used symbol characters Generating Content Markup MathML can describe an equation in two ways Presentation markup describes the way an equation should look and content markup describes what an equation means Ordinarily editing an equation is a process of getting its appearance to look right and so by default Math Expression editor uses presentation markup for an equation in progress When you finish your equation Math Expression editor can apply
334. he mouse The check mark disappears and the menu no longer appears on the toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 481 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing or Adding Menu Items 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize Edit e View As ve Paragraph Format E Format e Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Text Direction Customize NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 482 Customizing Your Toolbar Toolbar Customization Special Characters Form Elements _ Table Position Objects C Test Direction E 5 Click the menu that you want to edit 6 Click the Commands tab A new screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 483 Customizing Your Toolbar Toolbar Customization Bullets Bulleted List 4 Button tele g Cell Properties m Remove gt y T aec Check Spelling As You Vae Deri Checkbox Mare Dawn E Center Align Center Check Spelling Selected Toolbar E dit Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box The left half of the Commands screen lists the buttons in the sequence in which they appear on the menu The right half o
335. he next occurrence of the find text and optionally replace it with the replace text click Find Next change the highlighted term using the editor exit the Find and Replace dialog move to the term and edit as needed To restart the search press the Find Next button a 5 Continue to find and optionally replace or edit until you reach the end of the text Additional Options on the Dialog Box The dialog box also lets you do the following e Specifying a Search Direction on page 495 e Considering the Case of a Search Term on page 496 e Whole Word Match on page 497 Specifying a Search Direction The search begins where the cursor is when you click Find Next To make sure you locate every occurrence of a term place the cursor at the top of the content before beginning the search If you begin the search from somewhere other than the top of the page use the Direction field to search from the current location to the top or bottom of the file Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 495 Finding and Replacing Text Find And Replace Find hat firitial Find Next Replace With P Match whole word only P Match case Direction C Up f Down oo Replace Replace All Cancel PEER To search from the Click this option in the cursor location to the Direction field Considering the Case of a Search Term By default the search ignores the case up
336. heck In Check in content View Staged Click the View Staged button to view the content that has not Published yet been published Click the View Published button to view the content that is live on the Web site See Also Staged Content on page 654 Back Go to previous window a m eee Submitted Content A yellow border shows that a user has submitted the content into the approval chain The border remains yellow until the content is published or declined While the content is in the approval chain no user can check it out Products Support ETET Content management systems from Eki Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordabl full featured content management systems address tF organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content MANATEMANE kea Ektron s Hoa based Onn busin Hosa ymae e a i l eG a alel ET i ee ee a a ee ee See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 85 Each toolbar button is described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 652 Submit Submit the content into the approval chain See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 85 Publish Approve and publish the content to the Web site Note You have this option only if you are the last approver in the chain See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 85 Decline Refuse to publish the subm
337. hem Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 2 a a TE EELE d WELCOME TO OUR SITE At ektron Medical we focus on assisting people with some of the most complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia cancer Immune disorders and kidney disease We do this by applying our expertise in medical devices pharmaceuticals and biotechnology to make a meaningful difference in patients lives The advantage of this feature is that you can see a Web page as it will appear to site visitors Continue editing until you are satisfied with its appearance To learn what the border color indicates see Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 3 The Floating Toolbar When content s border is visible you can right click the mouse to display a floating toolbar an example is in the green box below ct Fe a WN f At ektron Medical we focus on assisting people with some of the most complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia cancer Immune disorders and kidney disease We do this by applying our exoertise in medical devices pharmaceuticals O edit to make a meaningful differi UP view History oO Delete A Add Task Properties I SOME WORDS ABOUTUS wWorkarea Logout TEST NEWS 45 a global leader ekti in Rated Positive Toolbar options let you act on the displayed content
338. hese steps Navigate to the content Right click the mouse A menu appears Click Add to Favorites 2 NS ASP NET Unleashed 4 Edit fod to Favorites Cut Copy Rename M eleka Viewing Content in the Favorites Folder To access content in My Favorites folder click the folder When you do its content appears in right frame like other folders NOTE Content in the favorites folder has fewer menu options This is because options that move content among folders cut copy delete etc are inactive within the favorites folder Removing Content from the Favorites Folder To remove any content item from the Favorites folder follow these steps 1 Open the My Favorites folder 1 Navigate to the content 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears 4 Click Remove from Favorites Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 275 Using Ektron Explorer Adding a Folder to the Favorites Folder You can add any folder to the Favorites folder To do so follow these steps 1 Select a folder A selected folder has a blue background and white foreground 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears 4 Click Add to Favorites Viewing a Folder in the Favorites Folder To work with content in a Favorites folder click the folder When you do its content appears in right frame like other folders NOTE Folders in the favorites folder have fewer menu options Removing a Folder fr
339. hey do not appear when the content is published on your Web site 2 Headquarters 5 Northern Blvd Bldg 6 Amherst WH 03031 USA Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 afoibektron conf Ektron CMSComments Microsoft Internet Explorer uropear Comments Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt bi A Ja H Ji B Bom ye A edia Co Torn Please review the text to verify accuracy Gl Bill Partners wl r E j Done loading B B B F Internet ve Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 623 Inserting Comments within Content Other users can add comments to your comments This feature is know as Content Collaboration Similar to other word processing programs comments can be added updated and tracked to audit changes being made This section explains the content collaboration feature WARNING Do not confuse these comments which are inserted within the content with history comments which are inserted outside the content and used to indicate what changed during an editing session Adding Comments to Content To add a comment to content follow these steps 1 Create new content or edit existing content See Also Adding Content on page 45 2 Inthe editor place the cursor where you want to insert the comment On the editor toolbar click the Insert Comment button The Ektron CMS Comment window opens Insert a comment Use the toolbar to format the t
340. hich can be inserted via the Comment tab Date Created The file s creation date You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all items with that creation date that satisfy all other criteria Date Modified The late date when the file was modified You can enter a single date or a range of dates The search returns all items with that edit date that satisfy all other criteria Last Editor s Last Name The last name surname of the user who most recently changed the content or form This is taken from the Last Name field on the User Information screen The search returns all items last edited by that user that satisfy all other criteria Status The content status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 Note Although you can search for content by any status the search results display only the most recently published version If a version has never been approved nothing appears Custom Fields Custom fields are defined by your system administrator and applied to content by its author or editor They are custom defined so would be different for every site The custom search fields appear below the Status field Fields that Apply to MS Office Files Only Size of Document As displayed on the read only Size field on the File Properties window s General tab Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 112 Searching the Workarea Number of slides As display
341. ial MathML templates called tokens There are tokens for variables called an lt mi gt template in MathML for math identifier numbers lt mn gt operators lt mo gt etc The right and left arrow keys generally move the cursor between the tokens in the row However when you move the cursor over a token that contains several characters together the cursor takes an upside down T shape to show the extent of the grouped items by underlining them as shown below x 128 Within a token the arrow keys move the cursor between the individual characters in the token You can also position the cursor within a multi character token using the mouse In MathML identifier tokens with more than one character for example sin are rendered in an upright font by default while single character tokens are rendered in italics If you move two alphabetic tokens together say by deleting an intervening space the editor merges the characters together into a single token A similar behavior applies to numbers By noticing the cursor shape you can easily keep track of what characters are being grouped into tokens Text Cursor Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 641 Working with the Math Expression Editor Math Expression editor also supports the MathML text template Within a text template characters appear in an upright font by default and the spacebar always inserts a space Outside a text template
342. ife This is the story of my life And I write it everyday I know it isn t black and white And it s anything but gray T know that no Tm not alright But Til be OK cause Anything can everything can happen That s the an of y fife P b 1 Ik om Can t wait to read it Posted by Jolin Smith email visit on 02 14 2006 01 55 PM Scott s Blog Toby Tyler s Blog T Music Artist of the Week John Smith Name required Best Week Ever LEAFE a ETS i F mail required http URE Your Comment The Comment Form NOTE See Controlling Blog Comments on page 377 to learn about how an administrator determines if and by whom comments can be submitted Site visitors regular users and Membership users can add comments by filling out the form on the comments page The form has five fields Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 381 Blogs Field Description Name The person submitting the comment This information is required Email The email address of the person submitting the comment This information is required A URL for the person s web site Comment Section A text area to insert comments about the post Post Comment Button Post a comment by clicking this button Depending on the comment s settings it either p
343. ii for additional information C Remove Sample users IMPORTANT Some users in this list might not appear in your User list This depends on which version of the software you have installed L Admin2 C jedit C tbrown L jsmith vs EkExplorerUser LJ Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 i Securing Ektron CMS400 NET Additional Information You do not need to make these changes if you are using the 400 for demonstration or evaluation purposes These changes should be completed once the decision is made to purchase the product and go live with your site IMPORTANT Ektron recommends creating your own Administrator user and deleting the Admin user IMPORTANT Ektron recommends deleting any users from the 400 that are not needed on the system IMPORTANT By default when the Ektron Explorer client is installed the Explorer or EkExplorerUser username and password are also installed Client side users should use their Ektron CMS400 NET username and password when using the Ektron Explorer To learn how to change this information see the Administrator Manual section Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer Editing Builtin IMPORTANT The builtin user does not appear in the Users list This user appears on the application setup screen To change the builtin account information follow these steps 1 In the Workarea click Settings gt Configura
344. ile The table below describes each field on the quicklinks display Field Description Title Title given to the hyperlink or form by the user who added it or last edited it URL Link URL link for the quicklink or form Library ID ID number assigned automatically by Ektron CMS400 NET when the quicklink or form was originally added Parent Folder Parent folder that the quicklink or form belongs to Users need permissions to this folder to be able to access the quicklink or form Last User to Edit Last user that made changes to the quicklink or form Last Edit Date The date the quicklink or form was last edited Date Created The date and time the quicklink or form was originally added to the Ektron CMS400 NET library To preview a quicklink or form click the link at the bottom of the page Updating Default Template for Multiple Quicklinks WARNING This procedure is only necessary if Link Management is set to false in your web config file If if Link Management is set to true Ektron CMS400 NET automatically updates the template within the quicklink when content is moved See your system administrator for help with the web config file NOTE This action can only be performed on quicklinks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 139 Library Folder When content is moved in Ektron CMS400 NET its quicklink does not get changed After it is moved you need to update the default temp
345. imates how long it will take to move the files to your server If you do not want to wait that long to upload the files click Upload Later If you do this the images will not appear on the published Web content until you move them to the server You can also enter a Title for the image near the bottom of the screen If you do this text appears when the user reading the Web pages moves the cursor over the image Deleting a Picture lf you want to delete a picture follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the picture 2 Click the mouse to select the picture 3 Click the Cut button 4 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 521 Editing Images WebImageFX lets you select an image from the content edit that image and then insert the updated image into the content Editing consists of several functions available on the toolbar such as e brightening e rotating e changing the color depth e inserting text This section explains WeblmageFX Important WeblImageFxX is an external add on product available from Ektron Using WebIimageFX Choosing the Image If you double click an image it appears within WeblmageFX You can also right click the mouse and choose Image Editor from the menu that appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 522 Editing Images Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML
346. immediately See Also Submitted Content on page 652 and Approving Declining Content on page 81 If you are the next person in the approval chain the Approve button EZ becomes active You can click the button to approve the document Otherwise the members of the Approval chain must approve it While its status is Submitted you cannot edit it To save it under a different name click the yellow Save button H The Save As dialog appears Enter the new name in the Content Title field To save it in a different folder navigate to that folder and click Save Saving an Document under a Different Name or to a Different Folder 1 When you finish your edits click the Save As button kd Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 224 Using the Document Management Functionality 2 The following screen appears showing Ektron CMS400 NET s file hierarchy Navigate to the folder in which you want to place the document A Ca CMS Location http f192 166 0 215 CMS400Demo CJ cMs400Dema Developer Content Title Doc doc Save Os Type Word Document doc Cancel lf you want to create a new folder for the document click the new folder button E4 3 Enter a title for the document in the Content Title field 4 Click the Save button on the dialog Using the Toolbar to Edit an Office Document 1 Click the Open File button ta 2 The following screen appear
347. ing Page This path is relative to the site root For example 40 0Demo jobs aspx This URL path can be a static template path like the one mentioned above or a dynamic path such as wellness aspx id 40 amp wellness Hemophilia Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 427 Working with Menus Fas nics Template Link Note This field applies to content only It has no effect on other types of menu items such as images Also this field only affects content that dynamically references a content block such as cMS400Demo therapies aspx id 84 If the menu option is a template that includes content for example cMS400Demo news aspx the template you identify here is ignored If you want to apply a template to this menu enter the template here If you do all content on this menu uses this template when selected from the menu If you do not enter a template here content on this menu uses the template specified in its Quicklink Overriding the Template Link You can override the menu template for any content item on this menu and instead use the template specified in its Quicklink To do so follow these steps 1 Add all items to the menu See Adding a Menu ltem on page 429 Go to the View Menus option Click More Info Click the menu item you want to change a oS SP At the Link field change the value from Menu Template to Quicklink Link GuickLink Menu Templat
348. ing the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK to delete the menu NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Menu via Menus Module To delete a menu via its menus module follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 444 2 Move the cursor over the menu and click Delete NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with 3 Aconfirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 447 Working with Menus NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its links to content but has no effect on the content Deleting a Submenu 1 Access the View Menu page as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 444 Select the submenu Move t
349. ing window appears Click Run Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 246 Using Ektron Explorer File Download Security Warning Do you want to run or save this file Name EktronExplorer exe Type Application 5 64 MB From localhost While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer IF pou do not trust the source do not un or save this software Whats the risk Internet Explorer Security Warning Do you want to run this software Mame Ektron Explorer Publisher Ektron Inc 2 More options While Files From the Internet can be useful this File type can potentially harm vour computer Only run software From publishers vou trust What s the risk 7 The following window appears The default Explorer user name and password appear You would typically want to replace these with your Ektron CMS400 NET user name and password Ektron Explorer uses these values by default in your configuration See Also Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 247 Using Ektron Explorer Ektron Explorer InstallShield Wizard Ektron Explorer User Please enter a valid CMS400 username and password for the user you would like to use with your Ektron Explorer configuration Usemame amp Xplorer Password Install
350. ink ona Web Page on page 431 Click the circle next to External Hyperlink Click the Next button The Add New Item screen is displayed ae w hy Complete the fields as needed in Bc Title of the new external hyperlink menu item URL Link The URL of the external hyperlink For example www google com 6 Click the Save button H NOTE When adding an External Hyperlink menu item the URL does not get added to the library nor is an ID assigned to it So when you save the menu item it is not added to the CMS database nor can it be retrieved for future use Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item To add a submenu as a menu item via content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 429 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 430 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 431 Click the radio button next to Submenu The Add Menu screen is displayed Complete the fields using Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 as a reference 5 Click the Save button H Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 435 Working with Menus Adding an Item to a Submenu From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Select the menu 3 Find the submenu to which you want to add items Submenus have a folder icon next to them View In English Usj YLA
351. ion e Date form was submitted by site visitor For example your postback message may be Thank you Full Name for completing the Form Title gt When the postback message appears it looks like this Thank you Jay Kohler for completing the breakroom survey Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data The following section of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual explains how your administrator sets up the action page Working with HTML Forms gt Redirecting Submitted Form Data After your administrator follows that procedure he identifies a folder and hyperlink that you use to select an action page WARNING You must have the folder and hyperlink name from your administrator to complete this procedure To redirect submitted form data to an action page follow these steps 1 Go to the page on which you determine the form s response If this is a new form it is page 4 of the Forms Wizard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 147 Working with HTML Forms To modify an existing form select the form s folder then the form Next select Edit and click the Post Back Message tab 2 Select Redirect to an action page and forward form data Edit Content in Folder Content bo ba a nang ate 7 ic a a a aiiin hen AN i Ricci ee heer babes Me pe ania a psn tet Raat A gee eee E T ns Rin Sea E nc N CoRR CR na ESR RoR Gn et aan at aa Rais R Ri ca PAR
352. ishes all articles Each user has different permissions that correspond to their roles The example uses the following topics to explain a typical approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 85 Approving Declining Content Creating Content on page 86 First Approver on page 87 Second Approver on page 89 Creating Content The first step is to create content To create new content follow these steps 1 2 3 4 Log in to Ektron CMS400 NET as a SportsWriter Create content as described in Adding Content on page 45 Click the Submit button at the top of the window The content is in the approval chain The next user in the chain receives an email saying the content is ready for approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 86 Approving Declining Content Request for content approval RNY 157 File Edt View Took Message Help amp G e a X B _ Reply Reply Al Forward Prit Delete Previus text Addresses From Webmaster yourcompanv com Date Friday May 03 2002 4 16 PM To SportsE ditor yourdomain com Subject Request for content approval The content Red Sox Win World Senes has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submitted content block on the Web site htte7192 166
353. isions the number of rows and columns the size of the border the spacing between cells etc The following sections explain eWebEditPro XML s more advanced features Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 492 Copying from Other Applications You can copy information from most other Windows applications into eWebEditPro XML and retain the formatting from the original application In general copying from another application involves these steps Sign on to the application in which the information resides Select the information to be copied Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Go to eWebEditPro XML Press lt Cirl gt lt V gt to paste the selected information oR OD Note that you can only copy content not background information that generates content So for example you can copy the values in a spreadsheet but not the formulas used to generate those values Also copying dynamic fields from Microsoft WORD would retrieve the current value of the fields but not the variables that generate those values Its a good idea to experiment with copying from different sources to test the results Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 493 Finding and Replacing Text To find and optionally replace text on your Web page click the Replace button When you do the Find and Replace dialog box appears Find And Replace FiodWhet ff Replace With o P Match whole
354. ist item select it and press the Change button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 178 Working with HTML Forms Inserting a Calendar Field To insert a field that lets a site visitor select a date use a Calendar Field To do that follow these steps 1 Calendar Field Descriptive Hame Field Name Tool Tip Test Default value Validation Validation Error Message Place a Calendar field Fi onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 154 The following dialog appears Ho validation crcl Fields on the Calendar Field Dialog Fi I E a Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 184 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 179 Working with HTML Forms SS Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field enter it here For example if this value field collects a city and
355. istory from a Web page To access the history for content from a Web page follow these steps Sign in 2 Browse to the content whose history you want to view 3 Click the View History button E 4 The Content History window opens Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 100 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content The Content History Window _ Content DAS T ias Yiew Content History Yersion Published Date ee Last User To Edit Comment Title 21 of lofAOOS 12 16 22 PM Intranet Administrator Application 2 0 of 15 2005 12 16 22 PM Intranet Administrator Application i i arla 005 14 14 32 PM Intranet Administrator Application 1 0 015 2005 12 14 32 PM Intranet Administrator Application The View Content History window lists every version of the content available in Ektron CMS400 NET The window displays the following information for each version e version number See Also The Content Version Number on page 101 e agreen circle appears next to any version that was published On dates without a green circle the content was checked in but not published e date and time when a version was checked in or published e title of content e last user who edited content e comments entered by user to describe nature of changes made To view any version click its title When you do the Content History window appears for the selected content The Content Version Number Ektr
356. ite button 5 The Overwrite File screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 130 Library Folder Overwrite Library Item in Folder Content files Title Filename Ektron Partners and Customers CMS400ExamplefuploadedFiles ektron partners customers ro Please select a replacement file Current library item Preview Ektron Partners and Customers Description y Ba Geo cu 3 12 pt A W BZA Ye Click the Browse button A window lets you navigate to the new file Click the file then click the Open button You return to the Overwrite File screen with the path to the new file in the Filename field NOO o e Filename CMS300Sample uploadedFiles Punctuation Introducing Lis C Tech Fubs depttConventions Terminaloc Browse Please select a replacement file 8 If desired enter a Description for the new file 9 To preview the file before you copy it click Preview file name The file is previewed in a separate window Click the X button in the top right corner of the screen to close it and return to the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 131 Library Folder 10 To overwrite the current version of the file with this version click the Update button f 11 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer e x e WARNING You are about to overwrite a library file The filename of the local file wi
357. itted content View All Content Approval Content Meta Data A Alatusza MET Oantant The View Content Awaiting Approvals window appears listing all information necessary to decide whether to approve or decline the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 88 Approving Declining Content At the approval window the Sports Editor has several options Send content to next approver in approval chain Approve Ea ma oe 1 Send email to creator notifying him her that Decline E ai content was declined 2 Remove content from approval chain Invokes the editor From here the approver can change the content For demonstration purposes we ll choose Approve Second Approver After the content is approved the next approver in the approval chain receives an email saying that the content is ready for approval Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 89 Approving Declining Content Request for content approval W a re 5 x File Edit View Tools Message Help 2 p eg U Reply Reply Al Forward Prit Delete Previo ext Addresses From Webmaster yourcompany com Date Friday May 03 2002 4 19 PM To EditorInChiehi ourdomain com Subject Request for content aporoval The content Eed Sox Win World Seres has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workare
358. itted content and change its status to checked in Check out the content and make changes to it Note If you edit the content you need to re submit it to the approval chain See Also Staged Content on page 654 Go to previous window Ee View Staged Click the View Staged button to view the content that has not eg feb Published yet been published Click the View Published to view the content that is live on the Web site Marked for Deletion Content Content that is marked for deletion has been requested to be removed from the Web site by a user When content is marked for deletion it goes through the approval chain like content that is submitted for publishing When the content completes the approval chain it is deleted from the Web site See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 85 The table below describes the toolbar buttons Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 653 paon oem Joe T Delete Approve the deletion request Note If you are the last user in the approval chain the content is deleted when you click this Decline Refuse the deletion request This sends the content back into a checked in status Go to previous window Pending Start Date Content Content that is pending a Go Live date has been approved but its scheduled go live date and time have not occurred yet You cannot perform any action on content with a pending start date Staged Con
359. k Pings back any URLs in the blog post Images add images to a blog post You add images to a blog post the same way you add them to content See Also Adding a Library File to Content on page 133 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 345 Blogs PSS Blog Comments A Comments link appears at the end of the blog post The link includes a number in parentheses for example 3 This number denotes how many comments have been made Click this link to move to the comments page where you can read comments on the post and possibly enter your own Blog Roll Other blog sites that the blog s creator wants site visitors to view Blog Categories Categories associated with the blog If you click a category links to all posts associated with the category appear Calendar Indicates when blog posts were made This lets site visitors navigate your blog by clicking a day that has blog posts Blog Workflow The following table explains the workflow of a blog pm on e Phase 1 An administrator creates a blog in the Adding a Blog on Workarea During this phase he assigns page 347 blog categories creates a blog roll and decides how comments are handled Phase 2 A developer adds the blog to a Web form The Developer Manual using the blog server control He then section Introduction to publishes the form Ektron CMS400 NET Server Controls gt Blog Server Controls Phase 3
360. keywords document management web content management Test content management Search Data Part Number 4 Edit the metadata Note that e Required fields are red and marked with an asterisk You must place at least one response in such fields before you can save the metadata e Your system administrator may prevent you from editing a field In this case the field has a gray background and you cannot place the cursor there Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 75 Adding or Editing Metadata e Fields may appear in two columns In this case the system administrator provides a list of terms that you can apply to the content You can select terms from the list or enter free text One column is labeled Not Included and the other Included Move terms between lists by clicking the Add and Remove buttons Not Included Included wisiwyq editing cms rdbms content management web site publishing software nal Keywords e You may see alist of terms in one box and a field labeled Text to its right keywords document management J Te o With such a list you can add a new term by typing it into the Text field and clicking Add remove any term by selecting it and clicking Remove modify any term by selecting it It appears within the Text field where you can change it Then press the Change button restore the terms to their default settings by pressing t
361. ktron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 207 Working with HTML Forms 4 The New Form screen appears New Form e rae age penne a ars Nema nae pa TE 4 T ww th is mat a G m e e o ee ee Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for 5 mm Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey E1 Design a new survey Standard Poll Design a new poll Compose Email A NOTE When you choose Standard Poll or Blank Survey the amount of steps in the Forms Wizard changes from five steps to four steps This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Blank Survey You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it 6 Click the Next button 7 Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the survey within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the survey 8 Click the Next button 9 This screen lets you determine what happens after the site visitor completes the survey The choices are e Display a message See Composing the Postback Message on page 146 e Redirect to a file or page Identify a file or a page on your Web site that is launched when the visitor completes the form An example
362. l Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 517 Inserting Images To align Click this in the Alignment field The bottom of the picture with the Bottom Baseline baseline of the text This is the default alignment The bottom of the picture with the bottom AbsBottom of the text absbottorm Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment If you adjust the picture s width height border thickness and or alignment and later want to restore all of those settings to their original values click the Reset button Layout width 20 Height 20 Border Thickness fo Alignment Hot set bi L r f Note that you cannot selectively restore some settings the Reset button automatically restores all of them Adding Space around the Picture On the Picture Properties dialog box you can use the Spacing fields Horizontal and Vertical to add space around the picture You enter a number of pixels to determine spacing value Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 518 Inserting Images Spacing Horizontal Vertical The following graphic illustrates the effect of adding spacing to a picture This image has no vertical or horizontal space BS Ba This image has 20 preels of vertical space no horizontal space This image has 20 pels of horizontal space no vertical space BS BS This image has 20 pzels of vertical space and 20 prels of horizontal space Editing
363. l Worksheet_xls Location C Documents and Settings shughes1 Desktop N Bytes Transfered 7694 of 7694 KB Cancel When DM uploads the files they appear in the Workarea If you do not see a file you selected to upload check the following e your administrator allows the file type to be uploaded to DM e the Asset Types dropdown box is set to the type of file you are looking for Files upload to the correct category regardless of what is selected when you drag and drop them Drag and Drop File Uploading vs the New Content Menu Options e Drag and drop lets you add files quickly without having to fill in details The details can be entered later e A file added via drag and drop is submitted into the approval process for that folder e Drag and drop requires fewer mouse clicks You choose a folder use Windows Explorer to find the files and drag and drop them The files are then added to DM Alternatively by using the New Content Menu options you can add supporting information summary comment and metadata while uploading When adding files using the New Content menu options you can choose whether the files are published Submitted to the approval chain checked in or saved See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 219 This process requires more mouse clicks than drag and drop You choose a folder and document type browse to the folder where the files are located add the details and publish the files Ektr
364. l be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue Cancel 4 Click OK to delete the content Deleting Several Content Items in a Folder On the View Content Folder screen you can delete several content items at one time To do so follow these steps 1 Access the content folder that contains the content you want to delete 2 Click the Delete Content button CA 3 The Delete Contents of Folder screen is displayed Check boxes next to content items you want to delete Note Check off the box in the header cell to select all or deselect all Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 54 5 Click the Delete Content button L 6 A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue Checking for Broken Quicklinks The Check Links button locates all content that includes a Quicklink to the displayed content This feature is useful before deleting content because it informs you of every content item that will include a dead link after you delete the selected content You should then edit that content and remove or change the obsolete Quicklinks To use the link checker follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content whose links you want to check as described in Viewing Content on page 38 2 Click the Check Links bu
365. late called in the contents quicklink To update the default template for one or more quicklinks follow these steps 1 Inthe library access the quicklinks folder containing quicklinks you want to update 2 Click the Update Quicklinks button 3 The Update URL Link Template Quicklinks screen is displayed Check the quicklinks you want to update NOTE Check the box in the table header to select or deselect all 5 Inthe To text field enter the name of the template you want to apply to the selected quicklinks 6 Click the Update Quicklinks button to update the changes A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue The selected quicklinks are updated to use the specified template Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 140 Working with HTML Forms WARNING The functionality described in this section is not supported when using an Apple Macintosh for editing content Ektron CMS400 NET provides powerful online form capabilities allowing you to create an online dialog with visitors Now anyone in your organization not just a developer or Webmaster can create and deploy Web forms to capture visitor information Support marketing strategies by getting feedback on their needs Follow up on their interest in your products and services Register people for events Form capabilities include e Creating a form and its postback message e Creating polls and surveys for
366. lay menu options that are content e menu item the individual options on a menu can be any of the following content of any type library asset Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 421 Working with Menus external hyperlink link to a page outside your Web site submenu a link to another menu In the illustration below the menu on the right is a submenu It appears when the user hovers the cursor over Company Profile The right arrow indicates a submenu is available Access to the Menus Feature There are three ways to access the Menus feature e the Workarea by choosing the associated content folder then clicking View gt Menus e the Workarea by choosing Modules gt Menus e the Edit Menu option on the sample menu displayed above If you choose the first or second option you select a specific menu Then it appears on the View Menu screen For the third option the selected menu appears on the View Menu screen From the View Menu screen you can perform the following actions on a menu e Create anew menu e Edit its information for example the URL and template link e Translate it e Delete it e Add or remove items e Change the sequence of menu items Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 422 Working with Menus Edit menu items For submenus add remove items change sequence of menu items edit menu information
367. lays the menu in the selected language if it is available If a menu in that language is not available nothing appears Before creating or translating a menu its a good idea to create or translate all content that will be on the menu In this way you can link this content to the new menu However after creating a menu you can add new items to it Translating a Menu To translate a menu into any supported language follow these steps You can navigate to the menu via the Web site or from the Workarea Each procedure is described below By Navigating the Site 1 Sign on to Ektron CMS400 NET and select the language in which the menu currently exists Navigate to the page that has the menu you want to translate 3 Click the menu and the Edit Menu option Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 449 Working with Menus The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu 5 From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu Add select language a es a select language Danish German standard 6 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 Click the Save button Ey The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Yie Menu Italian menu iew In talian standard La
368. le To create the document under a different language click View gt Language and select the language Click New gt Office Documents The Insert New Document Object screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 216 Using the Document Management Functionality Insert New Document Object a E E x atte f Create New Microsoft Excel Chart Cancel Csscs en ee Microzott Excel Worksheet Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Microsoft Word Document Result lnserts a new Image Document object into your k document NOTE The list of object types is determined by the applications installed on your computer For example an MS Project file type only displays if MS Project is installed 7 Ifthe document does not yet exist check the Create New button Then select the type of document you want to create and press OK If the document already exists see Importing an Office Document on page 228 8 The application assigned to the document type appears within Ektron CMS400 NET 9 Enter a Title and add content to the document 10 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable 11 If desired add a summary metadata a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Summary on page 67 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60
369. le Dialog Boxes and Menus The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Insert Table Inserts a new table where the Creating a Table on page 555 cursor is currently resting Insert Row Creates a new table row above the Adding or Removing Rows and row in which the cursor is currently Columns on page 566 resting Insert Column Creates a new table column next to Adding or Removing Rows and the column in which the cursor is Columns on page 566 currently resting Insert Cell Inserts a cell to the left of the cursor in a table Delete Rows Deletes table row in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 566 Delete Column Deletes table column in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 566 Delete Cells Deletes the selected cells a Merge Cells Combines the contents of two or Merging Two Cells on page 595 more selected cells into one Split Cell Divides a cell into two Each cell Splitting a Cell on page 594 occupies one half the size of the Original cell Table Properties Displays and lets you edit table The Table Properties Dialog Box on properties such as the number of page 560 rows and columns cell padding and borders Cell Properties Displays and lets you edit cell The Cell Properties Dialog Box on properties such as width and page 562 alignment Ektron CM
370. le and affordable authoring solutions lt T1t le Keywords caontent document management web content manageme Management cms gt Gerson Description content Ektron s web Content Management and C Management software products manage web content and documents with wYSI SHTMLAHTML editors offering easy to use browser based web authoring anc zalitinns For wah antant mananamont and doaciimoant mananamont For more information see Entering Title and Keywords on page 79 e Metadata that identifies related Ektron CMS400 NET information for example another content item a collection or a ListSummary Then your Web site can display the related content whenever the source content item appears For example your Web site sells motorcycle helmets On a page that shows a particular helmet the left column lists a collection of motorcycle drivers who use that helmet Metadata is more fully explained through the following topics e Entering Custom Metadata on page 72 e Entering Title and Keywords on page 79 Entering Custom Metadata Your system administrator defines the metadata that can be added to content The metadata being collected can be customized for each folder When you create or update content you can define metadata using fields that the administrator specified Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 72 Adding or Editing Metadata NOTE In order to add metadata to
371. lect an area the entire image is copied Standard Toolbar Button Description Crop D Lets you create a new image If you are editing an image when you press this command you are asked if you want to save changes to it first By default a new image s bit depth is 24 but you can change it if desired using the color depth command See Also Color Depth on page 532 Standard Toolbar Button Description t Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 534 Editing Images Keeps selected area of an image removes everything outside that area To use the Crop command follow these steps 1 Select an area of an image that you want to keep 2 Press the Crop button t 3 Everything outside the selected area is removed Delete Standard Toolbar Button rad Description Removes a selected area of an image You must select an area before you delete it The deleted area is not saved for later pasting In contrast if you use the Cut command you can later paste the cut area Dimensions Standard Toolbar Button Description Lest you change an image s width and or height which are defined in pixels Maintaining Aspect Ratio Use this check box to change an image s size while maintaining its aspect ratio Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 535 Editing Images Pye Pyne pou J Maintain Aspect Ratio l rrm h 1 I rie on Aspect ratio i
372. linked to content when its state changed when it was approved etc You can view the task s history until the task is purged To view a task s history follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Task screen as explained in Viewing a Task on page 331 2 Click the History button H The history of task events appears example below ry for review today Date 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 Initiator Activity Information jedit Creation jedit Other Task Assigned to All Authors jedit Content Linked Plastic Molder 12313 jedit Start Date Changed Date Set to 17 Sep 2004 jedit Due Date Change Date Set to 22 Sep 2004 jedit Start Date Changed Date Set to 17 Sep 2004 jedit Due Date Change Date Set to 22 Sep 2004 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 341 Managing Tasks Task Module Toolbar The following table explains the toolbar buttons available while managing tasks Add Comment Add a comment to the task Adding Comments to i Tasks on page 337 Add Task Access the Add Task screen from the Task Module Toolbar View Content page on page 342 Add Task Access Add Task screen from task Creating a Task via module folder the Task Folder on page 319 Delete Task Delete a task Deleting a Task on page 340 Edit Task Edit a task Editing a Task on page 336 ce Update Save task information View Task View
373. list of choices You can learn how to create such a screen by following the directions below The following topics explain how to create a form e The Form Toolbar Options on page 154 e Inserting Form Fields on page 155 e Form Validation on page 158 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 153 Working with HTML Forms The Form Toolbar Options Creating form content is similar to creating a standard content item See Adding HTML Content on page 73 The big difference is a special toolbar illustrated below to make it easier to insert form elements m fab fab e e EE TA Select Button All toolbar options except the Select Button pull down also appear on a vertical toolbar to the left of the editor You can use whichever toolbar you prefer all options are the same Form Post back message Metadata Schedule Comment ABA oa Ye 60 Ae Normal 2010 pt A dm BZA m fab fab e e EE Ta Select Button z Place form elements heri imaa T i xj t Adding a Field to the Screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 154 Working with HTML Forms The major difference between the toolbars is how you add a field to the screen If you are using the horizontal toolbar place the cursor where you want field and click the toolbar button When using the vertical toolbar drag a button to the desired screen location Note
374. litting a Cell You can divide a cell into two If you split a cell each cell occupies one half the size of the original cell Row before split Ae Row after split Ce To split a table cell into two cells follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to split Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 594 Working with Table Cells 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table 4 Click Split Cell from the menu Insert Table Add Row Add Column Insert Row Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells spilt Cell Tahle Prarnerties 5 Two cells now appear where only one appeared before Merging Two Cells You can merge two cells into one If you merge two cells the new cell contains all of the information from both The new cell s width equals the sum of the two cells that were merged Cells Before Merge Cell After Merge To merge two or more cells follow these steps 1 Select the cells that you want to merge Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 595 Working with Table Cells 2 Click the Insert Table button E3 3 Click Merge Cells from the menu Word Wrap Word Wrap is a text formatting feature of tables It causes text to move down to the next line when the width of the characters on a line equals the column width For example if you set column width to 50 with word wrap turned on a table
375. ll be changed to match the existing filename This will ensure that web links to this library item do not break Continue 12 To overwrite the file click OK Library Link Searching Link searching indicates all content that includes a library link It is useful when you want to delete a library item With the click of a button you see all content that you need to update to reflect the change you are making Performing a Library Item Link Search To perform a library item link search follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 127 2 Click the Link Search button 3 A list of all content that references the library item is displayed You should edit that content before deleting the item Deleting Library Items You can delete obsolete items from the library By deleting an item you prevent users from adding it to their content A deleted hyperlink quicklink or form quicklink remains on your Web server so any existing links to them are not broken On the other hand if an item is a file or image the delete window displays an additional prompt Remove from the server that lets Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 132 Library Folder you remove the item from the server This feature is available to help reduce disk space taken up by these files Before removing an image or file from your server yo
376. llection Using the Collections Folder on page 404 Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder To access collections for a content folder follow these steps Click the content folder that contains the collection 2 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support features select the language by clicking View gt Language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 417 3 Click View gt Collections 4 The View Collections screen appears View Collections in Folder Human Resources Title ID Date Modified URL Link Main Jobs listing 2 04 Nov 2002 03 36 PM CMS300Sample hr asp The screen displays each collection created for the folder The following table explains each column Title The title assigned to the collection by the creator The ID assigned to the collection by Ektron CMS400 NET This number is used to store and retrieve the data to from the database Date When the collection was last edited Modified Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 403 Working with Collections The default template used to display the content To learn more about a collection and perform tasks on it proceed to Viewing a Collection on page 405 Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder To view all collections in all content folders follow these steps 1 From the Workarea click Modules gt Collections 2
377. log View Published blogs are viewable by any Blog properties standard permission site visitor View Only Add Not available Blog properties advanced permission Add Folders Edit Not available Blog properties advanced permission Edit Folders Delete Not available Blog properties advanced permission Delete Folders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 366 Blogs Permissions that affect this Permissions that affect this function when performed from function when performed from Web Site Workarea Published posts are viewable by any Blog properties standard permission site visitor View Only Not available Blog properties standard permission Add Not available Blog properties standard permission Edit Delete Not available Blog properties standard permission Delete Not available User must be member of blog s approval chain Comment Add Three blog folder properties control Blog properties standard permission Add how comments can be submitted from Web site See Conitrolling Blog Comments on page 377 Not available Blog properties standard permission Read Only Delete Not available Blog properties standard permission Read Only Not available Blog properties standard permission Edit Purge History Purge History works the same way for blogs as it does for the rest of the Ektron CMS400 NET See Also the Administrator Manual section Managing Content gt Managing Content Folders
378. looks like this If you turn Word Wrap off for the same table you get this result lf Word Wrap is turned off text stays on one line until the user entering table text presses lt Enter gt That keystroke causes text to move down to the next line By default all cells have the Word Wrap feature turned on To turn Word Wrap on or off for a cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu a Se The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click or off the Word Wrap checkbox and click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 596 Working with Table Cells Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns S panned Layout width W Word Wrap setting Cell Padding and Spacing Cell padding is the space between a cell s data and its border 1the pdoe y pixel Cell spacing is the space between a cell and surrounding cells e entire Assigning Cell Padding To assign cell padding to your table click the Cell Padding field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 597 Working with Table Cells Assigning Cell Spacing To assign cell spacing to your table click the Cell Spacing field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Ektron CMS400 NET Use
379. lor Java Applet Window signed OK To fill in the blanks enter letters and numbers from the keyboard select symbols from a palette or replace a blank with another template If you select something before inserting a template from the toolbar the selected symbol or expression is inserted into the first blank in the template Some people describe this as wrapping a template around a selection By nesting equation templates inside each other you can build up almost any equation Navigate around an equation using the mouse and arrow keys You can also cut and paste subexpressions to build up more complex expressions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 631 Working with the Math Expression Editor Mathematical Expression ee OO i ae eee 7 ra oyo B i Loss SE it a1 x lt gt ec VAa ay7 TAlalb A T r Properties Image Properties Font Size 12 File Name core i Unassigned Pe Description Sceeceee jy Unassigned Font Color Background Color 0K The Math Expression Editor templates and symbols are based on MathML MathML is a markup language for encoding math on the Web standardized by the World Wide Web Consortium W30 You can use the Math Expression Editor without knowing much about MathML However if you want to understand more read A Gentle Introduction to MathML As an example here is the MathML source code for a very simple expression X
380. lor of symbols in a highlighted expression denotes the role the content generation algorithm thinks it plays in your equation The color codes are as follows Syntactic role Fixing Problems Math Expression editor tries to automatically do the right thing to avoid content generation problems However it is still possible to Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 637 Working with the Math Expression Editor confuse the content generation algorithms The following explains more about correcting problems with content generation e Inadvertently separating an operator and its arguments with spurious expression groups In general the content generation algorithms treat expression groups as if they have parentheses around them Thus for example in the expression XTY The extra inner expression group leads Math Expression editor to treat this like x y that is x times y not x minus y To avoid this problem pay attention to the parent highlighting as you edit especially after cut and paste operations which can introduce extra expression groups Strange nesting of expression groups is also usually easy to spot with content syntax highlighting e Mismatched fences Math Expression editor needs to be able to match up right and left fence characters such as absolute value bars parentheses braces and brackets Therefore it is best to make sure that matching fences are always contained in an
381. low these steps 1 Click the Properties button E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 120 Library Folder 2 The Library Management screen appears Library Management m Image Extensions gif jpeg jpg bmp ong Image Upload Path This path is relative to the site CMS300Sample UploadediImages Physical Path cInetoub wwwrootCMeSs00Sample uploadedimages Verified File Extensions ppt odt xls dac File Upload Path This path is relative to the site CMS300S ample UploadedFiles Physical Path cINetpub wy wrootCe Ss s00Sample uploadedFiles Verified 3 The screen displays the following settings Le a Image Extensions File extensions of images that can be copied to the library folder For example gif and jpg Image Upload path The folder to which library images are moved when you Physical Path insert them into Ektron CMS400 NET File Extensions Extensions of files that can be copied to this library folder For example doc and pdf Flle Upload path The folder to which library files are moved when you insert Physical Path them into Ektron CMS400 NET Your system administrator controls these settings searching the Library You can search the library to find items when you only know some information about them For example you know that an image s name includes Ektron but dont know its filename or folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Ve
382. ly this section explains the following topics e Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML on page 613 e Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 614 e Section 508 Tables on page 616 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML Using Internet Explorer If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Internet Explorer move to eWebEditPro XML by pressing lt Tab gt until the cursor lands in the editor To move from the editor to the next field press lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt Using Netscape If the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Netscape your Webmaster needs to create custom toolbar buttons that let you move into and out of the editor This procedure is described in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 613 Section 508 Compliance Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse As explained in Customizing Your Toolbar on page 480 the eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more toolbar menus Menus have buttons that you click with the mouse to perform actions such as copying text This section explains how to perform those actions without using the mouse 1 With the cursor in the eWebEditPro XML editor press the application key Eh 2 A menu appears Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML
383. mary is illustration below unavailable If no summary is available check this box if you want the content to appear where the summary would If you do not check this box nothing appears in place of the summary Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 270 Using Ektron Explorer Option Description For more information see On Drag from You can drag content from Ektron Explorer to your CMS to Local computer When you do this by default you are Machine asked if you want change the content s status to checked out This field lets you predetermine what happens when you drag content to your computer Possible values are explained below Prompt for check out You are asked if you want to check out the content Check out Content is automatically checked out Note Checking out the content is the same as using the Work Offline feature See The Work Offline Option on page 230 Download Local Copy A copy of the content is placed on your computer but it is not checked out Once downloaded the file is disconnected from Ektron CMS400 NET Inserting External Files into Ektron CMS400 NET If you installed the Document Management functionality with Ektron CMS400 NET you can add files using the drag and drop technique common in Windows You can quickly and easily insert allowed file types into Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Using the Document Management Functionality on page 21
384. me OO Bogte OOO Visibility Comments Enable Comments Moderate Comments Require Authentication 5 Fill out the Properties tab according to the table below Field Description Blog Name The name of your blog as it appears in the content folder tree Blog Title The title of your blog as it appears on the Web site Visibility Choose whether the site is private or public Any site visitor can view the blog Private A site visitor must log in to view the blog This includes membership and Ektron CMS400 NET users Comments Choose how to handle comments by checking the appropriate boxes For more information see Controlling Blog Comments on page 377 6 On the Categories tab add categories to the blog For more information on blog Categories see Blog Categories on page 353 7 On the Blog Roll tab add blog sites that you want blog readers to visit For more information on blog rolls see The Blog Roll on page 358 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 348 Blogs IMPORTANT See Editing a Blog s Properties vs Adding a Blog on page 349 for additional properties that are only available when editing a blog s properties Blog Properties NOTE To be able to edit blog properties you must have permission to Edit Folders on the blog s Advanced Permissions screen By clicking the blog properties button f you can change the following groups of information about
385. me explorer The Diagnostic tab displays important information such as the server name application path client and server versions etc Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 266 Using Ektron Explorer Menu Option Description For more information see Language Change the folder s language When you do only content in that language within the selected folder appears in the right frame Note Click the browser s refresh button to see content in the new language see illustration below A CMS400 Example Microsoft Internet Ex File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help O Back gt x A 9 Js Using the Menu that Appears when No Folder is Selected To see this menu move the cursor to the left frame and right click the mouse without selecting a folder Manage Configurations Use Configuration Refresh New Workspace Options Properties The menu options may change depending on your permissions and the state of the folder The following table explains the options Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 267 Using Ektron Explorer Menu Option Description For more information see Manage Change the combination of user and server you Ektron CMS400 NET Configurations are using Administrator Manual section Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer Use Configuration Specify the combination of user and server you
386. me value rulename value Valid rule names and values are listed below Notation Rule name Legal values Default value vector interval rule interval vector interval list interval rule interval list interval mean moment rule mean moment mean Navigating with the Cursor Most of the time cursor movement in Math Expression editor works as you would expect However as the cursor moves through your equation its shape changes to give you extra information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 639 Working with the Math Expression Editor about the equation structure Spending a few minutes learning about the subtleties of cursor movement will have a big pay off in the long run Moving the Cursor The arrow keys move the cursor around in the equations In general the editor tries to move the cursor to the next valid insertion location in the direction of the arrow key For example in templates such as fractions and matrices the vertical arrows to move up and down In addition to the arrow keys you can also position the cursor with the mouse The editor tries to move the cursor to the insertion point nearest to a mouse click Usually Math Expression editor does a good job of judging when to ignore all the layers of MathML nesting and jump ahead to the next reasonable place to begin inserting characters again Sometimes however it can be difficult to navigate the cursor into a deepl
387. medtinhertted Path vabe Content Searchable Yes History Comment To minimize the left frame click the white X near the top of the left frame Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 26 DO 92 268 0 272 ACME The left frame remains minimized until you move the cursor to the left of the bar circled below View Content abc test lontent Title abe test Content ID 2 status Checked Out ast User To Edit admin ast Edit Date 11 May 2004 10 02 AM tart Date None Specified nd Date None Specified pate Created 11 May 2004 10 02 AM pproval Method Do Not Force All 4oprovers pprovals f jedit admin ML Configuration None Specified HTML Conter Path abe fontent Searchable es Using Autohide The Workarea screen also provides an autohide feature which quickly switches between full right frame view and combination right left frame view When autohide is turned on the left frame is minimized unless you place the cursor to the left of the bar circled above If you place the cursor there the left frame appears As soon as you move the cursor back to the right frame the left frame disappears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 27 To turn on the autohide feature click the push pin icon near the top of the left frame on To turn off autohide move the cursor to the left frame and click the push pin icon When you do the push pin
388. ments for Post screen an unapproved comment is indicated by a yellow border Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 379 Blogs Lc e Require Authentication Determines if a user must be authenticated that is logged in as a CMS400 user or membership user to add comments via the Web site Comments by default are fully controlled This means they are enabled must be approved and a site visitor must be authenticated to create them lf comments are enabled but not moderated any site visitor can add a comment If you don t want censorship this is the way to go WARNING While you can delete a comment at any time if comments are not moderated they appear on your site as soon as a site visitor submits them However to make sure comments on your site meet certain criteria moderate them The following topics are explained in this section e Comments on the Site on page 380 e Comments in the Workarea on page 382 Comments on the Site On the site comments for a blog post appear when one of the following blog post items is clicked e the Comments link e the Title of the blog post The comment page contains the original post any comments that have been added and a form to post new comments Depending on how the page is designed the calendar and blog roll can also appear Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 380 Blogs The Story of My L
389. mittedData gt lt SubmittedData gt lt Date value 2006 05 16T16 48 22 55 16 2006 4 48 22 PM lt Date gt lt Data form data id 245 gt lt ektpo111147812046505 gt Everything 4 lt ektpo111147812046505 gt Exporting a Form s Raw Data After you run a report you can export its data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file xls for further analysis If a form uses an XML structure each XML tag becomes a column header in the spreadsheet To export form data follow these steps 1 Access the View Form Reports screen for the report you want to export as described in Viewing Form Reports on page 184 2 Click the Export Reports button R 3 A File Download dialog box is displayed Choose the option that best suits your needs Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 190 Working with HTML Forms 4 After the data is exported you can analyze and modify the xls file Viewing Form Information You can view e information about a form e information about a form s properties Viewing a Form s Information After a form is created you can view its information in the Forms folder To view a form follow these steps Access the folder that contains the form you want to view Click the form you want to view The View Form screen displays Click the Form Properties tab Ye ey S The following table explains the information on the screen e Description Extended des
390. mmaries on your site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 67 Adding a Content Summary Creating Summaries There are two ways to create summaries e for anew content see Creating a Summary on New Content on page 68 e for an existing content see Creating a Summary for Existing Content on page 69 Creating a Summary on New Content 1 Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the content 2 Click the Add Content button The Add Content screen appears iW Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Start Date End Date Lae Apply Style Normal Verdana gt 2 10 pt jme i 3 Insert a Title and content See Also Adding Content on page 45 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 68 Adding a Content Summary Click the Summary tab 5 Enter summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen 6 When done click the appropriate button Creating a Summary for Existing Content Navigate to the folder that contains the content Click the content The View Content screen appears oY Click the Summary tab to enter or edit summary information for the content The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in
391. more Button information see Copies a selected area of an image Copy on page 534 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 525 Toolbar Command Brief Description Button paste as new Inserts copied image or area into a image new file Editing Images For more information see Paste as New Image on page 542 Reverses the most recent action Undo on page 552 mu redo Reapplies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo select Selects an area of an image You can then perform actions on the area such as blur and delete t crop Removes everything outside of selected area of an image Redo on page 545 Select on page 548 Crop on page 534 Deletes selected area of an image Delete on page 535 View Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description Button reset zoom ratio Displays image at full size For more information see Reset Zoom Ratio on page 545 Ca zoom in Increases an image s magnification Zoom In on page 552 ao zoom out Decreases an image s magnification Zoom Out on page 553 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 526 Editing Images Image Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see image info Displays information about an image pen dimensions Modifies an image s width and 7 height color
392. n 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 18 5 Click Install ActiveX Control 6 The following screen appears Click Install Internet Explorer Security Warning Do you want to install this software Name OFS400 Publisher Ektron Inc jg More options Install while Files From the Internet can be useful this File type can potentially harm vour computer Only install software From publishers you krust What s the risk 7 The following screen appears Close it when you see Ektron Asset Control in the top left corner of the screen circled in red below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 19 Ektron DMS400 Automatic Download and Installation When the installation complete successfully please clase this window a Ektron Asset Control ee If a small red X appears try downloading the client installation program and running it For additional assistance visit Ektron s support page Close Understanding the Smart Desktop The Smart Desktop is one of Ektron CMS400 NET s main screens To access it from wherever you are working in Ektron CMS400 NET click the button in the top left corner circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 20 G 927 768 G 2 77 ChE a4 Content The Smart Desktop consists of three sections illustrated below 1 x Smart Desktop for Application Administrator Smart Desktop 3 Task
393. n 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 509 Inserting Images Insert Media Item Microsoft To Select an Existing File Delete Pictures that you previously inserted appear on this list as do pictures inserted by other users connected to that server To insert a picture from the server follow these steps 1 Click the picture from the To Select an Existing File field that you want to insert 2 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box Click OK 5 The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the properties of the picture For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 514 e Setting a Border on page 515 e Aligning the Picture on page 516 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 518 6 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Deleting a Picture from the Server To delete a picture from the server select the picture and click the Delete button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 510 Inserting Images Inserting a Picture from Your Computer Use the lower left corner of the dialog box to insert pictures from your computer and any network folder available to your computer into the editor To Select a Local File Browse Enter a d
394. n click the Update button i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 457 Online Help Online Help Online help provides access to important and useful information about using Ektron CMS400 NET Help is provided in two formats e online help accessible from most screens by clicking the help button 2 it provides information about the screen you are currently viewing Online help is in HTML format so it opens in the browser you use to surf the internet After viewing a help topic you can browse to related topics as well as access a table of contents index and search to expand your quest for information See Also Accessing Online Help on page 458 e online manuals can be viewed searched and printed like a paper manual Online manuals are in a PDF format which makes it easy to navigate online and print See Also Accessing Online Manuals on page 460 Both formats provide the same information Choose the format that best suits your needs Accessing Online Help To access online help for any screen click the help icon illustrated below a New jc View Action E REUTER TORTO re ire HOU dd When you do an online help screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 458 Online Help a lt gt 5 gt Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Managing Content Folders Managing Content
395. n email is automatically sent to every user named in Step 1 above who has a valid email address in the User Information Screen The email s subject line is the form name The body of the email contains the following information for each field on the form e name e value submitted by user Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 183 Working with HTML Forms Viewing Form Reports If a form is set to store data in the database you can run a report that displays the submitted data To view a form report follow these steps Navigate to the folder for which you want to view the report The View Content screen appears Click the form you want to view If you do not see your form in the folder make sure the Content Type drop down box Is set to All Types or Forms 4 Click the View Reports button dia The View Forms Report screen appears 6 Enter report criteria using the following table as a reference ic I cn Start Date If desired specify a start date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or after the start date End Date If desired specify an end date The report displays only forms that were submitted on or before the end date Report Display Specify the format to display the report Select Legacy Specify the version of the form or poll for which to Report get a report Using this option allows you to see the results from previous polls and forms 7 Click
396. n the Forms Wizard changes from five to four This happens because the Assign Tasks step is removed 5 Choose Standard Poll You can click the preview icon amp next to any sample form to preview it before choosing it 6 Click the Next button Enter or edit the form s Title and Description e Title used to reference the poll within the Workarea required e Description an extended description of the poll Click the Next button 9 This screen lets you add a poll question and the possible choices NOTE This screen allows you to add eight choices If you have more than eight choices you can add them in the forms editor after clicking the Done button 10 Click the Next button 11 This screen informs you that you have finished entering the basic poll information and you need to click the Done button to further edit and view the form s fields Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 204 Working with HTML Forms 12 After clicking the Done button the form editor launches and allows you to edit the existing fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication NoTE From this screen you can add additional choices to your poll by right clicking on the choices field and clicking properties See Also Inserting a Choices Field on page 171 Replacing a Poll with a New Poll f
397. n use Microsoft Word s spell checking feature your Webmaster makes this decision lf your installation uses Word Word s Spelling amp Grammar window available from the Tools gt Options menu has settings that affect the operation of the spell check Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 501 Checking Spelling Track Changes User Information Compatibility File Locations View General Edit Print Save Spelling amp Grammar Spelling I Hide spelling errors in this document M Always suggest corrections T Suggest From main dictionary only I Ignore words in UPPERCASE I Ignore words with numbers i Ignore Internet and file addresses Custom dictionary custom DIC T Dictionaries Grammar Check grammar as you type Writing style I Hide grammatical errors in this document Technical Check grammar with spelling R Show readability statistics SINS Recheck Document Specifically you can set the spell check feature to check or ignore e words in UPPERCASE for example XYLOGIC e words with numbers for example mp3 e Internet and file addresses for example http www ektron com As an example if you check the box to the left of Ignore Words in UPPERCASE eWebEditPro XML s spell check does not consider words in all uppercase characters You also use the custom dictionary section of the screen to identify custom dictionaries for the spell check to
398. n which the cursor was resting when you pressed Insert Row If you add a column it appears on the left side of the table Adding or Removing Rows and Columns To add or remove rows and columns after you create the table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell from which you want to add or delete Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 566 Manipulating Your Table s Format 2 Right click the mouse A menu appears ort Eopy Paste Select All Insert Ao Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HTML View as HTML 3 Click the appropriate action from the menu For example to add a row click Insert Row NOTE If you are working with nested tables and you add or remove a column then undo that action and redo it you must press the redo button once for each cell in the row or column specifying Table Width When you create a table you can set its width by specifying one of the following e percentage of the window the table s width varies as a user adjusts the browser size e fixed number of pixels the table s width stays the same as a user adjusts the browser size You can also not set a width but instead let information you enter into the table s cells determine its width Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 567 Manipulating
399. n your Web site 3 A visitor to your site fills out and submits the form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 181 Working with HTML Forms 4 A task is created and assigned to users and groups you identified in Step 1 5 Any Ektron CMS400 NET user can view all tasks created via form submission in the Smart Desktop See illustration below See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 20 Content Awaiting Approval O Content Currently Checked Out 6 Tasks 2 Form Submission Tasks 1 View All Tasks Title ID State Priority Due Date Assigned To Assigned By Last 4dded Comr Blank Form Wot Started Normal Not Specified Everyone E admin E Not Specified Ektron CMS400 NET users and administrators can also view and update tasks assigned to them via the Task screens on the Smart Desktop See Viewing a Task on page 331 and Viewing a Task s History on page 341 Task Information The task created upon form submission has the following information Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 182 Working with HTML Forms wo pe Task Form Submission Task Category Category Task type Form Submission Task Description Data from form form name was received on date time form description Name of every field on the form value submitted by user into that field email Automatically Generated Upon Form Submission A
400. nd Date On Content cccccesseeseeeseenseeeseeneeeeeeenees 63 Setting Archive OptiOns cccccsssseeecessseeeeesseeeseenseessenseeeees 64 Adding a Content Summary ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseenenees 67 Creating SUMIMATLICS ccccccesseeeeceenseeeeenneeseeenseeseoeneesseennees 68 Adding or Editing Metadata ccssecsseceneeeeeeeeeeees 71 Entering Custom Metadata ccccccseesssssesseseeseenseseeeeeseesees 72 Entering Title and KeywordsS cccccesseeeseseeseesseeenseeseensenseees 79 Approving Declining Content cccssesesseessseseeseseees 81 Approve Decline One Content Item c ccsseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 83 Approve Decline Several Content ItemS ecceseeeeees 85 Example of an Approval Chainn scccsesssessesseeseeseseessensenees 85 Comparing Versions of Content 2 ccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 92 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content 00 99 Accessing Content HiStory ccccccessseeesesseeseeeeseesseeseeeees 99 The Content History WinNdOW cccsssseeessesseeeeeenseeseeeeeees 101 Restoring a Previous VersiON cccsccessesesseeseseeeeneeeseeeeseeeeaes 102 Comparing Historical Versions ccccssssseessssseeeseenseeseeees 103 Removing Applied XSLT sscssdecescewiitewsccecesducacarseavacecaveransseenenasi 103 Searching the Workarea ccssscsssseessecense
401. nd Date on Content on page 63 Web Alerts See the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual chapter Web Alert Feature Web Alert Feature on page 765 Templates This content s folder must have a default template It can also have additional template assigned When content is created the default template is automatically assigned to it If you want to change the template assigned to this content click this tab and choose a template from the dropdown list Editing Content Ektron CMS400 NET content can be in any of several statuses as described in Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 You can only edit content for which you have permission and in one of the following statuses e published e checked in e checked out by you e submitted for your approval NOTE Once you check out content it cannot be checked out by other users until you check it in Steps in Editing Content Accessing the Edit Content Screen from a Web Page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 49 To access the Edit Content screen from a Web page follow these steps Sign in Browse to the content you want to edit 3 Right click the mouse and select Edit eedit content ecreate or edit a summary e specify metadata for the content eenter or update a comment eenter or update start and end dates ereview and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chap
402. nd added to the top row of the comment table 5 Click the Close button Updating a Comment You can change a comment if needed To update a comment follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 625 Inserting Comments within Content 1 Access the View Comments window for the comment that needs to be updated 2 Click the Date Time link of the comment you want to edit Date Time Added By Comments ene e co pplication o IEHFI Administrator 2 A R Hii 004 09 54 AM now here s a comment on that cor Application ae here s my comment Administrator Y Comments Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt A Dea E 7 U TUFALI 3 The comment editor opens with the selected comment in it 4 Update the comment 5 Click the Update button to save the changes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 626 Working with the Math Expression Editor Click the Mathematical Expression button to display the Math Expression editor which lets you enter equations into Ektron CMS400 NET content The editor WebEQ Input Control is created by Design Science Inc For more information go to http www dessci com en products webed interactive inputctrl Atm Prerequisites for the Math Editor Sun Java VM 1 4 http java sun com j2se 1 4 2 download html e Recommended version 1 4 2 e Required version 1 4 Using th
403. ner EE E rere erry trae one te nen nn ener mene tren 159 Implementing a Form on a Web Page ccssseeeeeseeeeeneeeees 181 Assigning a Task tO a Form 2 ccsccceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseenenes 181 Viewing Form RePoOrts ccccesccseseceseeeeseeeesseeeaseeeeseeosseeneneens 184 Viewing Form INfOrmatiOn ccccccceeseeseeeeseseeeeseeeeseeeeneeeensees 191 Editing a FOM srascaa 197 Dele ung a se eho e cineca die cieuinaoteaaeennecececaaenestommstetecen eee cages 199 View Form TOOMDOR sieseccipmececcaceseseasenteccesnteccanaesencecenmmsseentenussiase 199 Creating Polls and Surveys ccccssseeccsssseeceesseeeseenseeseeees 201 Using the Document Management Functionality 210 Supported Types of Documents cccceeseeeeeseeeeenseneenees 211 SOCII ane a ene Re mene A nn see Se ene en ee eee eC aoe 214 Software Requirements cccsssececsssseeseesseeseeesseeseesseeseeenees 214 Working with Microsoft Office Documents ccsesss000 214 Working with Open Office FileS cccssssseessssseeeeeenseeeeeeneees 231 Working with Managed Files ccscsecsssseeeeseeseeeseneeseeees 234 Importing Files via Drag and Drop scccsessesssseeeeeeeeneeseeees 237 Document Workflow cresdesasucicsaninidastindactiidusirauscavannsvannaraemnecennessians 240 Viewing Documents within the CMS cccssssseeseeseees 240 Deleting a Document siictiavceiacaiiacairecsn
404. ng Border Color A table border is the line that separates the table from the rest of your Web page By default table borders are gray You can change the color of table borders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 577 Manipulating Your Table s Format table border Waris checked cell border lf you want a table s border to disappear set it to the same color as the page s background color This technique is often used to format text on a Web page Assigning a Cell Border Color Each cell also has a border that separates it from the other cells and the table border By default a cell s border color matches the table border However you can individually change a cell border color see Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 584 To assign a color to your table s border click the Border Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Border Color arsaa aa Border Size 5 When you click that field a color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the table s border Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 578 Manipulating Your Table s Format Basic colors EE ERED Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question
405. ng Spelling as You Type on page 498 e Checking Spelling Upon Demand on page 499 e Spell Checking Selected Text on page 500 e Setting Spell Check Options on page 501 Disabling Script Blocking If Norton Antivirus 2001 is installed on your computer you need to disable script blocking in order to use the spell checker If you do not disable script blocking an error message will appear whenever you check spelling To do this follow these steps 1 Launch Norton Antivirus 2001 2 From the first window click Options 3 On the next window click Script Blocking 4 On the script blocking window uncheck Enable Script Blocking 5 Press OK Checking Spelling as You Type You can have the editor check spelling as you type To turn on the spell check as you type feature click the automatic spell check button 5 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 498 Checking Spelling When you click the button the spell checker reviews every word in the file A wavy red line appears under any word whose spelling is not found in the system s dictionary The spell checker continues to review each word as you type it marking any words not in the dictionary NOTE Depending on the speed of your computer there may be a short delay between the time you type an incorrect word and when the wavy red line appears Also the spell check does not check a word until you enter a space
406. nges to the form s content lf needed click the Postback Message Metadata Schedule Comment or Web Alerts tab to edit that information Click a workflow button Submit for Publication or Publish Editing a Form s Properties See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 192 Mailto or Database Form The Forms feature lets you create a mailto or a database form to use on your Web site When creating or editing a form you must specify the type of form you are creating The options are Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 198 Working with HTML Forms e Send it via email e Store it in a database e Send it via email and store in a database See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 192 for information about toggling this option on and off Advantages of a Mailto Form By creating a mailto form any email generation is done on the server side not on the client This means that site visitors can submit email whether or not the client has email software Storing Form Data in a Database By storing form data in the Ektron CMS400 NET database you can keep information submitted by site visitors and view reports on that information You can also export the form data to a spreadsheet Deleting a Form You can easily delete forms that are no longer needed NOTE Deleting a form also deletes its associated content and information To delete a form follow these st
407. nguage ID URL Link 9 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 429 If adding content you can only insert an item in the selected language 10 Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc These capabilities are described in this chapter By Accessing the Menus Report Screen 1 From the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus 2 Click the menu you want to translate 3 The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 450 Working with Menus 4 From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu Add selectlanquage Ms es a a selectlanquaqe Danish German standard 5 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 Click the Save button M The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Yie Menu Italian menu In italian standard Title Language ID URL Link fore Info 8 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 429 If adding content you can only insert an item in the selected language Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc Creating a Menu in Any Language To create a menu in any language follow these steps
408. nother application The Clean Source option removes unnecessary HTML tags ensures that all tags begin and end properly and maximizes the page for efficiency As a result the page should be error free and load more quickly in a browser Also the appearance of clean HTML is more consistent when viewed in different browsers To clean your HTML follow these steps 1 Right click the mouse 2 Click Clean Source from the menu 3 eWebEditPro XML cleans your Web page s HTML content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 611 Working with HTML Inserting Content from MS Office If you paste text into eWebEditPro XML from a Microsoft Office 2000 or higher application such as Microsoft Word the following window appears Clean HTML Code c HTML code generated by Office 2000 has been detected There iz excessive HTML code that may prevent you from changing test format Tou may clean the HTML code later by right clicking and selecting Clean HTML Code Do pou want to clean the HTML code now For best results click Yes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 612 section 508 Compliance This section explains how eWebEditPro XML complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act a law enacted by the United States government that requires Federal agencies to make their electronic and information technology accessible to people with disabilities Specifical
409. ns width Height Border Thickness fo Alignment T Reset W Maintain 4gpect Ratio Spacing Horizontal fo fo Vertical You can also access this dialog box to modify a picture after you insert it To do this follow these steps 1 Click the picture 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Picture from the menu If you see the first dialog box proceed to Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 508 If you see the second dialog box proceed to Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box on page 512 Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box When the first Picture Properties dialog box appears click the Select New File button When you do the Insert Media Item dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 508 Inserting Images This box and lets you insert a picture from your computer and any network folder available to your computer or from the Web server to which your computer is connected Both choices are described below Insert Media Item Microsoft Internet Explorer To Select an Existing File File Information Mot Available Delete 2 Preview To Select a Local File Browse Enter a description for the file A JK Cancel Inserting a Picture from the Server The top left corner of the dialog box Illustrated below lists the pictures on the Web server Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Versio
410. nsert a table 2 Click the Insert Table button 3 3 Click Insert Table from the menu Insert Table Inzert A or Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells Menge ells Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties 4 The Insert Table dialog box appears 5 Edit the fields in the dialog box as needed Then click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 557 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus This section explains the menu options and dialog boxes you use to manipulate tables and cells In most cases you are referred to another section that describes the feature in more detail This section explains e The Insert Table Menu on page 558 e The Table Properties Dialog Box on page 560 e The Cell Properties Dialog Box on page 562 e The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 563 The Insert Table Menu You access the Insert Table menu by clicking on the Insert Table button while the cursor is inside a table NOTE Before you click the button make sure the table is not selected that is the table is not surrounded by small boxes When you do the following menu appears EJ Insert Table Tc Insert Aow Inert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells sa Menge ells Split Cell a Table Properties sta Cell Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 558 Tab
411. nsion such aS my test workspace ews They are stored in C Program Files Ektron Ektron Explorer Explorer configuration name For example C Program Files Ektron Ektron Explorer JimB To move them to another computer create a new folder in the C Program Files Ektron Ektron Explorer folder The new folder s name must match the user s Explorer configuration name Then copy the ews files into it Deleting a Workspace 1 Select a Workspace 2 Right click the mouse 3 Select Delete Workspace Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 277 Using Ektron Explorer Renaming a Workspace 1 Select a Workspace 2 Right click the mouse 3 Select Rename Workspace Using Workspace Folders A Workspace folder lets you organize CMS content in a way that s meaningful to you regardless of its organization within Ektron CMS400 NET NOTE You can also access content from its original location A Workspace folder does not contain a copy of the original item it s merely a shortcut to it For example assume the Ektron CMS400 NET folder structure is organized according to departments marketing sales administration engineering etc But you want to organize content according to product So if your company sells robot models 1000 2000 and 3000 you create a workspace folder for each product then place all product related content in the appropriate folder You can create as many Workspaces as you
412. nt screen buttons 47 responding to fields 47 tabs 48 address email user editing 455 AddSubMenu 436 adjusting number of items 290 alignment cell 591 image 516 table 572 text 475 text remove toolbar button 478 Apple see macintosh approval chain example 85 approvals toolbar button 56 approve all toolbar button 56 button floating toolbar 4 workarea toolbar 56 content 81 one content item 83 several content blocks 85 approving file document management feature 241 archived content toolbar button 56 archiving definition 64 options 64 restoring archived content 66 assign task button floating toolbar 4 auto hide feature of Smart Desktop 27 B background color applying to text 474 cell applying 585 deleting 586 removing from text 474 table applying 574 deleting 575 background image cell deleting 588 inserting 587 table deleting 577 inserting 576 bidirectional editing 476 blogs adding 347 categories 353 adding 353 editing 354 removing 355 comments in the Workarea 382 on the site 380 overview 377 deleting 368 overview 343 posts adding 373 deleting 376 editing 375 made from the Web site 369 made from the Workarea 371 overview 369 properties 349 roll 358 assigning link 359 editing 362 link removing 363 searching 369 setting style sheet 352 smart forms used with 358 tagline 351 update service 352 visibility setting 348 workflow 346 blur WeblmageFX command 528 bold toolbar option 474 bookmark
413. nt to Expire Report NOTE The number to the right of each category lists the quantity of content items in that category for you When you click an item up to five content items in a category appear To perform tasks on that content and to view additional content in that category click the category lf you select a folder from the left frame the right frame displays content in that folder If you select content from the list information about it fills the right frame e The top left frame displays the folder tree for the Smart Desktop folder which has two subfolders Tasks See Managing Tasks on page 317 Content Reports see Content Workflow Reports on page 116 e The bottom left frame displays the top level folders in Ektron CMS400 NET Your display may be different depending on whether you are an administrator Content folder see Working with Folders and Content on page 31 Forms folder see Working with HTML Forms on page 141 Library Folder on page 117 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 22 Modules see Working with Collections on page 401 Working with Menus on page 420 and Working with Calendars on page 292 Private Content amp Memberships section of the Managing Users amp User Groups chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual Settings folder which includes Updating Your User Profile on page
414. ntent on page 81 Entering Tithe and Keywords After you create or update content it is typically published to the World Wide Web WWW Programs that search the Web such as Google look at a page s title and keywords to determine if they should return your Web page with their results To improve search results Ektron CMS400 NET provides two fields within Metadata by default NOTE Your system administrator may enable or disable these fields for each folder e Title appears on the search results screen to further define your Web page 4 Adding Metadata to a New Content Block ficrosoft Internet Explorer appear on the j lt Title gt aAdding Metadata to a New Content Block lt Title gt Copyright 2002 Ektron T iii meere Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 79 Adding or Editing Metadata e Keywords are searched by leading search programs along with the page s title After content is published to the Web site you can view the page source to see its metadata Below is the source of a sample Web page E www ektron 1 txt Notepad File Edit Format View Help HTTP EQUIV Content Type CONTENT text html charset 150 8859 L gt kmeta name robots content index follow kmeta name rewisit after content 15 days gt EMETA JHTTP EQUIV Imagetoolbar CONTENT no gt ETitlegektron Inc web Content Management and Document Management witt exible
415. ny Words any word in the Keywords field Any Word on page 110 Exact Phrase all words in the order specified in the Keywords Exact Phrase on field page 110 Match Partial Words any part of any word in the Keywords field Contains Match Partial Words on page 110 10 Click Next A new screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 284 Using Ektron Explorer amp Create Smart Folder Web Page Dialog Step 4 of 5 Date Created between DOO ma ag and sd ma ag Date Modified between e a bs and a ag Use this screen to enter additional search criteria of created or modified date range For example the Smart Folder should only contain content created within the last 30 days To select a date click the calendar icon When a calendar appears select a date Next the date appears in the field but is display only You can only change it using the calendar To delete a date click the delete icon Additional information about entering these date ranges appears in Learn More About the Created Modified Date Screen on page 287 11 Click Next A new screen appears Create Smart Folder Web Page Dialog Step amp of 5 Last Editor s Last Hame Status Filter If you want the Smart folder to contain only content that was last edited by one user enter that user s last name 12 If you want the Smart folder to contain content in only one s
416. ny link to open the documentation or Web page NOTE Your computer requires an internet connection to access the help page on Ektron com Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 460 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is a browser based Web content editor designed for dynamic Web sites It lets you create and publish your own Web content in any language supported by the operating system and your Web site More specifically eWebEditPro XML lets you perform Web page editing functions such as copy content from any Windows based application use Microsoft Word to edit Web content cut copy and paste find and replace text check spelling edit an image change font style size attributes bold italics underline and color begin lines with bullets or numbers adjust indentation right center or left justify text and images add a bookmark hyperlink image or table view your text as WYSIWYG or HTML code insert or clean HTML source code You gain access to these functions either from the toolbar at the top of the editor window or from a menu that appears when you right click the mouse inside the editor Using eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is like many other word processing applications You type text and then use toolbar buttons illustrated Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 461 below and menu options to change the text s appearance or
417. nyone visiting the page For example you are customizing a page for all site visitors and want to temporarily hide a content item To minimize a content item click the minimize button on the personalization menu circled below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 398 Personalizing a Web Page MainRightZone What are the symptoms E The symptoms of type 1 diabetes are often subtle but they can After you minimize the button changes to a restore button circled below Click it to restore the content MainRightZone What are the symptoms P The Page Catalog lf your Webmaster has placed a Page Catalog on your personalization page it only appears after you enter Add Content mode click Personalize gt Add Content The Page Catalog looks something like the following Select the content control you would like to browse Ektron Catalog Part 73 Page Catalog 1 Ektron Catalog Part Content Block Control C Calendar Control Collection Control C Blog Control Form Block Control Threaded Discussion Control ListSummary Control sie Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 399 Personalizing a Web Page You can do two things from the catalog area e Add to any Web Part Zone items that have been deleted from other Web Part Zones e Add a type of content to any Web part zone As you can see from the illustration above you can
418. ocument in so you and others can continue to edit it Publish or submit for Submit document into approval chain publishing Upon approval publish content to Web site Save to DocServer Save recent changes Use to save latest changes before continuing Work Offline Save file to local computer See Also The Work Offline Option on page 230 Creating a Microsoft Office Document from the Document Management Toolbar Ektron CMS400 NET provides a Document Management toolbar that plugs into any Microsoft Office application supported by your DMS See Supported Types of Documents on page 211 After you create or edit a document in Office use the toolbar to save it to Ektron CMS400 NET and later to edit it You don t need to sign on to or learn how to use Ektron CMS400 NET The graphic below illustrates the Document Management toolbar within Microsoft Word Like other Office toolbars it can be moved to any location Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 220 Using the Document Management Functionality Gj Announcements doc Microsoft Word T i File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table WebWorks W aa a TTTS a aaa a aaa aiaa aaa aml aa The following table explains the toolbar buttons Button Description For more information see Save document to CMS400 NET Using the Toolbar to Save an Office Document to Ektron CMS400 NET on page 223 Save document under a differ
419. ocuments within the CMS on page 240 e Deleting a Document on page 241 e Approving Documents on page 241 e Adding Documents to Collections and Menus on page 241 e Document Reports on page 241 Supported Types of Documents e Microsoft Office 2000 or later documents Word Excel Powerpoint Project Publisher Visio etc e All Open Office extensions odf odt odp odg ods odb e Managed files any Windows executable file such as zip files PDFs txt files graphic files such as gif and jpeg etc NOTE The file types that can be uploaded are determined by your administrator If you try to upload the wrong type of file the following error message appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 211 Using the Document Management Functionality File Type Not Supported Only file types supported are doc xds ppt pdf gif jpg jpeg txt log vsd dot zip cwf wma wav avi mp3 rm mv ra mov odt odf odp odg ods Microsoft Office and Open Office Documents You can edit any Microsoft Office or Open Office file within the Content tab just like an HTML content block The host application s toolbar appears below Ektron CMS400 NET s tabs on the Edit Content screen Edit Content a eee fee Title English U 5 4 M Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Content Metadata Web Alerts File Edit View
420. of a file is a white paper a common file format is PDF that the visitor requested Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 208 Working with HTML Forms An example of a page is one that lets the visitor download your product e Redirect to an action page and forward form data See Redirect to an Action Page and Forwarding Form Data on page 147 e Report on the form See Making Form Results Available to Site Users on page 149 10 Click the Next button 11 This screen informs you that you have finished entering the basic information about the survey and you need to click the Done button to enter the survey s content This procedure is described in Creating a Form s Content on page 152 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 209 Using the Document Management Functionality WARNING The functionality described in this section is not supported when using an Apple Macintosh for editing content The Document Management Functionality DM lets you import Microsoft Office files Open Office files as well as most other kinds of files into Ektron CMS400 NET Non Office files are known as managed files Collectively these files are Known as documents After being saved in Ektron CMS400 NET documents can be updated and tracked like HTML and XML content If you re familiar with how that content is handled most of what you know also applies to documents Fo
421. older 423 via Menus module 429 adding to toolbar 481 appearance to content contributor 420 to site visitor 420 changing orientation 488 compared with collection and List Summary 418 creating 485 in any language 451 definition 420 deleting 447 editing 438 via content folder 438 via menus module 439 via navigation link 439 icons 4 items adding content block as 432 external hyperlink as 434 library asset as 434 submenu 435 to submenu 436 via content folder 429 via modules folder 430 via navigation link on Web page 431 definition 421 deleting via content folder 448 via menus module 448 editing via content folder 441 via menus module 442 via navigation link 442 rearranging 446 moving from toolbar 487 multi language issues 449 rearranging on toolbar 485 removing from toolbar 481 structure 421 submenu definition 422 template link field 428 translating 449 URL link field 427 viewing via content folder 443 via menus module 444 via navigation link 445 merge cell toolbar button 477 merging cells 595 metadata definition 71 Microsoft Word editing in 503 editing XML documents 504 uploading image from 504 multi language menus 449 N number toolbar option 474 numbers in words spell checking 501 O objects absolute positioning 475 Office 2000 inserting content from 612 Office documents creating 216 document management feature 212 editing properties 218 importing one 228 open file toolbar button 478 Op
422. ollow these steps on Sign in Browse to the content you want to view Click the Properties button E Continue reading from The View Content screen appears on page 40 reading from The View Content screen appears on page 40 Viewing Content from the Workarea 1 2 Navigate to the folder that contains the content as explained in Viewing a Folder on page 33 The icon to the left of the View option indicates the type of content being displayed Possible icons are described below All types jal yp a HTML form or survey ffice documents Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 38 Managed files Open Office To change the type of content being displayed click View then select a content type from the menu options a HTML Content HTML Form Survey Office Documents 4 Managed Files AF Multimedia Open Office 3 If your system supports more than one language you can select an edition of the content in a particular language via the View gt Language menu option illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 39 tus Date Modifier 3 14 2006 9 3 27 2006 9 estecon E HTML Form Survey a Office Documents Open Office E Language E Menus Afrikaans 4 Collections English U S Archived Conte 2panish Traditional Sort 4 Click
423. olor to your table click the Background Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color W Unassigned When you click that field a color dialog box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the background of the table Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 574 Manipulating Your Table s Format Basic colors EE ERED Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Deleting a Table s Background Color To delete a table s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background t W Unassigned Background Color tg tt I Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 575 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying a Background Image for a Table If you want a background image to appear in all table cells use the Background Image field of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned Background Image Select Image Y Your Webmaster determines which images are
424. om it select an ending time for the event Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 306 Working with Calendars a Display the times Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end for the event times illustrated below company meeting Locationimontreal room Start 1 00 PM jEnd 2 00 Pim The time also appears on the event detail if this box is checked min Company meeting Friday April 01 2005 Location Montreal Room Start 1 00 PM End 2 00 PM Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For example www ektron com To link to content on your Web site click the library button fi This type of link is known as a Quicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content The last published version of linked content appears If content has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink the title of the selected content replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Launch link ina Check this box if you want the Web page or Quicklink specified in the new browser Hyp
425. om the Favorites Folder To remove any folder from the Favorites folder follow these steps Select the folder Right click the mouse A menu appears ee E Click Remove from Favorites The Workspace Ektron Explorer s Workspace lets you organize CMS content in a way that makes sense to you regardless of its folder location with Ektron CMS400 NET Each Workspace provides two kinds of folders that let you realize these benefits Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 276 Using Ektron Explorer Workspace Icon for Description For more information see folder type folder type Workspace folders os Let you drag and drop desired Using Workspace Folders on content page 278 Smart folders Retrieve content based on Using Smart Folders on ia criteria you define such as page 280 folder location keyword search and content status You can also drag and drop files directly into a Workspace And you can create as many Workspaces as you wish to accommodate your organizational needs Your Workspaces are unique to you and your computer If another person uses your computer he will not see your Workspaces Similarly if you sign on to Ektron Explorer using the same configuration on another computer you will not see your Workspaces IMPORTANT You must be connected to Ektron CMS400 NET to use the Workspace Distributing your Workspace Files to Another Computer Workspace files have an ews exte
426. omer s sole and exclusive remedy is repair of all or any portion of the Software If such remedy fails of its essential purpose Customer s sole remedy and Ektron s maximum liability shall be a refund of the paid purchase price for the defective Products only This limited warranty is only valid if Ektron receives written notice of breach of warranty within thirty days after the warranty period expires 5 Limitation of Warranties and Liability THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE SOLD AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE MERCHANTIBILITY DESIGN OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE NO WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS OFFERED EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4 ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED NEITHER COMPANY NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL LOSS OF DATA OR USE OF DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER OR ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT HOWEVER CAUSED WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY BREACH OR REPUDIATION OF CONTRACT TORT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF COMPANY OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS 6 Miscellaneous This License Agreement the License granted hereunder and the Software may not be assigned or in any way transferred without the prior written consent of Ektron This Agreement
427. on CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 239 Using the Document Management Functionality Document Workflow A document proceeds through the same workflow as any other type of content A diagram is below Check In Edit Approval Chain Publish to Web site See Also IHH e Viewing Documents within the CMS on page 240 e Deleting a Document on page 241 e Approving Documents on page 241 e Adding Documents to Collections and Menus on page 241 e Document Reports on page 241 Viewing Documents within the CMS To view a document follow these steps 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the document s folder Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 240 Using the Document Management Functionality 3 From the View Content screen click the document 4 The View Content screen for the document appears Deleting a Document WARNING Only users with Delete permissions for a document s folder can delete content within it You can only delete a document if its status is Checked In or Approved To delete a document follow these steps From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the document s folder 2 3 From the View Content screen click the document 4 The View Content screen for the document appears 5 Click the Delete button 7 Like any type of content a document must go through the approval c
428. on CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 569 Manipulating Your Table s Format Insert T able Size Bows 2 2 Columns Layout 100 C Not Specified i Percent i Pixels ri ee E ener te P Specifying Table Width by Pixels Specify table width by pixels if you want the table to remain the same size if a user resizes the browser For example if you specify that a table is 610 pixels wide and the user s browser is set to low resolution 640 x 480 pixels the table occupies the full width of the browser when it is maximized If the user resizes the browser so that it only occupies the left half of the screen only the left half of the table appears A scroll bar appears at the bottom of the browser The user must move the scroll bar to see the rest of the table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 570 Manipulating Your Table s Format yF Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help Peles diene cre EEN etscape If you set table width by pixels do not set it to more than 610 pixels Otherwise the table will not fully display on a monitor set to low resolution 640 x 480 Setting Table Width by Pixels To specify table width by pixels choose Pixels in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the number of pixels at Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 571 Manipulating
429. on CMS400 NET assigns a unique number to each saved version of a content block The number is increased by one tenth if the content is checked in but not published If the content is published the next whole number is assigned Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 101 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content For example if the current version is 1 0 and you check in that content the new version is numbered 1 1 If the next user who edits that content publishes it the new version number is 2 0 lf the content is purged the numbering scheme restarts with the content that remains in the database The Detail History Window After viewing the View Content History window you can click any version to see the detail for it The detailed History window has two sides e The left side redisplays the information in the content history window See Also gt The Content History Window on page 101 e The right side displays the selected version of the content After viewing a version of content you can perform these actions on tt Restore Restore historical version of Restoring a Previous content Version on page 102 View Difference Compare historical version to Comparing Historical current version Versions on page 103 View History View summary list of all versions The Content History Report ae Window on page 101 Remove XSLT Remove XSLT applied to XML Removing Applied XSLT on XML Content
430. on task to view it of the following states Add a task e not started active Sort tasks by Task Type awaiting data Sort tasks by column on hold reopened pending Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 332 Managing Tasks Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Assigned To Me All open tasks assigned to you Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned By Me All open tasks you assigned to yourself or Click on task to view it others Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Created by Me All open tasks you created Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned to User All open tasks assigned to a user you Select any user and view select all tasks assigned to that user To do so select new user from Assign to User drop down list and click Get Tasks Click on task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Not Started All whose state is Not Started Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 333 Managing Tasks ic Displays these tasks Active All whose state is Active Awaiting Data All whose state is Awaiting Data On Hold All whose state is On Hold All whose state is Pending All whose state is Reopened Complete
431. one Highlight Color Adds a color Highlight to text Button Sb Menu Format gt Highlight Color Keystroke None Color Choose the color of the text Button Menu Format gt Color Keystroke None Superscript Button None Make text appear in Superscript Menu Format gt Superscript Keystroke None Subscript Button None Make text appear in subscript Menu Format gt Subscript Keystroke None Strikethrough Button None Make text appear with a Strikethrough Menu Format gt Strikethrough Keystroke None Remove Formatting Button None Removes the formatting of text and Menu Format gt Strikethrough returns it to the default color and style Keystroke Control Space Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 664 Format Painter lt f Paint the formatting of selected text to a Button new piece of text Menu Format gt Format Painter Highlight the text that has the formatting you want to copy Next click the Format Keystroke Control C Painter button Then click the text where the formatting is to be applied Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 665 Index 508 compliance 613 A about eWebEditPro box 475 478 absolute positioning of objects 475 add button calendar event 56 library items 56 task 56 workarea toolbar 56 column toolbar button 477 content 45 block button 56 folder button 56 row toolbar button 477 add conte
432. ons Display Thumbnail Previews F Display Content in preview when Summary a i unavailable On Drag from CMS to Local Machine Prompt for Check Out Check Out Download Local Copy C Folder Options Option Description For more information see Display Favorites Determines whether folders appear under Adding a Folder to the Folder Favorites Favorites Folder on page 276 Display Recently Determines if the Recently Viewed folder appears Recently Viewed Content on Viewed Folder page 288 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 269 Using Ektron Explorer Option Description For more information see Size of Recently Maximum number of content items that can Recently Viewed Content on Viewed Folder per appear in the Recently Viewed folder page 288 CMS Content Options Display Thumbnail Check this box if you want to see a miniature Preview rendition of Ektron CMS400 NET content example below The thumbnail is resizable See Changing the Thumbnail Size on page 254 If this box is unchecked a generic icon represents all Ektron CMS400 NET content If you display thumbnails the page load time is considerably longer Regardless of this value non Ektron content is represented by the generic icon shown above and is not resizable Display Content in The right side of Ektron Explorer displays the preview when content s summary information if it exists See Sum
433. ontains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 304 2 Click the event you want to delete 3 The Edit Calendar Event screen appears 4 Click the Delete button i 5 A confirmation message appears 6 Click OK Deleting a Recurring Calendar Event You can delete a single event in a recurring series or all events in the series Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 315 Working with Calendars Deleting a Single Recurring Event 1 a ee e Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 304 Click the event you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete Content button A confirmation message appears Click OK Deleting All Events in a Recurring Series 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for any date that contains an events in the series that you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 304 Click the event in the series that you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete This and Associated Recurring Events button Fi A confirmation message appears Click OK Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 316 Managing Tasks Managing Tasks A task is a request from one user to another to perform an action
434. ontally L le at music sports Click List Box to display all choices in a box The box lengthens to display all entries Interests MUSIC sports Item Enter the value that is collected when the data entry user selects this item Value For example if Interests appears in the Name field and you want music to be collected when the data entry user selects this item and saves the page enter music here Item Enter text to describe this item on the data entry screen Text After you insert this field onto the screen you can use eWebEditPro XML s formatting capabilities to modify its size font color and other attributes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 174 Working with HTML Forms SS Item List This section of the screen displays the items that you enter in the Value and Text fields Buttons near the bottom of the screen let you remove items from this list as well as rearrange them Move Up Move Down Remove Place a check in the box of any item to be checked by default on the data entry screen If you do the user can accept the default or uncheck the item by clicking in the checkbox Note that if Only One is selected under Allow selection above only one item can be selected Inserting a Select List Field Use a Select List field when you want the site visitor to select from a predetermined list of choices Although similar to the choices field when you insert a
435. ontent in the selected folder in the right frame Search Search for content within the selected folder or its Searching for CMS Content on subfolders page 256 Add to Favorites Add selected folder to My Favorites folder Favorites on page 272 Adding a Folder to the Favorites Folder on page 276 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 265 Using Ektron Explorer Menu Option Description For more information see Create new folder Blog or Discussion directly Ektron CMS400 NET below selected folder Administrator manual sec tion Managing Content Folders gt Adding Subfold ers Blogs on page 343 Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual sec tion DIscussion Boards Manage Change the combination of user and server you Ektron CMS400 NET Configurations are using Administrator Manual section Use Configuration Ektron Explorer gt Configuring Ektron Explorer Refresh Redisplay both sides of the Explorer screen You Refresh Subtree usually do this to see the results of a change Properties Displays information about the folder Especially Ektron CMS400 NET useful to a system administrator Administrator manual section Ektron Explorer gt Viewing m l Administrative Information General Diagnostic Ss Ektron Explorer Properties version 3 0 0 16 contig CMS400 location http 192 168 0 146 cme40 demo userma
436. orer illustrated below See Also Adjusting the Number of Recently Viewed Content Items on page 290 iddress http lotalhostiCMs400Example workarea explorer main hkml Tonkent Management x Displaying 10 items clock Last edited by Application Administrator Content CMS Location https 1 92 766 Explore Search A o Workspace for bob admin Default CMS all pes B Blogs fem Books i Calendar In order to appear in this folder you must click any contents title so that it appears in a new window The most recently accessed item appears at the top followed by the second most recent etc NOTE Content in the Recently Viewed folder has fewer menu options This is because options that move content among folders cut copy delete etc are inactive within the favorites folder Displaying the Recently Viewed Folder To display the Recently Viewed folder follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the left frame 2 Right click the mouse 3 A menu appears Manage Configurations Use Configuration P Refresh T ptio Hz Properties 4 Click Options 5 The Options dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 289 Using Ektron Explorer General Ektron Explorer Options Folder Options Display Favorites ici Folder Seamer Display Recently Wewed Folder ize of Recently Wiewed Folder per LMS 6 Check Display Recently Viewed
437. orkspace deleting 277 Ektron Explorer workspace distributing files 277 Ektron Explorer workspace renaming 278 email address user editing 455 instant modifying 30 requirements 29 sending 28 where available 29 notification disabling 455 end date setting for content 63 end time calendar event 306 310 eWebDiff window 95 exit without save WeblmageFX command 537 exit WeblmageFX command 536 explorer changing thumbnail size 254 creating content 259 folder 259 form 260 deleting content 259 displaying 252 editing content 261 emailing content 262 favorites 272 adding content to 275 adding folder 276 removing content from 275 removing folder 276 favorites folder 273 suppressing 274 folders changing language 267 collapsing 264 creating 266 deleting 265 display properties 266 expanding 265 options dialog 269 renaming 265 inserting external files 271 installing 246 introduction 243 recently viewed content 288 290 displaying 289 removing from display 255 search feature 256 selecting content 258 viewing content information 260 extensions file allowed in library 121 image allowed in library 121 F file open toolbar button 478 save to local computer toolbar button 478 files copying to library 124 extensions library setting 121 library inserting into content 133 overwriting 129 viewing 127 library editing title 129 find next toolbar and menu option 470 finding content block 8 text 494 floatin
438. ormation in the text box for the category you want to edit 6 Click Save M NOTE You can edit several categories before clicking Save Removing Blog Categories There are two ways to remove blog categories e Remove the last link that was added e Remove any link in the list Each task is explained below Removing the Last Blog Category Follow these steps to remove the last blog category on the page 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To add a blog category from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 355 Blogs 3 Click the Edit Properties button 7 4 Click the Categories tab 5 Click Remove Last Category Add a Blog to folder Purchase Orders Add New Category Remove Last Catego 6 A dialog box appears Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Click OK to remove the last category NOTE You can continue to remove categories at the end of the list by clicking the Remove Last Category link 8 Click Save fq Removing a Blog Category 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To add a blog category from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manu
439. osts immediately or is submitted for approval See Also Controlling Blog Comments on page 377 Post Comment Comments in the Workarea In the Workarea you can add view approve edit and delete comments for a blog post The comment link illustrated below indicates the number of comments To work with comments navigate to the blog folder and click the comment link next to a blog post view Posts in Blog Blog FAME eS RENO ABTEI EN ATOA EnA E Welcome to ektron Medical Last Edited by Application Administrator on 3 1 2006 Status A comments 1 This leads you to View Comments screen Here you can view approve edit delete and add new comments Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 382 Blogs NOTE To learn about recognizing unapproved comments and approving them see Controlling Blog Comments on page 377 See Also e Adding a Comment on page 383 e Editing a Comment on page 384 e Deleting a Comment on page 385 e Approving a Comment on page 385 Adding a Comment NOTE Tobe able to add a comment you must have Add permission on the blogs Standard Permissions screen To add a blog post comment from the Workarea follow these steps From the Content area navigate to the blog 2 Click the Comments icon to the left of the post that you want to comment on 3 Click New gt Comment The Add Comment screen appears Ektron CMS400 NET User
440. ou can start with then customize As explained in Mailto or Database Form on page 198 form data can be emailed and or saved to a database Forms created using the procedure described below are saved to a database by default but not emailed To change either setting use the Edit Properties screen See Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 192 To create a new form follow these steps NOTE You can also create a new edition of a form in another language by copying an existing form and translating it For more information see Translating Content on page 649 NOTE For the steps to create a new poll see Working With Polls on page 202 For the steps to create a new survey see Steps to Creating a Survey on page 207 Choose a content folder 2 Fromthe View menu click Language and select the language in which to create the form 3 Click the New menu gt HTML Form Survey Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 144 Working with HTML Forms 4 The New Form screen appears New Form pm wie m ST aja Next ae Cancel amp Paor niy i Crab aF at ll a i s a maai Hii _ let a Tey ru Select a form from below or begin with a blank form Next you ll be able to customize all aspects of the form so that it collects exactly the information you re looking for Blank Form Design a new form Blank Survey E1 Design a new survey Standard
441. ou remove the applied XSLT you can view the content without the irrelevant XML tags The following table compares the views Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 103 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content With XSLT Product Name RC Redstar Description The RE Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This new plane is for beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with or to have fun with The Redstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Specifications Alrfoil Low Wing Overall Length 57 In Wingspan YLiIn Weight 7 8 lbs Engine Size 60 70 ce Fuel Tank Size 12 pz Engine Run Time 15 min full tank Pofill Tirnea 17 core Without XSLT Content RC Redstar The EC Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This nev beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with or to Redstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Low Wing 57 in 7111n 7 8 lbs 60 0 cc 1 15 min ffull t Standard White highly refined gasoline Standard Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 104 Searching the Workarea Searching the Workarea You can search any folder to quickly locate content within your Web site The following sections explains how to use the content search through the following subtopics e Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen on page 105 e The Search Screen
442. over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Value Enter the value that will be saved with this field when the form is submitted Inserting a Text Field Use a plain text field when you want the user to enter an unformatted free text response To insert a plain text field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field lab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 154 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 162 Working with HTML Forms Plain Text Field Descriptive Hame Field 1 Field Hame Field Tool Tip Text Field 1 Default value Validation Validation No validation Error Message Fields on the Plain Text Field Dialog SSS Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 184 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 163 Working with HTML Forms pre ie Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below
443. ow these steps 1 Go to the View Content screen for the content you want to translate From the View drop down list select the original language Use the Add drop down list in the upper right corner to select the language into which you want to translate the content Add select language Ibi I LIL IbIb Danish German Standard 4 The Edit Content screen appears with original language content Translate into the new language then delete the original content lf desired you can click the Translate button a8 If you do a new screen prompts you to identify the original language new language and the glossary to use Then the content is translated If you like the translation click Paste Content and the translated content replaces the original Once the translated content is inserted into the editor you can edit it as needed 5 When you save the content it is saved as the edition of that content in the selected language Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 52 Deleting Content NOTE The ability to delete content is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete button T on the screen you do not have permission to do so The Delete command lets you permanently delete obsolete content from your Web site You can only delete content if its status is Approved Like publishing deleted content must go through the approval chain before it is
444. page after login 456 see profile set Smart Desktop as start location 457 V validation HTML form 158 version number viewing 475 478 vertical flip WeblmageFX command 552 view content difference 92 button floating toolbar 5 screen first use 98 view date toolbar button 58 view difference toolbar button 58 view history button floating toolbar 5 toolbar button 58 view preferences toolbar button 478 view published toolbar button 59 view staged toolbar button 59 ViewAllMenus 420 viewing HTML 609 W WeblmageFX assigning new name to image 524 choosing image 522 commands blur 528 brightness 529 choose color 530 choose font 531 contrast 533 copy 534 create new 534 crop 534 delete 535 dimensions 535 exit 536 exit without save 537 freehand 537 horizontal flip 538 image info 538 line 539 open 540 oval 541 paste as new image 542 pointer selection 542 polygon 543 rectangle 544 redo 545 rotate 546 save 546 save as 547 select 548 sharpen 548 text 549 twain acquire 551 twain source 551 undo 552 vertical flip 552 zoom in 552 zoom out 553 introduction 522 menu commands 524 saving image 524 specifying color depth 553 toolbar buttons 524 whole word match 497 width table setting by percentage 568 setting by pixels 570 width work page customizing for user 456 word wrap 596 Word Microsoft editing in 503 editing XML documents 504 inserting from 612 uploading image from 504 work offline document managemen
445. paring Versions of Content on page 92 View History View history of selected content See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content on page 99 FFERR Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 58 pa m e E View Published Displays currently published version of content Ba View Staged Displays staged content See Also Staged Content on page 654 o Selects the language of the content being displayed wiew English US language Select Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 59 Scheduling Content to Begin and End scheduling Content to Begin and End Scheduling content lets you control when content becomes visible on the Web site Similarly you can remove content on a predetermined date and time When used together a start and end date can relieve you of much work by managing how long content is viewable on your Web site You can also set options for what happens to content after reaching its end date How Does It Work When you create or modify content you can select a go live date and time If you do and the content makes it through the approval chain Ektron CMS400 NET publishes the content to the live site at that time For example your company is having a sale of the century ina month and everything is ready except the announcement You decide to update your Web site to let the public know about the sale With this
446. pecial characters inserting 473 spell check automatic toolbar and menu option 470 manual toolbar and menu option 470 spelling check a single word 500 check as you type 498 check on demand 499 check selected text 500 checking file addresses 501 checking Internet addresses 501 checking uppercase words 501 checking words with numbers 501 fix errors 499 split cell toolbar button 477 splitting a cell 594 staged content block viewing 59 start date content block setting 61 setting results 62 start time event calendar 306 310 Strikethrough toolbar and menu option 474 style class assigning to text 473 submenus adding as menu item 435 adding items 436 definition 422 deleting 448 submit toolbar button 58 submitted content definition 652 Subscript toolbar and menu option 474 summary adding 67 content creating for existing content block 69 creating for new content block 68 editing 69 Superscript toolbar and menu option 474 surveys creating 201 207 T table insert toolbar button 477 table properties toolbar button 477 tables alignment 572 background color applying 574 deleting 575 background image deleting 577 inserting 576 border color 577 invisible 578 size 579 columns adding 566 deleting 566 spanning 589 specifying 565 creating 555 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 vi deleting 556 inserting within a table 557 locking in position 475 rows adding 566
447. per or lower of a search term In other words if you enter Bob in the Find What field the search finds bob Bob BOB etc lf you want the search to be case sensitive use the Match case check box on the Find window If you enter Bob in the Find What field and place a check in the Match case box the search only Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 496 Finding and Replacing Text stops at Bob not bob or BOB Find And Replace Find What iit Find Next Replace With P Match whole word only Replace Al Direction Up Down Cancel Replace PEER Whole Word Match By default the search finds any occurrence of the text that you type into the Find what field For example if you enter the the search finds the word the as well as those letters embedded in other words such as others and theater lf you want the search to find only whole word occurrences of the text you type into the Find what field click the Match whole words only box in the Find dialog box Find And Replace ww Eoo oo o Replace With Match whole word only Bee F Match case Replace All Direction C Up Down Cancel Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 497 Checking Spelling The eWebEditPro XML editor can check your spelling as you type or whenever you want to check it The rest of this section explains e Disabling Script Blocking on page 498 e Checki
448. perform functions on it such as spell checking BB 2 M 4 amp 3 oau A OeHGne E ce Apply Style Normal 7 BZ UA A x 72 fm To learn more about using eWebEditPro XML see these topics e Creating a Simple Web Page on page 463 e Toolbar Buttons on page 467 e Customizing Your Toolbar on page 480 e The Context Sensitive Menu on page 489 e Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features on page 492 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 462 Creating a Simple Web Page This section walks you through the process of creating a simple Web page using only a few of the many features available Later sections explain all of the features and how to use them Your Finished Web Page When you finish this exercise your simple Web page will look like this BBR 68 2oo 0 RE MPS sees amp Apply Style Worrmnal Times New Roman 3 12 pt i A J E 7 U A This is some sample content You can make the text bold a e or underlined with the push of ab also easily add hyperlinks e You can bean alne with bullets Finally you can change the text to a large SIze Notice that this page has the following elements e The second sentence includes bold italic and underlined text e The third sentence includes a hyperlink text that will jump to another Web page when the user clicks on it e The fourth sentence begins with a bullet e The last sentence
449. ple when adding a second test doc file the new file is named test doc 1 No information is added to Summary Metadata or Comments when a file is added via drag and drop You can edit this information by clicking Edit CY then the appropriate tab Steps to Adding Files via Drag and Drop In the Workarea click the Content folder button Select the folder in which you want to place the files Open Windows Explorer PARN z Find the files you want to upload NOTE You cannot drag and drop folders You can however grab all files in a folder and drag and drop them 5 From Windows Explorer drag and drop the files onto the Workarea s drag and drop window Workarea for admin Microsoft Internet Explorer f X C Documents and Sett File Edit View Favorites h x f Address C9 C Documents and H00 emo loper l spree echt hn EEE ES E New Microsoft Excel Worksheet xls 9 New Microsoft PowerPoint Presenta i New Microsoft Visio Drawing vsd 19 New Microsoft Word Document doc E New Text Document txt ka bia bea b a Leed L Lei L CN yes errr i F mho jo TEOT I I taj i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 238 Using the Document Management Functionality After you drag and drop the files the following screen appears ME Uploading Uploading file 4 of 5 Ektron DMS Pause Sea Pause File Name New Microsoft Exce
450. port Quicklinks are quick because you do not need to enter or know the URL of the destination Web page your Web master has already stored that information for you To apply a Quicklink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 604 Using Hyperlinks 2 Click the Hyperlink button B The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperfink gt Hyperlink Information OK Tee Http Cancel Link http Bookmark Text Target Frame Quick Link selecting 3 Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field A list of Web pages that your Web master has pre loaded appears 4 Click an item from the list to select it 5 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 602 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 6 Click OK Entering a Hyperlink Manually To create a hyperlink follow these steps 1 Select the source text or image Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 605 Using Hyperlinks 2 Click the New Hyperlink button The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperlink Hyperlink Information Type http Link http Bookmark Text Target Frame Quick Link
451. r Each calendar is assigned to a content folder See Also Working with Folders and Content on page 31 Your ability to view add edit and remove calendar events is determined by your permissions for that folder The following illustrates the workflow of calendar tasks Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 294 Working with Calendars View all calendars View information for one calendar view calendar jump to Add event View events linked web _ page ah Z Edit event Apply Accessing the View Calendar Screen The View Calendar screen collects general information about a calendar and provides toolbar buttons that let you perform calendar related activities To access the View Calendar screen follow these steps 1 Access the Modules folder from the lower left corner of the Workarea Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 295 Working with Calendars 2 Click the Calendars folder m Modules a Collections HO Calendars 5 MemberShips 3 The Calendar Modules screen appears It lists all calendars in Ektron CMS400 NET Calendar modules Title ID Description Path Re International listing of events for RE International news y Calendar events NOTE Only system administrators can create a new calendar 4 Click a calendar 5 The View Calendar screen appears showing information about the calendar Ektron CMS400 NET Use
452. r its employees vacation request forms You don t want to open each folder and look through it to find its employee s forms So instead you set up a Smart Folder to retrieve all content that contains Vacation Request Form and was created during August Entering Search Criteria When creating a Smart folder you can include any combination of the following criteria e folder to be monitored whether its subfolders are also searched e text within the content e dates when content was created or last modified e the last name of the person who most recently edited the content e content status e content type You enter the criteria through a series of friendly screens That procedure is described in Creating a Smart Folder on page 283 You must pick a starting folder but all other criteria are optional Remember that content must satisfy all criteria you define in order to appear in the Smart Folder Editing a Smart Folder s Search Criteria When you create a Smart Folder and complete the screens that collect search criteria you finalize it You cannot later edit the folder s criteria If you need to change them create a new Smart Folder Viewing a Smart Folder s Search Criteria You can view any Smart Folder s search criteria by selecting the folder right clicking the mouse and selecting Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 281 Using Ektron Explorer Gen
453. r About Us on the home page However if a content contributor with permission to edit menus signs in to Ektron CMS400 NET then views the menu it has additional options for editing the menu or adding content NOTE For more information on adding content see Adding Content on page 45 To learn more about Menu permissions see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Web Site Navigation Aids gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 420 Working with Menus This chapter describes the following aspects of managing menus e what they are e how they can be used e how to the add edit view and delete a them What s In This Chapter The following topics explain Menus e The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 421 e Access to the Menus Feature on page 422 e Adding a New Menu on page 423 e Adding a Menu Item on page 429 e Editing a Menu on page 438 e Editing a Menu Item on page 440 e Viewing a Menu on page 443 e Reordering Menu Items on page 446 e Deleting a Menu on page 447 e Deleting a Menu Item on page 448 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 449 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items Menus have the following structure e menu top level structure that is a placeholder for menu items and submenus It is assigned to a content folder A menu identifies a page template used to disp
454. r Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 296 Working with Calendars View Calendar Intranet Company Calendar 31 iew In English Us Y Add In select a Lange Title Intranet Company Calendar ID 3 Description Location Label Location Start Time Label Start End Time Label End Table Properties Display Weekends Forward Only 5 Show only events that tall after the viewing day Event Types Event Type Label Bob s Event Type Event Types Available Event Types Required Instructions Ctrl Click to Show Event Type Show All Label Show All Long Description None Folder Name Content Folder Path Y Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 297 Working with Calendars The following table explains the fields on the View Calendar screen Field Description Title Title given to the calendar The title identifies the calendar within the Workarea ID number automatically assigned to calendar This is used to display the calendar on a Web page Description given to the calendar Location Label Label for the calendar s location information This label appears on the calendar when a location is assigned to a calendar event I UE auy YY I Ta El 1 Ea 6 Company meeting Location Wew York conf room start 12 00 PM End 1 00 PM Ty R Start Time Label Label for the calendar s start time This appears on the calendar when a start time is a
455. r Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 598 Using Bookmarks Use a bookmark to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another place in a file On your Web page text appears in a different color to indicate that additional information is available at the bookmark s location For example if your Web page includes meeting minutes the top of the page could list the meeting dates You could then assign a hyperlink to each date and a bookmark to each set of minutes The user sees that a date is in a different color so clicks the date to jump to the bookmark that marks the location of the meeting minutes Creating a Bookmark on page 599 describes how to set up a hyperlink to a bookmark within a file You can also set up hyperlink to e another Web page This procedure is described in Using Hyperlinks on page 603 e a bookmark within another Web page This procedure is described in Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 606 Creating a Bookmark When creating a bookmark you must specify a e source the text or image that the user clicks to move to the bookmark e bookmark the place to which the cursor jumps when the user clicks the source To continue with the above example a meeting date is the source and the meeting minutes are the bookmark To create a bookmark follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 5
456. r at 01 02 2006 01 PM Comments o A category can only be assigned to the blog in which it is created it cannot be used with other blogs With each new blog you need to create new categories This gives you the flexibility to tailor unique categories to each blog Adding Blog Categories To add a blog category follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 353 Blogs 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site NOTE To add a blog category from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog click Properties 2 Click View gt Folder Properties 3 Click the Edit Properties button L 4 Click the Categories tab then click Add New Category Add a Blog to folder Purchase Orders 5 A text box appears 6 Enter the category NOTE Add as many categories as you need by clicking Add New Categories 7 Click Save M Editing Blog Categories To edit a blog category follow these steps 1 In the Workarea navigate to the blog folder or From the Web site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 354 Blogs NOTE To add a blog category from the Web site you must be logged in right click the blog click Properties Click View gt Folder Properties Click the Edit Properties button L Click the Categories tab oS amp IN Change the inf
457. r example documents e can be stored in folders with other content or in separate folders that you create just for them e are assigned content ID numbers e capture summary metadata comment task and schedule information e inherit permissions and approvals from their folder properties e progress through a workflow check out check in publish e provide a history and let you restore an earlier version e can be searched including some Office document properties e can have foreign language editions e can have a task assigned to them e appear on content reports e update the Smart Desktop listing of files awaiting approval checked out tasks to expire Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 210 Using the Document Management Functionality When a file is imported to the CMS then saved a copy of it is saved to the asset management server Then whenever a user edits and saves the file a new copy is stored In this way you can review and if needed restore a prior version This chapter explains the Document Management Functionality through the following topics e Supported Types of Documents on page 211 e Security on page 214 e Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 214 e Working with Open Office Files on page 231 e Working with Managed Files on page 234 e Importing Files via Drag and Drop on page 237 e Document Workflow on page 240 e Viewing D
458. returns to its original position Sending Instant Email Ektron CMS400 NET lets you send email instantly to a user or user group from many screens available from the Smart Desktop Your ability to send instant mail is indicated by a small mail icon next to a user or group name indicated in red below Ez iew All Approvals itle Request Type Start Date Submitted by trinity In Line Pipe Publish None Specified Edit John When you click a user group name or email icon the email screen appears as shown below Once you complete the screen and click Send an email is sent to designated users Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 28 To jedit ektron com From jeditt ektron cam Subject Content Trinity In Line Pipe Times New Roman 3 12 pt hi A dy E 7 U B Bom Y sA John Edit URL bttp 192 166 0 17 CMS S00 hamplefndes asp tid 22 Send Email Cancel Conditions for Instant eMail e You must have a valid email address set up in the user profile If not email icons do not appear in Ektron CMS400 NET See Also Updating Your User Profile on page 453 e Your system administrator must enable the feature Where Instant email is Available Instant email is available from several screens that display users and user groups Typically you click a user name or the email icon to launch an email Screens in the following Ektron CMS400 NET features support instant email
459. rform other useful functions Both kinds of keyboard input are described below Inserting Characters In MathML equations all characters are categorized according to type In Math Expression editor the most important types are text identifiers numbers and operators These types correspond to the MathML elements lt mtext gt lt mi gt lt mn gt and lt mo gt In MathML these basic character types are called tokens As you enter characters from the keyboard Math Expression editor analyzes the input and automatically inserts the characters into the appropriate MathML token element Ordinarily this results in the appropriate MathML markup and makes authoring MathML equations much easier As with any automatic algorithm there are cases where problems can arise However by understanding how Math Expression editor chooses token types for characters you can easily avoid or correct problem situations When two or more characters of the same type are entered in succession Math Expression editor places the characters into the same MathML token element Thus typing s i n results ina single identifier token containing sin Similarly if you place two or more characters of the same token type together by some other means such as cut and paste backspacing etc Math Expression editor merges them together into a single token Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 643 Working with the Math Expre
460. rlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it Launch Link in New Browser If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 308 To apply an event type to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow gt to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event 5 Click the Save button H Viewing a Calendar Event Once events are added to a calendar you can easily view them To view a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the Show Calendar screen for the calendar that contains the event you want to view as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 300 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 311 Editing Calendar Events Working with Calendars 2 Place the cursor on the event you want to view April May 2004 Pitas si q Baa weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Star 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Stari 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM Pe FEES weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Start 12 00 AM End 1 00 PM iz Dji 3 Click the View Events button 4 The View Events screen appears listing all calendar events for that
461. rom the Web Site When logged into Ektron CMS400 NET you can right click on an existing poll and choose New Poll to replace the poll with a new poll The title of the poll its ID and properties stay the same The only things that change are the questions and answers To replace an existing poll with a new poll follow these steps 1 Log into Ektron CMS400 NET 2 Navigate to the Web page where the existing poll is located 3 Right click the poll and choose New Poll I TAKE A SURVEY Where did you hear about Ektron Medical Oonine ET Newall O Friend CY Edit Coworke ih view History Newsgral Lares other add Task submit For Properties wWorkarea Logout Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 205 Working with HTML Forms 4 The Workarea opens and you are at step three in the Poll Wizard Continue to define the Poll Enter a question and all possible responses Leave unused responses blank Question pT Choices 5 Add the new question to the Question text box 6 Add the possible responses to the Choices text boxes 7 Click Next 8 Click Done 9 After clicking Done the form editor launches and allows you to edit the existing fields and properties In addition you can set post back and schedule information add metadata and comments change the title and submit the poll for publication 10 Once the poll is published it appears on the site
462. round image to a cell Your Webmaster determines which images are available To insert an image into a cell follow these steps Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu oe YS Move the cursor to the Background Image field of the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color if Unassigned Background Image Select Image 5 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears 6 Click the image of your choice 7 Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a cell Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 587 Working with Table Cells e Ifthe cell is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the cell e fthe cell is smaller than the image the top left corner of the image appears in the top left corner of the cell The rest of the image fills as much of the cell as possible e Make sure the image does not obscure a user s ability to read the cell text if any exists Deleting a Background Image Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu ee ee Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt Using the Color Box Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top ri
463. rs Add Collection Ogle Wi see E fe aie ee ae Galle Mi eke Sean ae Mle ean eee eaten a ate Ae ate eae Aan ale eee eRe a ee a Meat ore aakaa eae a Peak a Bae oP eka a ea eee a ey Bae Title New Collection Template cMS300Sample jindex asp Leave the above template empty if you wish to use the Quicklinks Description New collection with various content blocks i Include Subfolders 5 Complete the screen using the following table Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 408 Working with Collections Field Description Assign a unique title to the collection Template Enter the default template for the collection This template is used to display the content of the links generated if no template is assigned in the custom function If left blank the links use their respective Quicklinks See Also Default Template vs Quicklinks on page 409 Add a more detailed description for the collection Include Subfolders Check if you want to add to the collection content in subfolders of the content folder 6 Click the Save button 5 You can now assign content to the collection See Assigning Content to the Collection on page 410 Default Template vs Quicklinks You can specify a template that determines the screen display for a collection when it is published on a Web page See your system administrator for information about Ektron CMS400 NET templates Or you can disable
464. rsion 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 121 Library Folder To search the library first select the folder in which you want to begin the search The search only considers files in that folder and its child folders To search the entire library begin by selecting the Library root folder Next click the Search button from the library toolbar When you do a search screen appears with several fields that let you narrow your search The fields are described below C Keywords Specify one or more keywords that the search will use The search looks for keywords in the file s title The title is assigned by the user when the file is added to the library If a file s title matches the keywords the file appears on the search results screen The search also uses keywords to search through the file s e internal name for example airplane gif if the Filename Search checkbox is checked e description if the Description search checkbox is checked A keyword can be a complete or partial word But you can only enter a partial term for one word For example you can enter Adv and have the search return the content titled Adverse Drug Reactions But if you enter Adv Drug the search returns nothing You can enter several complete search terms but they must be in the correct sequence For example to find the topic titled Adverse Drug Reactions you can enter Adverse Reactions but cannot enter Reactions Adverse To find
465. rt a choices field follow these steps 1 Place a choices field s onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 154 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 171 Choices Field Descriptive Hame Field Hame Tool Tip Text Lis Allow selection f Onl one More than one A selection is required ltem List Working with HTML Forms Field Field Field Custom Appearance f Vertical List Horizontal List i List Box value Change Check tem to be selected by deta Move Up Move Down Remove Ok Fields on the Choices Dialog Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 172 Field Descriptive Name Field Name Tool Tip Text List Working with HTML Forms Description Enter a description of the field This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 184 Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt 2 into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Custom You create your own set of choic
466. ry on page 67 e Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 e Managing Tasks on page 317 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 60 10 Save the file within the host application 11 Check in or submit the file for publishing as you would any content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 219 Importing Files via Drag and Drop You can import files to DM using drag and drop You can add one or several files using this method It doesn t matter whether the files are Office or Managed files NOTE If you upload a file using drag and drop whose type is not supported the Document Management functionality ignores it and moves on to the next file After the files upload a dialog reminds you which files types are supported See Also Supported Types of Documents on page 211 When you drag and drop a file into DM the file s name becomes its title The file is assigned a content ID and submitted to the approval process If either of the following is true the file s status is set to checked in e you are required to complete metadata for the file e the folder in which you are adding the file is set to create PDF documents when a file is published Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 237 Using the Document Management Functionality lf you add more than one file with the same name or the same file twice a number is assigned to the end of the title For exam
467. s e All Open Tasks e 4ssigned To Me Assigned By Me created By Me Assigned To Use Slot Started Content Awaiting Approval 1 5 Content Currently Checked Out 1 Tasks 2 Tasks and Content Reports oe Fending Form Submission Tasks 1 Popular reports and ES Content To Exp i tasks this section also displays content block information auIES O N Top level folders eee eee ee eee ee ee ee eee eV Vee VS ee eee eee Y errr e The right frame displays Content awaiting approval content you need to approve before it proceeds to the next approver or is published if you are the final approver See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Approvals Reports Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 21 Content currently checked out all content in a checked out status This content cannot be edited by other users until the user who checked it out or the system administrator checks it in See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Checked Out Report A list of tasks assigned to you See Also Managing Tasks on page 317 Any form submission tasks assigned to you See Also Assigning a Task to a Form on page 181 The Content to Expire Report see See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Conte
468. s To do this right click the mouse and click Preferences When you do a dialog box appears in which you can enter formatting information about the HTML code View Preferences i oS Cancel Font Size Font Name Caune These settings will be used whenever you view as HTML The settings are ignored when you view the page in WYSIWYG mode and when the user views the page 3 To return to normal view click the View as WYSIWYG button E or right click the mouse and click View WYSIWYG Editing a Section of a Page If you want to edit only a section of the HTML on your Web page follow these steps Select the portion of your Web page that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Edit Source from the menu The HTML code appears Edit the HTML code as desired Click OK Ce Se YS Inserting Source If you want to insert HTML source code into your Web page follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 610 Working with HTML 1 Place the cursor at the spot on the page where you want to insert the HTML Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Source from the menu The Insert Source dialog box appears Paste or type your HTML code 5 Click OK Cleaning Source Code eWebEditPro XML lets you clean the HTML source code for your Web page You would typically use this feature after entering HTML text or pasting HTML code into eWebEditPro XML from a
469. s showing Ektron CMS400 NET s file structure Navigate to the folder that contains the Office document IMPORTANT You can only edit documents in folders for which you have Edit permission Your system administrator sets permissions Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 225 Using the Document Management Functionality fA Ey CMS Location http 192 166 0 215 cms400demo C Bob test G cMsS400Demo C Developer Content Title Files of Type Word Document doc Cancel Select the document The document appears within its application Edit it To save it under the same name click the red Save button f oY Mm ae IMPORTANT You only save documents in folders for which you have Add permission Your system administrator sets permissions 7 The following dialog appears Save Action Do vou want Eo f Saye f Save and Check In f Publish 8 You have three choices described below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 226 Using the Document Management Functionality Choice Description Save Save all changes since you opened the document or your last save After the document is saved you can continue working on it Save and Check in Save all changes and check the document back in to CMS400 NET See Also Checked In Content on page 650 Publish Save all changes and submit the document to be published If you
470. s 599 border image color 516 thickness 515 border color cell 584 content block meaning 648 table 577 border size cell 581 table 579 brightness WeblmageFX command 529 broken links finding 55 bullet toolbar option 474 buttons adding to menu 482 rearranging on menu 485 removing from menu 482 text displaying in title bar 456 C calendars add event button 56 authorization for creating 294 button to display in Workarea 58 definition 292 event types 308 events adding 304 assigning event types 308 button for viewing 58 deleting 315 display times 307 310 editing 312 end time 306 310 insert hyperlink 307 location 306 recurring adding 308 start date 306 309 start time 306 310 viewing 311 screen information on 296 viewing 300 cell properties toolbar button 477 cells background color 585 background image deleting 588 inserting 587 border color 584 invisible 584 deleting 583 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 i inserting 582 merging 595 padding 597 spacing 597 splitting 594 text alignment 591 width 581 check in toolbar button 57 check out toolbar button 57 checked in content definition 650 checked out content definition 651 choose color WeblmageFX command 530 choose font WebIlmageFX command 531 cleaning HTML 611 collaboration content 623 collections adding content 410 changing sequence of links 58 compared with menu and List Summary 418 creating 407
471. s demonstrate how personalization may be implemented Personalization and Permissions To learn about how permissions affect your ability to personalize see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Personalization Feature Layout of a Personalization Page A Personalization page consists of one or more Web Part Zones Each zone can contain one or more content items You select the content you wants to see in each zone Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 388 Personalizing a Web Page ektron MEDICAL CARES about our clients Ektron Rated Positive Ektron Inc an innovator in Web content management software today announced Ektron to Demonstrate Healthcare Healthcare Content Indexing Framework which enables hospitals medical groups and health insurers to deliver indexed content via the Web MainLettZone MainRightZone EEEE L_Sz ee 7 What are the symptoms P ff t ektron Medical we focus on assisting people e e y Br a gals with same of the most complex conditions Some examples are hemophilia Cancer Immune disorders and kidnev disease We do Personalizing a Web Page Your system administrator gives you permission to personalize a Web page Several permission levels are available listed below You may have any combination of these permissions e moving content among zones e editing a content item e adding new content e globally c
472. s in the email s subject field See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 196 Preamble Beginning text of the email See Also Retrieving Form Data Into the Subject and Preamble Fields on page 196 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 193 Working with HTML Forms SSS Send data in XML A green check means email data will be in a structured XML Format packet A red X means the email data will be in a standard mailto format For more information see Sending Data as XML in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual Forms chapter Retrieving email Address from the Submitted Form In the Mail Properties section of the Edit Form screen you can select email addresses submitted on the form to be inserted into any of these Mail Property fields e To e From e CC So instead of entering a static email address it can be dynamically retrieved from the user s form submission For example you want to retrieve the from field of an email from the information the user enters when completing the form To do this use the OR to addresses in field dropdown lists circled below These lists contain fields that dynamically retrieve data from the submitted form Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 194 Working with HTML Forms m Compose Email Compose Email ition Write and send an email message l
473. s the ratio of an image s width to height For example if a graphic has an aspect ratio of 2 1 its width is twice as large as its height If you check the Maintain Aspect Ratio box just specify a new width the height is calculated automatically Dialog Box im Dimensions IOJ x Dimensions Mev width ayo New Height 74 Maintain 4epect Ratio Current Width 218 Curent Height pE za Exit Standard Toolbar Button pt Description Save the change in the WeblmageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML where the updated image appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 536 Editing Images Exit without Save Standard Toolbar Button hle Description Ignore changes made to the image in WeblmageFX Return to eWebEditPro XML Freehand Standard Toolbar Button A Description Lets you draw a line in any shape that you want similar to using a pen on paper To use this command click the freehand command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 537 Editing Images Horizontal Flip Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses an image horizontally left to right Click this command again to reverse the image horizontally right to left Image before horizontal flip
474. sage does not identify the field the user may not know which field needs correction Form Fields Inserting a Checkbox Field A Checkbox field is only one character wide and accepts one of two possible values checked or unchecked For example C Check if you are over 65 To insert a checkbox field follow these steps 1 Place a checkbox type field v onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 154 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 159 Working with HTML Forms Checkbox Field Descriptive Mame Field 1 Field Name Field_1 Tool Tip Text Field 1 Default value C True checked f False unchecked men Fields on the Checkbox Dialog De Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 184 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 160 Working with HTML Forms pe i
475. scribed below Advantages For more information see Document Management Office For Don t need to install or learn CMS Creating a Microsoft toolbar example software work within Office Office Document from doc the Document Management Toolbar on page 220 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 214 Using the Document Management Functionality Advantages For more information see New gt Office Documents Office Similar to creating CMS content Creating a New from View Contents of Microsoft Office Folders screen Document from the Workarea on page 216 Drag and drop into Office Easy to migrate existing Office Importing an Office CMS400 NET documents to CMS400 NET Document on page 228 New gt HTML content from HTML Additional functionality of Word Editing in Microsoft View Contents of Folders editor yet produces HTML content Word on page 503 screen Then click Word similar to creating CMS content toolbar button EF Note You can only create Word documents You cannot create other Office documents This section explains how to work with Microsoft Office documents through the following subtopics e Notes on Working with Microsoft Office Documents on page 215 e Creating a New Microsoft Office Document from the Workarea on page 216 e Editing a Document s Properties on page 218 e Save Check in and Publish on page 219 e Importing an Office
476. se steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 442 Working with Menus 1 Access the template where you inserted the link to display the menu Click the Menu Navigation link title on the Web page 3 A menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu Click Edit Menu The View Menu screen appears 6 Move the cursor over the item you want to edit and click Edit from the popup menu 7 To learn about the fields on the screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 Viewing a Menu Just like editing a menu you can view a menu via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page When viewing a menu via the content or menu folder you get an internal view of information entered by menu creator When viewing via a navigation link on a Web page you get an external view of the menu as seen by anyone navigating Web site View a Menu via its Content Folder To access a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu 2 Click View gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 443 Working with Menus 3 The View All Menus screen displays all menus in the folder View All Menus Root View Ini English Us Tithe ID Lang ID Date Modified Shout Ws 11 1033 6 9 2006 4 34 10 PM Conditions 7 1033 Of 2006 10 13 37 AM con
477. search words must match the content in order for a document to be found by the search e whether the search words are matched against the content item s title e whether the search words are matched against the content s comments Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 106 Searching the Workarea e an optional range of created or modified dates Only content created or updated within a date range is found by the search e the editor who updated the content most recently e the status of the content e any metadata criteria assigned to the folder e if the content includes Microsoft Word documents the size of the documents e ifthe content includes Powerpoint presentations the number of slides in the presentation Each feature is explained below NOTE To help track search activity the Search Phrase Report provides a count of all words and phrases searched within a date range In Ektron CMS400 NET this report is available from the Smart Desktop gt Reports For documentation of this report see Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports Search Phrase Report Specifying the Kind of Content to Search Near the top of the screen check boxes let you determine the kinds of content to search M Content W Forms M Assets M Include Archived NOTE Assets only appears if your organization has implemented Ektron s Document Management feature Content that is neither HTML not
478. senseseneeees 105 Accessing the Search Content Folder Screen 005 105 The Search Screen sxassisiccossentiexceisaicsasaanaeiasactssscansssessanimsserwesciansn 106 Result Display Options saassnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 113 Information on the Search Results Screen cccccssseseeeees 115 Content Workflow Report cc ssecssssescesseseeseeseeeees 116 LIDT OIE saceeresetec cece sctirctesusetcawenn E 117 Terms Used in this Chapter c cccsssseeescssseeeeesnseeseenneees 117 Accessing The Library asssassnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 118 Library Folder Properties ccccsssccsssseessesseseesseneeeneesenseenes 120 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 ii Pri eee TE E E EE A E EE A E A 124 DOIIE ot airgoar A TA E 136 E E a E A 137 Quicklinks and FOrmS n nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennnen 138 Working with HTML FOrms ccccssceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeenees 141 Overview of Form Processing cc sssscccsssseeseeesseeseeeseenseeees 143 The Structure of Form Data c cccsccsessseeecesseeesseeseeeseeeeees 143 Creating a New FOrim cc sscsccsssssecescesseeseeeseeeseesseeeseeneeeseoees 144 Creating a Form s Conte nt ccccccessseeecssnseeceessseeseenseeseeaes 152 Form RE area saver esae sda aitnrenneananesgsbohastonnsanaeieesiaauievanseaassedes 158 Ld gl lt eae ere
479. serting 610 view as toolbar and menu option 472 viewing 609 hyperlink edit tooloar and menu option 471 remove toolbar and menu option 471 hyperlinks 603 adding as menu option 434 creating 603 definition 117 editing 607 entering manually 605 library adding 136 adding to content 137 editing 136 viewing 136 preventing 608 removing 608 testing 606 to a bookmark in another web page 606 to content block finding 57 using a Quicklink 604 icon menu 4 Ignore All field eWebDiff 96 Ignore Case field eWebDiff 96 Ignore Format Attributes field eWebDiff 96 image extensions library setting 121 image info WeblmageFX command 538 image upload from Microsoft Word document 504 inserting picture from computer 511 media file selection 508 images adding space around 518 aligning 516 background cell inserting 587 table inserting 576 border color 516 thickness 515 deleting 521 deleting from server 510 editing 522 inserting 506 from server into editor 509 inserting from your computer 511 library adding to content 138 editing titles 137 overwriting 137 uploading 137 viewing 137 locking in position 475 moving to server 520 scanning 551 specifying color depth 553 indent toolbar option 474 insert column toolbar button 477 library item toolbar button 57 new cell toolbar button 477 row toolbar button 477 table toolbar button 558 inserting cells 582 HTML 610 instant email see email instant Internet addresses sp
480. sion 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 164 Working with HTML Forms Validation Options NOTE Your Web developer can customize validation options For details see the Ektron CMS400 NET Developer s Guide section Customizing Validation Option Characteristics of Valid Response No validation Response is not checked Cannot be blank Response is required The format of the response is not checked Non negative whole number or A positive whole number or no response blank Non negative whole number A positive whole number required Decimal number or blank A decimal number for example 12 345 or 12 or blank A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be a period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 Decimal number required A decimal number it cannot be blank of none one or two decimal places A leading minus sign is allowed The decimal point must be period even in locales that normally use a comma Decimal numbers include whole numbers because the decimal point is is implied That is 12 is 12 0000 gt gt gt That is 12 is 12 0000 Percent 0 100 required A whole number from 0 to 100 a a a where a is one or more characters email address list Several email addresses Each address s format is a a a where a is one or more characters The user must sep
481. sophisticated algorithms to try to discern the mathematical meaning of your equation and generate a content markup description as well Strengths and Weaknesses of Content Markup Not all equations can be described with content markup For example in presentation markup it is fine to type 1 2 This is just a Sequence of symbols as far as its appearance is concerned Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 634 Working with the Math Expression Editor However from a mathematical viewpoint this is an unfinished expression that doesn t have a well defined meaning If you try use Math Expression editor to generate content markup from this expression it warns you that it can t since the operator expects something to its right You could only generate content markup by completing it as a mathematically meaningful expression say 1 2 3 Also MathML content markup only covers basic mathematics roughly up to calculus Even if you have a meaningful math expression it may fail to translate to content MathML if it is too complicated or advanced Another problem with content markup is that the author has less control over how an equation renders visually For example when viewing the content version of an equation extra parentheses are sometimes automatically added or removed Also most visual style properties you may have changed are lost in the translation to content MathML Nonethele
482. ss content MathML can be very useful For one thing it is relatively easy to evaluate in a computation engine Also a single content encoded equation can be rendered differently depending on context than a presentation equation For example in some experimental MathML environments users can choose among various common notations for derivatives by editing a style sheet Content MathML can also be very useful for teaching and learning about the structure and meaning of math expressions Checking Syntax Two problem areas can cause the Math Expression editor content markup generation algorithms to fail e The equation is too advanced or complicated to be represented as content markup as described above e Problems with the equation structure prevent the algorithms from guessing what you mean You can t do much about the first problem However there is a lot you can do to avoid the second Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 635 Working with the Math Expression Editor The key to content markup generation is to ensure there are no surprises in the nesting of templates in the equation The content generation algorithms rely heavily on the grouping of templates in the equation as a hint to the underlying meaning The main things that can cause problems are Inadvertently separating an operator and its arguments with Spurious expression groups For example X XY Mismatched fences x y ty
483. ssigned to a calendar event End Time Label Label for the calendar s end time data This appears on the calendar when an end time is assigned to a calendar event Table Properties A green check 4 means the calendar displays every day of the Display Weekends week A red X means the calendar displays weekdays only Forward Only If a green check appears next to Show only events that fall after the viewing day and the user viewing the calendar is not logged in the calendar only displays events from the viewing date forward No past events appear A logged in user can view past calendar events Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 298 Working with Calendars SS Event Type Label Indicates if event types are assigned to this calendar See Also Understanding Event Types on page 308 One section of the Add Calendar Events screen displays available event types and lets the user assign them to the event Event Type Available Selected Company Holiday gt Mo Event Types Trade Show Title Company Event By default this text is Event Type Your system administrator can edit the text Event Types Available A green check means you can add event types to the calendar Event Types Required A green check means that when entering a calendar event you must assign an event type to it Instructions If this calendar uses event types text appears at the bottom of th
484. ssion Editor sin sin Math Expression editor uses the following rules to decide what token type to assign to characters e Arun of alphabetic characters is placed in an identifier or lt mi gt token e A run consisting of digits commas and or periods are placed in number or lt mn gt token e By default everything else is placed in an operator or lt mo gt token Whenever you enter a character of a type that doesn t match the preceding characters the editor starts a new token for it When problems arise they usually result when a run of characters should be broken into several tokens or when separate tokens merge as a result of editing Here are the most common issues Invisible Multiplication MathML uses an invisible multiplication character to make explicit when two variables or expressions are being multiplied For example ab might mean a times b or the two letter variable ab Similarly a b c might mean a times b c or it might mean apply a function a to the argument b c Math Expression editor s automatic tokenizing behavior helps remind you code equations properly since if you just type a followed by b it groups them both into one token and switches the typeface to upright This is a visual cue that what you entered was the two letter variable ab To enter a times b you need to put an invisible times between them By default when you hit the space
485. sure it s correct before uploading it Note An application that can display the file must be installed on your computer Add file to the library Return to previous screen After you enter the necessary information and click the Save button the file is copied Now users with permissions to the selected folder can insert the file into their content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 126 Library Folder Viewing Files Once a file is copied to the library you may preview it To preview a copied file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the library folder to which the file was copied 2 Click the file you want to preview 3 The View File screen appears View Library Item in Folder Contenti files Title Ektron Partners and Customers Filename CMS400Example uploadedFiles ektron_partners_customers ppt Library ID 41 Parent Folder 9 Content Last User To Edit 2dministrator Application Last Edit Date 9 19 2005 2 55 05 PM Date Created 1 11 2005 3 04 34 PM Description Marketing description of Ektron s relationship with its partners Preview Ektron Partners and Customers The table below describes each field on the screen Field Deseripton Title assigned by user who copied or edited it Filename and location on the server Library ID ID number assigned by Ektron CMS400 NET when file was originally copied Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0
486. system administrator determines which screen appears for you Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 15 ektron 7 se Jz F A AG Ai E p h noe Ares rte Sree N alts wae kT i i i E ee FA Bo La y kti ee a oe tae a ET Dee PEN Cin eee Ae a eee EDs a T Fi PS CHi Tq A TOTS MiSrkcr wor E f Y ee a a a o 5 i i i i F is E El 1 x 7Smart Desktop ah la lee eal a oi a aa ARE a a a a a el aoa H Tasks aE Reports Content Awaiting Approval 0 L Content Currently Checked Out 6 Tasks 0 Form Submission Tasks 0 fs Content To Expire 0 Closing the Workarea To close the Workarea click in the upper right corner of the window When you close the Workarea you return to the Ektron CMS400 NET view of your Web site You do not exit Ektron CMS400 NET Installing the Document Management Functionality The first time you access the Workarea the following screen prompts you to install Document Management software onto your computer Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 16 Ektron DMS400 Automatic Download and Installation The page you are trying to view contains Ektron DMS400 It will appear within your browser It allows you to manage asset on web pages as easily as using that application Before you can use Ektron DMS400 it must be downloaded into your browser When you click the Install Now button at the bottom of this
487. t Priority High Status Mot Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blacks on the list Comments Date Timel4added By Comments 1O0 Jun OO4 10 47 Sh Be sure to check this list every day for John Edit content blocks needing approval 3 The Comments window opens with the comment displayed 4 Update the comment 5 Click the button Deleting a Task You can easily delete a task that is no longer needed For example the user who assigned a task would typically delete it when it is completed To delete a task follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 331 2 Click the Delete button i Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 340 IMPORTANT Managing Tasks The Delete button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to delete tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 A confirmation message appears 4 Click OK Viewing a Task s History view Task Histo Ektron CMS400 NET maintains a history of all events in the life of a task as well as any comments entered As examples the task history shows when and by whom the task was created when it changed to Active when it was
488. t eenter or update start and end dates ereview and update Web Alert information To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature e save changes echeck in content e submit content for approval e publish content to the Web site e access the library 6 Make the necessary edits to the content See Also Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 468 Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 47 and Tabs on the Edit Content Screen on page 48 Translating Content to Another Language NOTE The following procedure only works with HTML or XML content You cannot translate other file types as described below Use this procedure when you want to initialize a new foreign language content item with content from a source language This copying should facilitate the translation Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 51 For example an editor is translating content from French to German The editor copies the French edition to new content whose language is German As the editor translates the French edition into German he deletes the French content Any images in the content would usually remain and all formatting tables bullets etc is retained To copy content into new content block of a different language foll
489. t Row Properties Keystroke None Row Properties Column Properties Button None Menu Table gt Column Properties Keystroke None Button None Menu Table gt Table Properties Keystroke None Table Properties Show Hide Grid Lines Button H Menu Table gt Hide Grid lines Keystroke None Design View eal Button Design Menu View gt Design View Keystroke None Code View panacea al Button Code Menu View gt HTML View Keystroke None Window View Sion Oo Menu View gt Window View Keystroke None Launches a dialog box that provides information about the cell properties In this dialog box you can further define an individual cell Launches a dialog box that provides information about the row in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further define the row Launches a dialog box that provides information about the column in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further define the column Launches a dialog box that provides information about the table in which the cursor is located In this dialog box you can further define the table Shows or hides the grid lines that make up a table Switches editor from HTML code view to design view Switches editor from design view to HTML code view Launches the current editor into its own window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 661 Button None Menu
490. t feature 220 230 work page size customizing for user 455 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 vii workarea delete folder 57 Workspace folders definition 278 accessing 15 do not apply XSLT 57 workspace see Ektron Explorer work button floating toolbar 5 edit 57 space definition 15 insert library item 57 WYSIWYG view as toolbar and menu hiding left panel 26 link check 57 option 472 toolbar buttons 56 overwrite 58 add 56 preview 58 X add calendar event 56 publish 58 add content block 56 remove 58 XSLT removing from XML content add content folder 56 reorder 58 block 102 add library items 56 restore 58 add task 56 save to database 58 Vv approvals 56 search 58 approve 56 show calendar S8 yellow content border color approve all 56 submit 58 meaning 48 archived content 56 view date 58 calendar 57 view difference 58 Z cnecKin gr TRE history 58 zoom in WeblmageFX command 552 check out 57 view published 59 zoom out WeblmageFX command 553 collections 57 view staged 59 delete 57 workspace folder creating 279 delete content 57 workspace folder inserting content 280 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 viii
491. t Difference feature is opened a simple installation program runs See Also First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 98 The Compare Content window consists of the following e Toolbar on page 94 e Content Area on page 97 e View Tabs on page 97 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 93 Comparing Versions of Content F CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Toolbar a a a 2 x _ Welcome to RC InternNational RE 1 is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve RC racm EC ational has become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing and flying vehicles Oi sport and the enthusiasts who play tt has endeared our products te the RC communty We will co improve our affordable products and hope you will become an EC international member Content Area View Tabs Published Staged ia Each area is explained below Toolbar The content comparison toolbar has five buttons explained below aor im on Print Sends content to local or network printer Note This option prints the currently displayed content whether it is the compared published or staged content Save Saves a copy in HTML format on your local machine or network When saved as a physical file the HTML may be edited However the changes are not saved to the Web Server Note The save option saves the version of the content you are Viewing
492. t Statuses on page 648 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 9 Logging In and Out Logging In and Out This section explains how to log in and out of Ektron CMS400 NET and to use the site preview feature through the following subtopics e Prerequisites on page 10 e Logging into the Sample Web Site on page 10 e Site Preview on page 12 e Logging Out of the Sample Site on page 13 Prerequisites Once your Webmaster or administrator installs Ektron CMS400 NET you need the following items before you can use it e URL Web address of Ektron CMS400 NET Web site e Username and password Once you acquire both you can log into Ektron CMS400 NET and begin managing Web site content NOTE This documentation uses the Ektron CMS400 NET sample Web site to demonstrate the product Logging into the Sample Web Site To access the Ektron CMS400 NET sample site follow these steps 1 In your Web browser navigate to the URL of your Ektron CMS400 NET Web site Your system administrator provides this Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 10 Logging In and Out 2 Click the Login button on the screen Login 3 The Login dialog box appears 4 Ektron CMS Login Microsoft o Enter your username and password User 4 Enter your username and password If you are using one of Ektron s sample sites you can use any of three stan
493. t Type 4yvatlable Selected Company Holiday gt Company Event Trade Show El 4 Update the fields using the table described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 304 as a reference 5 Click the Save button I Editing Recurring Events After a recurring series of events is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location hyperlink and event type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 314 Working with Calendars NOTE You cannot edit event dates or times To change those delete and re enter the series of events To edit a recurring series of events follow the steps in Editing a Single Event on page 313 The only difference is the Update all recurring events associated with this event box To apply the edits to only the instance of the event that you selected uncheck the box To apply the changes to all instances check the box Deleting Calendar Events The section explains how to delete a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only delete a calendar event if you have add edit or delete permission for the content folder to which the calendar is assigned Deleting a Single Occurrence Calendar Event You can easily delete calendar events that are no longer needed or do not belong to the calendar they were added to To delete a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that c
494. t any option by clicking an Ektron CMS400 NET toolbar button Edit Content Title hest e or a Document Management menu option illustrated below Edit Content in Folder Root x n LEYNT ETTY Ire ETS PA j Aa tet etre rer A ET COrrer tr rere revere rere rere er eee er ever ewer vee ery PTEE reer ere rere ts ee ml Gi ad Sk aaah lad acetal iad easel td aT Ta si EAE MEESE Poca PO ap a Pen ee ep Pe a a Pp a pee Pap ee Tithe Auto Add Asset Utility Sein and Configuration English U 4 Content Metadata Schedule Web Alerts Templat File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table WebWorks Help yj Do ICUMenk Management 1 pa be e s j E m a F E 23 A Unde Checkout SS rrr e TTT PY Normal Bold 7 Times New Roman 12 B J m Check In a Publish Normal re Add Asset Ut Save To Document Server tl Mormal Save Document as HTML Normal Install CMS400 v 5 1 with DMS addon work OFFling Mormal Save Local Copy Mormal Verity that site is set to mm with basic authentica l 1 Normal Properties Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 219 Using the Document Management Functionality Document Toolbar Management Menu button Option Undo Check out Discard changes made in current editing x session Check in Check d
495. t one Insert column Inserts a new column to the left of the current one Insert new cell Inserts a new cell to the left of the current one H E epe eo a Deleting a Cell on page 583 Memeo Merging Two Cells on page 595 Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 565 Working with Table Cells on page 581 WP cr Ei EH Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 477 Toolbar Buttons Miscellaneous Toolbar Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only For more information see Open local file and copy it into CMS content Ga Open File IE Save File H4 Display hide Display or suppress table and cell Borders borders While you can open any file type Ektron CMS400 NET s editor only works with htm and xml files When you open a file into a content block the new file replaces any content currently in the block Save CMS content as file on your computer or network Since Ektron CMS400 NET s editor only works with htm and xml files you should save the file using one of those extensions Display or suppress formatting characters that do not appear when content is published c gt Display hide Invisible Elements Display a dialog that lets you change the s View Preferences EN appearance of the HTML source code Display a dialog box that shows your version of eWebEditPro XML and your license keys About eWebEditPro XML
496. t sign in Public Users 3 Click Personalize 4 The page refreshes and you see its Web part zones e lf you have permission to move content you can do that now See Also Moving Content on page 392 e lf you have permission to edit content you can do that now See Also Editing Content on page 393 e If you have permission to add content click Add Content The screen refreshes and a new area appears that lets you add content See Also Adding Content on page 395 e You can delete any content item that you added See Deleting Content on page 397 e To suppress the display of a content item but leave it in its zone click its minimize button To restore the content item click the restore button See Also Minimizing a Content Item on page 397 e To remove a content item from its zone click the close button circled below MainRightZoane Wa are the symptoms jo A closed item is placed in the Page Catalog If your Web administrator places the Page Catalog on a personalization page you can later move the content from the Page Catalog to any zone See Also The Page Catalog on page 399 e Atany time you can restore the page to the original layout and content using Reset To Default Moving Content You can move content to an empty zone or one with content If you do the latter the new content appears at the top of the zone and existing content in the zone is pushed down To move content
497. tact Information 6 1033 o 19 2006 4 54 17 PM Inside Ektron Medical Products 12 1033 3 6 2006 9 36 42 4M 36 1033 3 24 2006 3 54 08 PM 4 Click the menu you want to view 5 The menu s options appear View Menu E L Why Choose Ektron k Business Practices 9 Company Profile L MHEwsS L Staff List Careers L Ektron Medical Blog L Forum L site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module To access the menu via the Modules folder follow these steps 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 444 Working with Menus 2 The Menus Report screen displays all menus Menus Report z Au Title ID Lang ID Description Contact Information 6 1033 Conditions 7 1033 Therapies 6 1033 Services 10 1033 3 Click the menu you want to view 4 The menu s options appear View Menu View In English Us 0 Add O bout Us L Why Choose Ektron D Business Practices 9 Company Profile L News L Staff List a Careers L Ektron Medical Blog L Forum L site Search L Using the Ektron Explorer View Menus via Navigation Link on a Web Page To access the menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page on which your Web developer inserted the link to display the menu 2 Click the link that launches the menu on the Web page Ektron CMS
498. task You must specify a Task Category before you assign a task type See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 325 Add By clicking the Add link you can add Task Categories and Task Types See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 325 Note If you Add a Task Category or Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes Edit By clicking the Edit link you can edit the Task Type chosen in the Task Type drop down box See Also Editing a Task Type on page 327 Note If you edit a Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes State Choose a status for the task Your choices are Not Started In Progress Completed Waiting on Someone else Deferred If the task is not linked to content you can assign it to any state However if you later link the task to content via the Content link above the state switches to Not Started The state appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by state Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 321 Managing Tasks f ess Start Date Using the calendar button choose a start date for the task The start date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by start date Technical note If you see
499. tatus click the down arrow at the right end of the Status field A list appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 285 Using Ektron Explorer A Create Smart Folder Web Page Dialog step 5of5 Last Editor s Last Hame Status Cancel Checked In 5 oaveg ha Marked F Pending T Submitted D Delete Select a status from the list See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 13 If you want the Smart folder to contain only one type of content click the down arrow at the right end of the Filter field A list of content types appears Select a type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 286 Create Smart Folder Step 5 of 5 Last Editor s Last Hame Status Filter Back NOTE Using Ektron Explorer Web Page Dialog po Ary Ww W Content A Forms Assets doc xls pt pat Cancel qi JPY JPEG Let Jog wed dot Zp cnt LL Smart Forms are included with Content As you can see you can either search for all assets or pick a specific asset type to look for 14 If you want to change any search criteria on any screen click Back and make the changes now Once you press Finish you cannot edit the search criteria If necessary create a new Smart folder with different search criteria 15 Click the Finish button To retrieve content that fits your Smart folder s
500. tent A staged version of content is one that is not published It can be content that is checked in or content that is approved with a pending a start date Staging lets you make changes to content while keeping it from the Web site until you are ready to publish it See Also After you select the content you have the following options Your options may vary depending on your permissions and the status of the content on page 40 Appendix A Content Statuses on page 648 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET on page Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 654 Appendix B Macintosh Support for Ektron CMS400 NET Clients IMPORTANT An additional editor license is required when using the Macintosh as a client and editing content For information on adding the license see the Setup Manual section Macintosh Editor License You can use an Apple Macintosh computer to create and edit Ektron CMS400 content To get the most functionality from Ektron CMS400 NET on the Macintosh use the Safari browser When using a Macintosh to edit content log on to your site as if you were using a PC 1 Open a Safari browser 2 Navigate to your site s login page 3 Click the Login button lf you have access to the Workarea the Workarea button appears and you can start editing While there are a few limitations when using the Macintosh with Safari to edit content almost all functionality is the s
501. ter Web Alert Feature eif manual aliasing is enabled an Alias tab appears To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section URL ALiasing gt Manual Aliasing e assign or change available templates To learn more see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual section Managing HTML Content gt Creating Updating Templates e save changes echeck in content e submit content for approval e publish content to the Web site e access the library 4 Make the necessary edits to the content See Also Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists on page 468 Or you can choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Buttons on the Add Content Screen on page 47 and Tabs on the Edit Content Screen on page 48 Accessing the Edit Content Screen from the Workarea To access the Edit Content screen from the Workarea follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 50 1 Access the View Content screen for the content you want to edit as described in Viewing Content on page 38 2 Select the language whose content blocks you want to view 3 Click the Edit button L The editor opens with the content block inserted 5 From the Edit Content window you can e edit content ecreate or edit a summary e specify metadata for the content eenter or update a commen
502. th nhttp 7 Short Description Add a short description of the site Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 360 Blogs SSS Relationship Enter the relationship of the blog roll link to you or to the site For example brother Click Edit for a pop up screen that helps you choose the site s relationship The table below explains each relationship type Type of Description Relationship URL Check this box if the address is owned by the same person or company Friendship What level of friendship do you have with the person who owns the site Choose one Contact Acquaintance Friend None Physical Check this box if you have physically met the person who owns this blog Professional Does the person who owns this site have a work level relationship with you Select all that apply e Co worker e Colleague Geographical Select one e co resident e neighbor e none Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 361 Blogs Type of Description Relationship If the site owner is family what is the relationship Select one Child Parent Sibling Spouse Kin None Romantic What are your feelings toward the owner of the site Check all that apply Muse Crush Date Sweetheart 7 Click Close NOTE Add as many links to the blog boll as you would like Just click Add a New Roll Link To remove a blog roll link see Removing a Blog Roll Link on page 3
503. that a context sensitive menu available by right clicking the mouse is also available to perform these actions You can right click the mouse then select Insert Field to display a context sensitive menu of all commands Form Post back message Metadata Schedule Comment Notificatio RRR MA osm Ye BEM AZE veo Normal gt a2 10 pt Am BFAA x alli J fab lab e e EE Ta Select Button Place form elements here Checkbox Field Plain Text Field Hidden Field E Fassword Textarea Choices Field Select List Field 2 Done loading Calendar Field gl Inserting Form Fields The final screen of the Forms setup lets you arrange the screen so that it collects exactly the information you want To create the screen you insert fields that prompt a site visitor to enter Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 155 HE Working with HIML Forms information Then add buttons that let the user submit the data on the screen If you chose a sample form at the beginning the screen includes fields If you did not the screen has only a Submit button NOTE In addition to inserting fields you can add explanatory text lines images etc onto the form screen If you want to place fields in columns insert a table and place the fields within table cells The table below explains each field type you can enter Inserts this kind of field Checkbox Hidden Text
504. the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 425 12 Continue to add new items to the menu as needed Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item To add a library asset as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 429 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 430 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link ona Web Page on page 431 Click the radio button next to Library Asset 3 Click the Next button The Add New Item screen appears Enter a title for the library asset that will be on the menu Click Browse Library The library screen opens In the right frame select the type of asset to insert image hyperlink etc NOTE To insert assets the menu s folder must contain library assets However you can insert library assets from other folders for which you have permission 8 Select a library asset and click the Insert button 1 9 The Add New ltem screen reappears 10 Click the Save button H Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item To add an external hyperlink as a menu item via a content folder or the Menus module follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 434 Working with Menus 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 429 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 430 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation L
505. the Get Result button to display the report Display Formats The submitted form data can be viewed in any of these formats e Table with Totals on page 185 e Bar Chart on page 151 e Summary of Selected Choices on page 186 e Table of Values on page 187 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 184 Working with HTML Forms e List of Submitted Values on page 188 e Submitted Data as XML on page 189 Table with Totals The table of values shows the following information for each completed form e a checkbox that lets you delete the response e an internal identification number of the response e the name of the user who submitted the form if he signed in to Ektron CMS400 NET beforehand If the user did not sign in anonymous appears e date response was submitted e The name of each field on the survey under each field name is the submitted response for the each user e the bottom line sums the numerical and percentage totals for each response Sample of Table with Totals Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 185 Working with HTML Forms General Demographic Survey Delete es a Da Gender ji i Subpnitted Male Female 22 25 76 30 31 40 ae Member 12 6 2005 John 23 anonymous 12 6 2005 24 Edit John 12 6 2005 a 40 Hee Average 3 rows i 66 67 Yo 33 33 Xi 33 33 Xo 33 33 33 33 Oa 66 Summary of
506. the content 5 The View Content screen appears view Content CONTACTS eS 3 4 Te Medics Services encourages cai EE us with m PETE snd feedback about our products and services Worldwide Headquarters 5 Northern Blvd Bldg 6 Amherst WH 03031 USA Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Infomektron cam After you select the content you have the following options Your options may vary depending on your permissions and the status of the content Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 40 Tab Properties Content View the content s properties Properties on page 42 Properties Summary Edit Summary Edit content s summary Adding a Content Summary on page 67 Metadata Edit Metadata Edit content s metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 Comment View Comment View comments on changes made when editing content This comment also appears on the View Content and Content History screens Add edit tasks Add or edit tasks for this content Managing Tasks on page 317 Add or edit Web Alerts for this Ektron CMS400 NET content Administrator manual chapter Web Alert Feature Edit Content Open content for editing Editing Content on page 49 w View History View older versions of content Viewing and Restoring restore older version Previous Content on page 99 View Staged Displays staged content Staged Content on page 654
507. the form fields e post back message e metadata e schedule e comments e Web Alerts However to edit a form s Title Description form data or task values use the Edit Properties screen To edit a form follow these steps 1 Access the View Form screen for the form you want to edit as described in Viewing and Editing a Form s Properties on page 192 2 Click the Edit Form button E Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 197 4 5 Working with HTML Forms The Edit Form screen is displayed The screen is the same as the Add New Form screen For documentation of individual fields see Creating a New Form on page 144 Make the necessary changes to the form Click the Save button See Also Working with HTML Forms on page 141 Editing a Form s Content You can edit the content associated with the form by a variety of methods including Accessing the content by the floating toolbar on the Web page Editing the content by the View Form screen Accessing the content by the View Form content properties screen This section explains how to edit a form s content from the View Form screen To edit a form s content follow these steps 1 a SS Y Access the View Form screen for the content as described in Viewing a Form s Information on page 191 Click the Edit Content button The Edit Content screen appears Make the necessary cha
508. the menu click the Delete gt Posts 3 The Delete Blog Post screen appears Delete Contents of Folder Life Story ID Status Date Modified Last Editor _ Title F The Story of My Life 395 Approved 2 1 2006 5 16 58 PM Administrator a Writing a Masterpiece 396 Approved 2 1 2006 1 06 34 PM Administrator 4 Click the check box next to each post you want to delete To select all posts click the check box next to Title 5 Click the Delete Contents button ff 6 A dialog box appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 376 Blogs Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 Click OK to delete the selected posts Blog Comments WARNING Do not confuse blog comments with history comments You can add a history comment to the blog post by clicking the Comment tab This is not the same as adding a comment to a blog post on a site When you add a history comment it has the same properties as a comment associated with content Blog comments allow site visitors to interact with a blog by adding their thoughts about a blog post The blog administrator controls commenting by deciding who can add comments and if they require approval for publication See Also e Controlling Blog Comments on page 377 e Comments on the Site on page 380 e Comments in the Workarea on page 382 Controlling Blog Comments Ektron CMS400 NET provides three properties for controlling comm
509. the selected area such as blur sharpen cut and delete NOTE Once you press the Select command it remains selected and continues to be active until you press it a second time Sharpen Standard Toolbar Button A Description Sharpens edges within an image You can select a level of sharpness from 1 through 5 Sharpening brings an image into better focus and increases the detail If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 548 Editing Images w Sharpen OFX men Text Standard Toolbar Button T Description Places text on an image You can also change the text s size font color and attributes bold italic etc To use the Text command follow these steps Click the Text button T Move the cursor to where you want to place the text 3 Click the mouse button and drag a rectangle in which to insert the text NOTE Make sure the rectangle is large enough to accommodate your text The rectangle disappears after you enter text 4 Type the text 5 Click outside the rectangle to close it 6 To change the text or its font size style color etc place the cursor over the text and right click the mouse The text attributes dialog appears Dialog Box Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 549 Editing Images Attributes Font Attributes Color
510. the spacebar may not insert a space See Math Expression editor Keyboard Input for details When the cursor is in a text template it changes to an l beam shape as shown below x mass of lobject 20 You can insert a text template from the layout templates palette on the toolbar MS Mathematical Expression oyo i cosin 4 DUB Lasin JZ ne Y Y fes Template Blanks When you insert a new template into an equation small squares indicate the empty slots or template blanks where data should be inserted When you insert a template the cursor automatically jumps to the first template blank If you want to fill in the template blanks later move the cursor out of the template without entering characters Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 642 Working with the Math Expression Editor Just reposition the cursor in the template when you are ready to fill it in Moving Directly to Template Blanks Because selecting a template blank is such a common task there are two kinds of shortcuts Hitting the lt TAB gt key cycles between all open template blanks You can also move the cursor to a template blank by clicking it with the mouse Keyboard Input Typing letters numbers and symbols from the keyboard inserts them into the current equation at the current cursor position In addition special keyboard shortcuts can be used to cut paste insert templates and pe
511. the value entered for each field appears below the header Sample of Table of Values Format General Demographic Survey Delete ID Submitted Date Gender Age Education Annual Household By Submitted range Level Income Income E 22 Member 12 6 2005 Male 22 25 High 40 000 60 000 L John 4 18 50 School GED 49 999 69 999 5 Pm F 23 anonymous 12 6 2005 Female 31 40 Master s 70 000 100 000 b 4 22 58 Degree 79 999 149 000 Pm E 24 Edit John 12 6 2005 Male 26 30 High 30 000 430 000 5 4 23 40 School GED 39 999 39 999 Pm List of Submitted Values The List of Submitted Values format provides the same information as the Table of Values but is formatted vertically rather than horizontally See Also Table of Values on page 187 Sample List of Submitted Values Format Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 188 Working with HTML Forms General Demographic Survey Delete ID Submitted By Date Submitted Field d F 22 Member John 12 6 2005 4 18 50 PM Gender Age range Education Level Annual Income Household Income Marital Status Religious Other Religious Affiliation Race Mothers Education Level Fathers Education Level F 23 anonymous 12 6 2005 4 22 58 PM Gender ge range Education Level Annual Income Household Income Marital Status Relinimiss Submitted Data as XML Yalue Male 22 22 High Schooal GE 40 000 49 9 60 000 69 9
512. tion gt Setup Click the Edit button L Locate the Built In User field O Edit the built in user information by changing the username and password 5 Click the Update button f NOTE If you cannot sign in to Ektron CMS400 NET because the builtin user password was changed and you don t know the new password use the BuiltinAccountReset exe utility This resets your Ektron CMS400 NET user password to Builtin Builtin This utility is located in c Program Files Ektron CMS400v6x Utilities Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 ii Table of Contents Securing Ektron CMS400 NET ccceseceseeeseeceseeeneeenees i Security UNECK IS atin i Additional Information cccceceeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees ii What s New in the 6 1 Release cccsscscsssesseeneneeneeeeeenes Introduction to Ektron CMS400 NET 1 What is a Content Block scscsiiccsssicsicentcessansssseesetsessenesssweseessennane 1 Types of Content ssasssnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnne 5 Workflow in Ektron CMS400 NET ccsssecsesseeesseeeeeseesenees 7 Editing Content Sennen tice meer tt eer eer rer mtn tt mee eer Tren 8 The Lifecycle of Content cccssssseessesseeeeesseeescenseessenseeesenees 9 EOC Nana OUT issirinko 10 Pror NS r tandem ietetisumereenentereniendeian 10 Logging into the Sample Web Site
513. tis Health Center Hews 7v ai eit Can Arthritis Be Prevented Altherigkh it manu nat ha narrihla te 4 Click edit next to any content item 5 The editor zone appears Your system administrator determines its location on the page The fields in the editor zone vary depending on the type of content you are working with Editor Zone Close Modify the properties of the Web Part then click OK or Apply to apply your changes Content Title Home Layout Chrome State one VWlainZone ka Zone Index 6 You can replace the content item with another of the same type In the above illustration you can replace the content block Home To do so click the button to the right of the title When you do a popup window prompts you to select a different item of the same type Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 394 Personalizing a Web Page Editor Z net E DOR einen S CMS400 Select Content Microsoft Internet E E e EJ Modify the properties of the click OK or Apply to agg Select Content Lene Degen epey Deen Danag Dea fee Dogan Depag Depag Danag ayey Doge Depay Degan Depen Depan Dogan Daneg Toney Tayag Dene De Seg Danan Day Content Title Home Layout Chrome State Normal wt Wlainone w Please select content by navigating the folders below E Path CMS400Demo About Usi News E Ektron Rated Positive B Ektron to Demonstrate He
514. tly published version Staged Displays the staged version of content See Also Staged Content on page 654 To switch between views click the corresponding View tab First Use of the View Content Difference Feature The first time the View Content Difference screen is used on a client machine a simple installation program is performed Click YES when the following screen appears Security Warning Do you want to install and run Ektron ewebDift signed on 1 9 2004 2 40 PM and distributed by Ektron Inc Publisher authenticity verified by VenSign Class 3 Code Signing 2001 CA Caution Ektron Inc asserts that this content is safe You should only installview this content if you trust Ektron Ine to make that assertion More Info When the installation program completes close and reopen the View Content Difference feature Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 98 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Past versions of published content are available unless your system administrator purged them Your ability to view a content item s history is determined by your user privileges After viewing a previous versions of content you can replace the current version with any previous version NOTE This section explains how to view and possibly restore older versions of content To see a change by change comparison of two content
515. to enter a password A password is like a text field but the user s entry appears as dots instead of characters This prevents an onlooker from seeing the password A user s password entry cannot exceed 18 characters To insert a password field follow these steps 1 Place a plain text field lab onto the screen See Also Adding a Field to the Screen on page 154 2 The following dialog appears Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 166 Working with HTML Forms Descriptive Hame Fid Field Name Fed Tool Tip Text Field Default value Validation Validation No validation r Error Message Fields on the Password Dialog e a Descriptive Enter a description of the field Name This text describes the field on form reports See Viewing Form Reports on page 184 Field Name Enter a name for this field This text identifies the field in the database and in email if the form is mailed Note You cannot enter spaces nor most special characters amp lt gt into this field If you do they are replaced by underscores Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 167 Working with HTML Forms pre ie Tool Tip Text Enter text that appears when a site visitor hovers the cursor over this field circled in red below C Check if you are over 65 Default If you want to set a default value for this field ent
516. tron CMS400 NET until the date specified When you view content on the Web site you see the previously published version When the go live date occurs the new content replaces the previously published version and the content s status changes to Active setting an End Date on Content To set an end date for content follow these steps 1 a ge IN ra Access the editor by adding new content or editing an existing one If adding new content enter a title and content Click the calendar button next to the End Date field A calendar pops up Select the date and time you want the content to be removed from the Web site Click the Done button The date and time appear in the End Date field NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not be removed at the intended time Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 63 Scheduling Content to Begin and End What Happens After Set an End Date If you set an end date to content and it gets published to your Web site the content is visible on the Web site When content reaches its end date you have three choices for what to do with it These are explained in Setting Archive Options on page 64 If your choice means the content will not appear on the Web site Ektron recommends having another content item ready to replace it If not and a site
517. ts content 9 Click the Add button FR See Also Creating a Collection on page 407 Working with Collections on page 401 Creating New Content for a Collection You can create new content while adding content links to a collection To add content follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 412 Working with Collections 1 Access the View Collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 403 2 Access the View Collection Screen for a collection as described in Viewing a Collection on page 405 3 If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support select the language of the collection Click the Add button qj The Add Items to Collection screen appears 6 If your collection includes subfolders and you want to add the content to one of them navigate to that subfolder Otherwise proceed to the next step Click the Add Content button 8 The Add Content screen appears If you are using Ektron CMS400 NET s multi language support the content s language appears next to the title The language is derived from the collection s language and cannot be changed Edit Content in Folder Press Releases Wa ba al OK Title Erron An Announces Winner of All Stars Customer cael English U S Content Meta Data Schedule
518. tton a 3 A page lists each content item that links to the current content Click the title to access the View Content page for the selected content From there you can remove or change the Quicklink Adding Subfolders Since the procedure for adding new folders is usually only granted to administrators it is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Adding Subfolders Deleting Folders Since the procedure for adding new folders is usually only granted to administrators it is documented in the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator manual section Managing Content Folders gt Deleting Subfolders Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 55 Workarea Toolbar Buttons The top of many Workarea screens feature a toolbar that contains buttons for performing actions This section explains the buttons functions Description Adds items in several places Accesses the add calendar event screen in the Workarea In a content folder opens the editor and allows you to create new content See Also Adding Content on page 45 Add Content Folder In a content folder allows you to create a subfolder to further organize your content See Also Adding Subfolders on page 55 Add Library Item In the library folder allows you to upload an image or file or add a hyperlink or Quicklink to use in content See Also Li
519. ty Dialog on page 619 Heading Columns Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 619 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 616 Horizontal Caption Alignment Vertical Caption Alignment Abbreviation WARNING WARNING Ektron CMS400 NET User Section 508 Compliance For more information see Accessibility Dialog on page 619 Where applied Accessibility dialog Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 619 Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 619 Accessibility dialog Accessibility Dialog on page 619 Cell properties dialog Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 621 Accessibility Fields on Cell Properties Dialog on page 621 Cell properties dialog The Section 508 Table Properties dialog only works if Internet Explorer version 6 0 or higher is installed Once that is installed any browser can be used Netscape FireFox IE etc Even if you change no values on the screen you must open the Accessibility dialog whenever you modify a table for example add a new row The table s properties required for Section 508 are generated when you click OK to close the dialog box To create a 508 compliant table follow these steps 1 Create a new table or edit an existing one as explained in Introduction to Tables on page 554 2 Select the table by moving the cursor to a table bord
520. u FL Ut I Hl nbsp TM cH Tags enter multiple tags comma delimited 3 Ifthe user creating the post is a member of the blog s approval chain it is published immediately If not it is surrounded by a yellow border and a member of the approval chain must approve it before it can appear on the Web site For more information on working with permissions and approvals see the Administrator Manual section Setting Approval Chains Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 374 Blogs World Population to reach 6 5 Billion Last Edited by bobuser bobuser on 6 2 2006 1 33 05 PM Status 5 Mo comments 4 Once the post Is published it appears within the blog on the Web site Tags on the Summary Page You can add tags to a blog post to further define information about the post for blog search engines For example you create a blog post about your favorite band Ektronica and enter the following tags Music Guitars Rock amp Roll When a person visits a blog search site and searches for Rock amp Roll music your blog post appears Some blog search sites have a page specifically for searching blog tags Editing a Blog Post NoTE Tobe able to edit a blog post you must have Edit permission onthe blogs Standard Permissions screen Follow these steps to edit a blog post IMPORTANT If another editor changes a blog post the posting information reflects the new
521. u Item on page 434 Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 434 Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 435 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module To add a menu item via the Menus module follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 430 Working with Menus From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Click the menu that you want to add a menu item to In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu 4 To add anew item to the selected menu or any submenus on it move the cursor over the menu item and click Add from the popup menu NOTE When moving the cursor to the popup menu avoid moving across other menus or options When you move across another menu or option it may become selected instead of the item you want to work with View Menu O ped M Delete A 5 The Add New ltem screen displays a list of items that you can add to the menu Use to the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add it Menu item type For more information see Content Adding Content as a Menu Item on page 432 Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item Quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu on page 434 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 434 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 435 Adding
522. u can also assign task via the content folder as illustrated below View Content ASP NET Unleashed E Content a T Meta Data I TO Title ASP NET Unleashed Subject Computer Programming ISBN 067232542 Assigning a Task from the View Content Screen To assign a task from the View Content screen follow these steps Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 330 2 Managing Tasks Access the View Content screen for the content to which you want to attach in a task as described in Viewing Content on page 38 Click the Add Task button CA IMPORTANT The Add Task button only appears if your system administrator has granted you permission to add tasks For more information see the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Permissions 3 Viewing a Task Follow the directions in Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 319 The only differences are the content s ID number and title appear on the screen the language of the content is the default language Once a task is added with the exception of Administrators and users given permission to create tasks only the user who assigned the task and those to whom the task was assigned can view it To view a task follow these steps Viewing a Task from the Content Folder a 1 D Access the Contents folder from the left side of your Workarea Select the content associ
523. u should review all content with links to it and remove or update the link To delete an item from the library follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 127 2 Click the Delete button i 3 The Delete Library Item screen is displayed If appropriate check the box next to Remove from the server see above 5 Click the Delete button i Adding a Library File to Content After a file is copied to the library users can add it to content See Adding a Library File to Content on page 133 You can also insert an item into the library while adding it to content See Adding a File to the Library and Inserting it into Content on page 135 If you insert an image file it appears within the content If you add any other type of file the file name appears as a hyperlink within the content When a site visitor viewing that page clicks the hyperlink the inserted file is launched Adding a Library File to Content 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing content in Ektron CMS400 NET Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 133 Library Folder Edit Content in Folder Press Releases Title Ektron Announces Winner of All stars Customer Compet English U9 Content Meta Data Schedule Apply Style Normal 2 10 pt 7 A Qe B z U A a BBBAAASP S Om Fo AeA A 2 nbsp gi Elpa
524. ubmit a request to delete the Adding Content on content If you are the last or page 45 only approver the content is immediately deleted See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 85 Go to previous window Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 649 Checked In Content lf content has a green border it could mean that the content is checked in A checked in content item is one to which changes were made after which it was checked in instead of being submitted or published When content is checked in it is accessible to all users who have permissions to edit it They can check it out and change it Keep in mind that the content seen on the template is not the same as the content in the editor view Content Title About Us Checked In by Application Administrator ktre Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordable a full featured content management systems address the c organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content rmananement Wath Eetron s hroweser haced salitians hrisiness See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 85 Each option you may perform on checked in content is described below Button f Name Description For more information see iE Edit Check out the content to Editing Content on page 49 change it EJ Edit Summary Edit its summary Adding a Content S
525. ummary on page 67 Ej Edit Metadata Edit its metadata Adding or Editing Metadata on page 71 Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 650 Button Name Description For more information see be Submit Publish Submit content into approval A ey chain If you are last approver in the approval chain the publish button appears If you click it the content is immediately posted to Web site Fr View Staged View Staged button displays Staged Content on page 654 Pa E Published content that hasn t been published yet View Published button displays content live on the Web site H Delete Submit a request to delete the Example of an Approval Chain content into approval chain If on page 85 you are the last or only approver the content is immediately deleted Back Go to previous window Checked Out Content If content has a red border it was checked out by a user other than you If you checked it out the border is green While in this status other users are prevented from editing the content Ektron encourages you to contact us with y feedback about Ektron s Web content auth solutions The content remains checked out until it is checked in by the user who checked it out or your system administrator Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 651 Each option you may perform on checked out content is described below CE C
526. version awaiting approval and the currently published content See Also Comparing Versions of Content on page 92 Return to previous screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 84 Approving Declining Content Approve Decline Several Content Items To approve several submitted content items without reviewing them follow these steps 1 Select the submitted content you want to approve as described in Approve Decline One Content Item on page 83 2 Click the Approve All button A 3 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer a x Pi This action will approve all the selected content changes awaiting your approval S This may cause some content blocks to become published or deleted Do you wish to continue 4 To continue click OK 5 The approved content is either submitted to the next publisher published immediately to the Web site or deleted depending on the approval chain set for the content Example of an Approval Chain The approval chain begins when a content contributor submits a new or edited content If email is enabled an email is sent to the next approver in the approval chain The following example follows a typical content block from creation to publication Three users make up this approval chain e Sports Writer creates sports content e Sports Editor edits and publishes all sports articles e Editor In Chief edits and publ
527. visitor goes to the page containing the content he sees the template without the content Appearance on Content Reports After content reaches its end date it appears on the Expired Content report which helps you keep track of expired content See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Expired Content Report Also the Content to Expire report lists all content whose end date will occur within a number of days that you specify See Also The Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual gt Content Reports gt Content to Expire Report Setting Archive Options After setting an End Date you can specify content s archive options which determine what happens upon reaching its end date time To be eligible for any option the content must reach its end date time progress through its approval chain and be published Until those events occur the content remains visible both within its content folder and on the site The archive options illustrated below appear below the Start Date and End Date fields on the content s Schedule screen Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 64 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Action on End Date Archive and remove from site fexpire C Archive and remain on site C Add to the CMS Refresh Report Each option is explained below Archive Options Can site visitors view content Can users view an
528. w the file within its host application View Content topic links Content File links to topics in POF s txt View read only Asset 5 If you want to view the file before editing it click the View read only Asset button If you do the file opens for display purposes only To edit the file click the Edit button The following screen appears Edit Content b El Wa bia ae gE Title topic links Englisl Content wel Select file to be uploaded File CADOCUME 1 BBOLT 1 EKTLOC Work Offline 8 To open the managed file in the host application click Edit in App Then make your changes save it in the host application and click either the Check in Ei or Submit for Publishing button amp Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 236 Using the Document Management Functionality lf you want to save this version of the file to your computer click Save to Local If you do a window appears Navigate to the desired folder then click the Save button If you want to select another file on your computer or network and save it under this name in Ektron CMS400 NET click Browse If you do a window appears Navigate to the desired folder then click the Open button The new file is saved under the old Ektron CMS400 NET name 9 Edit the managed file as well as its summary metadata schedule tasks or comments See Also e Adding a Content Summa
529. wn design Examples of content that might appear on a personalized page are frequently updated information such as news stories sports scores a calendar and stock market data A user gets his personalized view of the customized page after logging into any computer The customization is tied to the user not a specific computer IMPORTANT The Personalization feature requires Internet Explorer 5 or higher You cannot use other browsers The following topics explain personalization in more detail e Types of Content that Can Be Personalized on page 387 e Which Web Pages Can be Personalized on page 388 e Personalization and Permissions on page 388 e Layout of a Personalization Page on page 388 e Personalizing a Web Page on page 389 e The Personalization Menu on page 390 e Editing Sequence on page 391 Types of Content that Can Be Personalized e Content e Calendars e Collections e Blogs e HTML Forms Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 387 Personalizing a Web Page e List Summary e Contentlist e Discussion Forum NOTE Assets cannot be personalized Which Web Pages Can be Personalized Your administrator will tell which Web pages you can personalize Personalization can be enabled on any number of pages In the sample Web site provided with Ektron CMS400 NET the http localhost cms400demo mypage aspx and http localhost cms400demo mypageadvance aspx page
530. xample if you check this box the strings Bob and BOB are not highlighted because their only difference is the case of the characters Ignore Format Determines whether comparison ignores Attributes changes in text formatting attributes HTML Visual Analysis only After updating setup information click OK to save changes Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 96 Comparing Versions of Content Content Area The content area displays the content comparison cms Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Welcome to RC international Re s ie is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve EC racing In three Re ational has become one of the leading manufactures of EC racing and flying vehicles Cur dedicatio sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO community We will continue strivit improve our attordable products and hope you wil become an RC international member The following table describes the change indicators Plain black text Trinitys new pipe and Unchanged Yellow highlighted text Our dedication tothe Added View Tabs When viewing content in the View Content Difference feature there are three view modes explained below Compares published version of content to staged version Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 97 Comparing Versions of Content Published Displays curren
531. y nested structure using the arrow keys If you find yourself having a hard time getting the cursor where you want it with the arrow keys use the mouse to position the cursor where you need it Cursor Shapes Math Cursor When you start a new equation the cursor automatically starts as a blinking vertical red line When the Math Expression editor window loses focus the cursor changes to gray and stops blinking The vertical line is the normal cursor in Math Expression editor As you type the editor begins inserting characters into the equation and the cursor moves to show the insertion point Also a faint gray box appears outlining the template in which the cursor is currently located As you move around in an equation the gray outline shifts giving you a visual cue about the nesting structure of the underlying MathML as illustrated below Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 640 Working with the Math Expression Editor LP a A En ltx Hh x2 lx In the first two illustrations the cursor is located in the numerator and denominator of a fraction and the outlined parent is the row template containing the entire numerator and denominator respectively In the third illustration the cursor is on the left edge of the fraction itself and the outlined parent is a wrapper row containing nothing but the fraction itself Token Cursor Math Expression editor automatically puts characters into spec
532. ystem administrator then creates or updates a Web page to display the collections using the ecmCollection function or server control NOTE Your system administrator must assign to you permission to work with collections For details see the Collections chapter of the Ektron CMS400 NET Administrator Manual This section explains how to find create and manage collections through the following subtopics e Finding Collections on page 402 e Viewing a Collection on page 405 e Creating a Collection on page 407 e Editing Content in a Collection on page 414 e Reordering Collections List on page 415 e Editing Collection Information on page 416 e Deleting a Collection on page 416 e Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 417 e Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Features on page 418 Finding Collections Every collection is assigned to a folder To find the collections assigned to any folder navigate to it and click the Collection button Ektron CMS400 NET User Manual Version 6 1 for NET 2 0 Revision 3 402 Working with Collections h For more information see Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 403 Since collections can be assigned to any content folder the Modules folder provides a central Collections folder which displays all collections regardless of their content folder For more information see Finding a Co

Ektron CMS400.NET User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents